Yaskawa Varispeed F7 CIMR-F7C Inverter Instruction Manual

PDF

Dokumentas

Reklama

Current Vector Controlled, General-Purpose Inverter
Varispeed F7
Instruction Manual and
Parameter Description
Model: CIMR-F7C
YEG -TOE-S616-55.1
Contents
Warnings....................................................................................................... VII
Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use ............................................... VIII
EMC Compatibility ......................................................................................... IX
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)............................................................ XI
Registered Trademarks ............................................................................... XIV
1
Handling Inverters .................................................................. 1-1
Varispeed F7 Introduction.............................................................................1-2
Varispeed F7 Applications .............................................................................................. 1-2
Varispeed F7 Models ...................................................................................................... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery ........................................................................1-4
Checks............................................................................................................................ 1-4
Nameplate Information ................................................................................................... 1-4
Component Names......................................................................................................... 1-6
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions...............................................................1-8
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00) ....................................................................................... 1-8
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1) ................................................................... 1-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ............................................1-10
Installation Site .............................................................................................................1-10
Controlling the Ambient Temperature ...........................................................................1-10
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter..................................................................1-10
Installation Orientation and Space.............................................................. 1-11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover .............................................1-12
Removing the Terminal Cover ......................................................................................1-12
Attaching the Terminal Cover........................................................................................1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ........................1-13
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less......................................................................................... 1-13
Inverters of 22 kW or More ...........................................................................................1-16
2
Wiring....................................................................................... 2-1
Connections to Peripheral Devices ..............................................................2-2
Connection Diagram .....................................................................................2-3
Circuit Descriptions......................................................................................................... 2-4
Terminal Block Configuration........................................................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals .......................................................................2-6
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ...................................................... 2-6
I

Main Circuit Terminal Functions................................................................................... 2-11
Main Circuit Configurations .......................................................................................... 2-12
Standard Connection Diagrams ................................................................................... 2-13
Wiring the Main Circuits ............................................................................................... 2-14
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................................................. 2-21

Wire Sizes ................................................................................................................... 2-21
Control Circuit Terminal Functions ............................................................................... 2-23
Control Circuit Terminal Connections........................................................................... 2-26
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions ............................................................................... 2-27
Wiring Check.............................................................................................. 2-28
Checks ......................................................................................................................... 2-28
Installing and Wiring Option Cards............................................................. 2-29

3
Option Card Models and Specifications ....................................................................... 2-29
Installation .................................................................................................................... 2-29
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications................................................. 2-30
Wiring ........................................................................................................................... 2-32
Wiring Terminal Blocks................................................................................................. 2-36
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses ............................................................ 2-37
Digital Operator and Modes....................................................3-1
Digital Operator ............................................................................................ 3-2
Digital Operator Display ................................................................................................. 3-2
Digital Operator Keys ..................................................................................................... 3-2
Modes .......................................................................................................... 3-4

4
Inverter Modes ............................................................................................................... 3-4
Switching Modes ............................................................................................................ 3-5
Drive Mode ..................................................................................................................... 3-6
Quick Programming Mode.............................................................................................. 3-7
Advanced Programming Mode....................................................................................... 3-8
Verify Mode .................................................................................................................. 3-10
Autotuning Mode .......................................................................................................... 3-11
Trial Operation .........................................................................4-1
Trial Operation Procedure ............................................................................ 4-2
Trial Operation.............................................................................................. 4-3
Application Confirmation ................................................................................................ 4-3
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper

II
(400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher).................................................................... 4-3
Power ON....................................................................................................................... 4-3
Checking the Display Status .......................................................................................... 4-4
Basic Settings................................................................................................................. 4-5
Settings for the Control Methods.................................................................................... 4-7
Autotuning ...................................................................................................................... 4-9
Application Settings ...................................................................................................... 4-12
No-load Operation ........................................................................................................ 4-12
Loaded Operation .........................................................................................................4-12
Check and Recording User Constants .........................................................................4-13
Adjustment Suggestions.............................................................................4-14
5
User Constants ....................................................................... 5-1
User Constant Descriptions..........................................................................5-2
Description of User Constant Tables .............................................................................. 5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ...........................................5-3
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode .................................................. 5-4
User Constant Tables ...................................................................................5-7

6
A: Setup Settings ............................................................................................................ 5-7
Application Constants: b ................................................................................................. 5-9
Tuning Constants: C .....................................................................................................5-17
Reference Constants: d ................................................................................................5-23
Motor Constants: E .......................................................................................................5-27
Option Constants: F......................................................................................................5-32
Terminal Function Constants: H ...................................................................................5-36
Protection Function Constants: L..................................................................................5-45
N: Special Adjustments.................................................................................................5-55
Digital Operator Constants: o .......................................................................................5-56
T: Motor Autotuning ......................................................................................................5-60
U: Monitor Constants ....................................................................................................5-61
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02) ...................................5-67
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) ................................. 5-69
Constant Settings by Function.............................................. 6-1
Application and Overload Selections............................................................6-2
Select the Overload to Suit the Application .................................................................... 6-2
Frequency Reference ...................................................................................6-6
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source ................................................................... 6-6
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation ................................................................................. 6-9
Run Command ........................................................................................... 6-11
Selecting the Run Command Source ........................................................................... 6-11
Stopping Methods.......................................................................................6-13
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input..................................6-13
Using the DC Injection Brake........................................................................................6-16
Using an Emergency Stop ............................................................................................6-17
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics...........................................6-18
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times ...............................................................6-18
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function).....................................6-21
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration
(Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function) ...........................................................6-21
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration
(Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function)...........................................................6-23
III
Adjusting Frequency References ............................................................... 6-25
Adjusting Analog Frequency References ..................................................................... 6-25
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)....................................... 6-27
Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Input............................................. 6-29
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ................................... 6-30
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency........................................................................... 6-30
Limiting Minimum Frequency ....................................................................................... 6-30
Frequency Detection .................................................................................. 6-32
Speed Agreement Function.......................................................................................... 6-32
Improved Operating Efficiency ................................................................... 6-35

Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function).............................. 6-35
Torque Compensating for Sufficient Torque at Start and Low-speed Operation ......... 6-37
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) (for V/f with PG only) ............................................ 6-39
Hunting-Prevention Function........................................................................................ 6-42
Stabilizing Speed (Automatic Frequency Regulator).................................................... 6-43
Machine Protection .................................................................................... 6-44

Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function) ............................................................. 6-44
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation................................................................. 6-46
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input .................. 6-47
Detecting Motor Torque ................................................................................................ 6-47
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input ....... 6-50
Motor Overload Protection ........................................................................................... 6-51
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs ....................................... 6-53
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction and Output Phase Rotation..................................... 6-55
Automatically Restart ................................................................................. 6-56

Restarting Automatically After Momentary Power Loss ............................................... 6-56
Speed Search............................................................................................................... 6-57
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference is Lost ........... 6-62
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function) ............................ 6-63
Inverter Protection ...................................................................................... 6-64

Overheating Protection for an Inverter-Mounted Braking Resistor............................... 6-64
Inverter Overheat Protection ........................................................................................ 6-65
Input Open Phase Protection ....................................................................................... 6-65
Output Open Phase Protection .................................................................................... 6-66
Ground Fault Protection ............................................................................................... 6-66
Cooling Fan Control ..................................................................................................... 6-67
Setting the Ambient Temperature................................................................................. 6-67
OL2 Characteristics at Low Speed............................................................................... 6-68
Soft CLA Selection ....................................................................................................... 6-68
Input Terminal Functions ............................................................................ 6-69
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit
Terminals ...................................................................................................................... 6-69
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)...................................................... 6-70
OH2 (Overheat) Alarm Signal Input ............................................................................. 6-71
IV

Multifunction Analog Input A2 Disable/Enable..............................................................6-71
Drive Enable/Disable ....................................................................................................6-71
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold) .......6-72
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/DOWN)..... 6-73
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References
(+/- Speed)....................................................................................................................6-76
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing............................................................6-77
Switching Operation Source to Communication Option Card....................................... 6-78

Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands
(FJOG/RJOG)...............................................................................................................6-78
Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors (External Error Function) .................6-79
Output Terminal Functions..........................................................................6-80
Monitor Constants ......................................................................................6-70
Using the Analog Monitor Constants ............................................................................6-83
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents .............................................................................6-85
Individual Functions....................................................................................6-86

Using MEMOBUS Communications .............................................................................6-86
Using the Timer Function............................................................................................6-101
Using PID Control .......................................................................................................6-102
Energy-saving.............................................................................................................6-111
Field Weakening .........................................................................................................6-113
Setting Motor 1 Constants ..........................................................................................6-114
Setting the V/f Pattern 1..............................................................................................6-116
Setting Motor 2 Constants ..........................................................................................6-122
Setting the V/f Pattern 2..............................................................................................6-123
Kinetic Energy Buffering (KEB)...................................................................................6-124
Digital Operator Functions........................................................................6-127

Setting Digital Operator Functions..............................................................................6-127
Copying Constants .....................................................................................................6-130
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator .............................................6-134
Setting a Password.....................................................................................................6-134
Displaying User-set Constants Only ...........................................................................6-135
Options .....................................................................................................6-136
Performing Speed Control with PG.............................................................................6-136
7
Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ............................................................7-2

Fault Detection................................................................................................................7-2
Alarm Detection .............................................................................................................. 7-8
Operation Errors ...........................................................................................................7-11
Errors During Autotuning ..............................................................................................7-13
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function................................................7-14
Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................7-15
If Constants Cannot Be Set ..........................................................................................7-15
If the Motor Does Not Operate......................................................................................7-16
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed ........................................................ 7-17
V

If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow.................................. 7-17
If the Motor Operates at Higher Speed Than the Frequency Reference...................... 7-18
If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision ..................................... 7-18
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Open-loop Vector
Control Mode................................................................................................................ 7-18
If Motor Deceleration is Slow........................................................................................ 7-19
If a Vertical-Axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied
(Brake ON/OFF Controlled by Digital Output) .............................................................. 7-19
If the Motor Overheats.................................................................................................. 7-19
If peripheral devices like PLC’s or other are influenced by the

8
starting or running inverter ........................................................................................... 7-20
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When a RUN Command is Input.................. 7-20
If There is Mechanical Oscillation................................................................................. 7-21
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped ....................................... 7-21
If OV (Overvoltage) is Detected When a Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls ........................ 7-22
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference...................................... 7-22
Maintenance and Inspection ..................................................8-1
Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................ 8-2

9
Outline of Maintenance .................................................................................................. 8-2
Daily Inspection .............................................................................................................. 8-2
Periodic Inspection ......................................................................................................... 8-2
Periodic Maintenance of Parts ....................................................................................... 8-3
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline ................................................................................. 8-4
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card........................................... 8-6
Specifications ..........................................................................9-1
Standard Inverter Specifications .................................................................. 9-2
Specifications by Model.................................................................................................. 9-2
Common Specifications.................................................................................................. 9-4
10
Appendix ................................................................................10-1
Inverter Application Precautions ................................................................ 10-2

Selection....................................................................................................................... 10-2
Installation .................................................................................................................... 10-3
Settings ........................................................................................................................ 10-3
Handling ....................................................................................................................... 10-4
Motor Application Precautions ................................................................... 10-5
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor ....................................................... 10-5
Using the Inverter for Special Motors ........................................................................... 10-6
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains) ..................... 10-6
User Constants .......................................................................................... 10-7
VI
Warnings
CAUTION
Cables must not be connected or disconnected, nor signal tests carried out, while the power is
switched on.
The Varispeed DC bus capacitor remains charged even after the power has been switched off. To
avoid an electric shock hazard, disconnect the frequency inverter from the mains before carrying out
maintenance. Then wait for at least 5 minutes after all LEDs have gone out.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the Varispeed. The frequency inverter contains
semiconductors, which are not designed for such high voltages.
Do not remove the digital operator while the mains supply is switched on. The printed circuit board
must also not be touched while the inverter is connected to the power.
Never connect general LC/RC interference suppression filters, capacitors or overvoltage protection
devices to the inverter input or output.
To avoid unnecessary overcurrent faults, etc, being displayed, the signaling contacts of any contactor
or switch fitted between inverter and motor must be integrated into the inverter control logic (eg
baseblock).
This is absolutely imperative!
This manual must be read thoroughly before connecting and operating the inverter. All safety
precautions and instructions for use must be followed.
The inverter may must be operated with the appropriate line filters, following the installation
instructions in this manual and with all covers closed and terminals covered.
Only then will adequate protection be provided. Please do not connect or operate any equipment with
visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment
damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
VII
Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use!
1. General
Please read these safety precautions and instructions for use thoroughly before installing and operating this
inverter. Also read all of the warning signs on the inverter and ensure they are never damaged or removed.
Live and hot inverter components may be accessible during operation. Removal of housing components, the
digital operator or terminal covers runs the risk of serious injuries or damage in the event of incorrect installation or operation. The fact that frequency inverters control rotating mechanical machine components can give
rise to other dangers.
The instructions in this manual must be followed. Installation, operation and maintenance may only be carried
out by qualified personnel. For the purposes of the safety precautions, qualified personnel are defined as individuals who are familiar with the installation, starting, operation and maintenance of frequency inverters and
have the proper qualifications for this work. Safe operation of these units is only possible if they are used
properly for their intended purpose.
The DC bus capacitors can remain live from about 5 minutes after the inverter is disconnected from the power.
It is therefore necessary to wait for this time before opening its covers. All of the main circuit terminals may
still carry dangerous voltages.
Children and other unauthorized persons must not be allowed access to these inverters.
Keep these Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use readily accessible and supply them to all persons with
any form of access to the inverters.
2. Intended Use
Frequency inverters are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery.
Their installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive:
EN 50178, 1997-10,
Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices
EN 60204-1, 1997-12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices
Part 1: General Requirements (IEC 60204-1:1997)/
Please note: Includes Corrigendum of September 1998
EN 61010-1, A2, 1995 Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment
(IEC 950, 1991 + A1, 1992 + A2, 1993 + A3, 1995 + A4, 1996, modified)
CE marking is carried out to EN 50178, using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appropriate installation instructions.
3. Transportation and storage
The instructions for transportation, storage and proper handling must be followed in accordance with the technical data.
4. Installation
Install and cool the inverters as specified in the documentation. The cooling air must flow in the specified
direction. The inverter may therefore only be operated in the specified position (eg upright). Maintain the
specified clearances. Protect the inverters against impermissible loads. Components must not be bent nor insulation clearances changed. To avoid damage being caused by static electricity, do not touch any electronic
components or contacts.
VIII
5. Electrical Connection
Carry out any work on live equipment in compliance with the national safety and accident prevention regulations. Carry out electrical installation in compliance with the relevant regulations. In particular, follow the
installation instructions ensuring electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), eg shielding, grounding, filter
arrangement and laying of cables. This also applies to equipment with the CE mark. It is the responsibility of
the manufacturer of the system or machine to ensure conformity with EMC limits.
Your supplier or Yaskawa representative must be contacted when using leakage current circuit braker in conjunction with frequency inverters.
In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the
relevant safety and accident prevention regulations. The frequency inverter hardware must not be modified.
6. Notes
The VARISPEED F7 frequency inverters are certified to CE, UL, and c-UL.
IX
EMC Compatibility
1. Introduction
This manual was compiled to help system manufacturers using YASKAWA frequency inverters design and
install electrical switchgear. It also describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC Directive. The
manual's installation and wiring instructions must therefore be followed.
Our products are tested by authorized bodies using the standards listed below.
Product standard:
EN 61800-3:1996
EN 61800-3; A11:2000
2. Measures to Ensure Conformity of YASKAWA Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive
YASKAWA frequency inverters do not necessarily have to be installed in a switch cabinet.
It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all of the possible types of installation. This manual therefore
has to be limited to general guidelines.
All electrical equipment produces radio and line-borne interference at various frequencies. The cables pass
this on to the environment like an aerial.
Connecting an item of electrical equipment (eg drive) to a supply without a line filter can therefore allow HF
or LF interference to get into the mains.
The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components, proper grounding and
shielding of cables.
A large contact area is necessary for low-impedance grounding of HF interference. The use of grounding
straps instead of cables is therefore definitely advisable.
Moreover, cable shields must be connected with purpose-made ground clips.
3. Laying Cables
Measures Against Line-Borne Interference:
Line filter and frequency inverter must be mounted on the same metal plate. Mount the two components as
close to each other as possible, with cables kept as short as possible.
Use a power cable with well-grounded shield. Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 20 meters in length.
Arrange all grounds so as to maximize the area of the end of the lead in contact with the ground terminal (eg
metal plate).
Shielded Cable:
– Use a cable with braided shield.
– Ground the maximum possible area of the shield. It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the
cable to the ground plate with metal clips (see following figure).
X
Ground clip
Ground plate
The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal. Remove any coats of varnish and paint.
– Ground the cable shields at both ends.
– Ground the motor of the machine.
XI
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Recommended EMC Filters
Line Filters (Schaffner)
Varispeed F7
CIMR-F7C40P4
CIMR-F7C40P7
CIMR-F7C41P5
CIMR-F7C42P2
CIMR-F7C43P7
CIMR-F7C44P0
CIMR-F7C45P5
CIMR-F7C47P5
CIMR-F7C4011
CIMR-F7C4015
CIMR-F7C4018
CIMR-F7C4022
CIMR-F7C4030
CIMR-F7C4037
CIMR-F7C4045
CIMR-F7C4055
CIMR-F7C4075
CIMR-F7C4090
CIMR-F7C4110
CIMR-F7C4132
CIMR.F7C4160
EN
55011
Class
Current
(A)
Weight
(kg)
Dimensions
WxDxH
FS 5972-10-07
B*
B*
B*
B*
7
1.1
141 x 46 x 330
FS 5972-18-07
B*
B*
B*
18
1.7
141 x 46 x 330
FS 5972-35-07
B*
B*
35
2.1
206 x 50 x 355
FS 5972-60-07
B*
B*
60
4.0
236 x 65 x 408
FS 5972-70-52
A
A
70
3.4
80 x 185 x 329
FS 5972-130-35
A
A
A
130
4.7
90 x 180 x 366
170
6.0
11.7
120 x 170 x 451
130 x 240 x 610
7.0
18.5
230 x 125 x 300
300 x 160 x 564
10.5
260 x 115 x 386
Type
FS 5972-170-40
FS 5972-250-37
or
FN 3359-250-28
FS 5972-400-99
or
FN 3359-400-99
A
A
250
A
A
400
A
CIMR-F7C4185
CIMR-F7C4220
CIMR-F7C4300
* Test conditions: Motor cable length: 10 m Class B, 50 m Class A
Rated Voltage: AC480V 3 ph.
Ambient Temperature: 45&deg;C (max.)
XII
Line Filters (Schaffner)
Varispeed F7
CIMR-F7C20P4
CIMR-F7C20P7
CIMR-F7C21P5
CIMR-F7C22P2
CIMR-F7C23P7
CIMR-F7C25P5
CIMR-F7C27P5
CIMR-F7C2011
CIMR-F7C2015
CIMR-F7C2018
CIMR-F7C2022
CIMR-F7C2030
CIMR-F7C2037
CIMR-F7C2045
CIMR-F7C2055
CIMR-F7C2075
CIMR-F7C2090
CIMR-F7C2110
EN
55011
Class
Current
(A)
Weight
(kg)
Dimensions
WxDxH
FS 5972-10-07
B*
B*
B*
7
1.1
141 x 45 x 330
FS 5972-18-07
B*
18
1.7
141 x 46 x 330
FS 5973-35-07
B*
B*
35
1.4
141 x 46 x 330
FS 5973-60-07
B*
B*
60
3
206 x 60 x 355
FS 5973-100-07
A
A
100
4.9
236 x 80 x 408
FS 5973-130-35
A
A
130
4.3
90 x 180 x 366
FS 5973-160-40
A
160
6
120 x 170 x 451
FS 5973-240-37
A
A
240
11
130 x 240 x 610
A
A
A
500
19.5
300 x 160 x 564
Type
FS 5973-500-37
* Test conditions: Motor cable length: 10 m Class B, 50 m Class A
Rated Voltage: AC240V 3 ph.
Ambient Temperature: 45&deg;C (max.)
XIII
Installation of inverters and EMC filters
PE
L3
L1 L2
Ground bonds
( remove any paint )
PE
Line
Inverter
Filter
Load
V
L2
PE L1 L3 U WPE
Cable length
as short as possible
Metal Plate
Motor cable
screened
Ground bonds
( remove any paint )
M
3~
XIV
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,
Inc.).
• InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
• ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
• LONworks is a registered trademark of the Echolon.
XV
XVI
1
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed F7 Introduction ............................................1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery........................................1-4
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ..............................1-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ...........1-10
Installation Orientation and Space............................. 1-11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator
and Front Cover .........................................................1-13
Varispeed F7 Introduction
Varispeed F7 Applications
The Varispeed F7 is ideal for the following applications.
• Fan, blower, and pump applications
• Conveyors, pushers, metal tooling machines, etc.
Settings must be adjusted to the application for optimum operation. Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation.
Varispeed F7 Models
The Varispeed F7 Series includes Inverters in two voltage classes: 200 V and 400 V. The maximum motor capacities
vary from 0.55 to 300 kW (42 models).
Table 1.1 Varispeed F7 Models
Voltage
Class
200 V class
1-2
Maximum
Motor
Capacity
kW
Varispeed F7
Output
Capacity
kVA
Basic Model Number
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-F7C
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
CIMR-F7C
0.55
1.2
CIMR-F7C20P4
0.75
1.6
CIMR-F7C20P7
20P41
20P71
1.5
2.7
CIMR-F7C21P5
21P51
2.2
3.7
CIMR-F7C22P2
3.7
5.7
CIMR-F7C23P7
5.5
8.8
CIMR-F7C25P5
7.5
12
CIMR-F7C27P5
11
17
CIMR-F7C2011
20111
15
22
CIMR-F7C2015
20151
18.5
27
CIMR-F7C2018
22
32
CIMR-F7C2022
20220
20221
30
44
CIMR-F7C2030
20300
20301
37
55
CIMR-F7C2037
20370
20371
45
69
CIMR-F7C2045
20450
20451
55
82
CIMR-F7C2055
20550
20551
75
110
CIMR-F7C2075
20750
20751
90
130
CIMR-F7C2090
20900
–
110
160
CIMR-F7C2110
21100
–
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmounted model.
22P21
23P71
25P51
27P51
20181
Varispeed F7 Introduction
Voltage
Class
400 V class
Maximum
Motor
Capacity
kW
Varispeed F7
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Output
Capacity
kVA
Basic Model Number
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-F7C
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
CIMR-F7C
0.55
1.4
CIMR-F7C40P4
0.75
1.6
CIMR-F7C40P7
40P71
1.5
2.8
CIMR-F7C41P5
41P51
2.2
4.0
CIMR-F7C42P2
3.7
5.8
CIMR-F7C43P7
4.0
6.6
CIMR-F7C44P0
5.5
9.5
CIMR-F7C45P5
7.5
13
CIMR-F7C47P5
11
18
CIMR-F7C4011
40111
15
24
CIMR-F7C4015
40151
18.5
30
CIMR-F7C4018
22
34
CIMR-F7C4022
40220
40221
30
46
CIMR-F7C4030
40300
40301
37
57
CIMR-F7C4037
40370
40371
45
69
CIMR-F7C4045
40450
40451
55
85
CIMR-F7C4055
40550
40551
75
110
CIMR-F7C4075
40750
40751
90
140
CIMR-F7C4090
40900
40901
110
160
CIMR-F7C4110
41100
41101
132
200
CIMR-F7C4132
41320
41321
160
230
CIMR-F7C4160
41600
41601
185
280
CIMR-F7C4185
41850
–
220
390
CIMR-F7C4220
42200
–
300
510
CIMR-F7C4300
43000
–
40P41
42P21
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmount model.
43P71
44P01
45P51
47P51
40181
1-3
Confirmations upon Delivery
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Table 1.2 Checks
Item
Method
Has the correct model of Inverter been
delivered?
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or
other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components
loose?
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or
your Yaskawa representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifications, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a standard domestic European Inverter: 3-phase, 200 VAC,
0.55 kW, IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 standards
Inverter
specifications
Inverter model
Input specifications
Output specifications
Lot number
Mass
Serial number
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
1-4
Confirmations upon Delivery
Inverter Model Numbers
The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum
motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR – F7 C 2 0 P4
Inverter
Varispeed F7
No.
C
Specification
European Standard
No.
2
AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V
4
AC Input, 3-phase, 400 V
No.
0P4
0P7
to
300
Voltage Class
Max. Motor Capacity
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
to
300 kW
“P” Indicates the decimal point.
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicates the voltage class, maximum motor capacity,
the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
2 0P 4 1
Voltage Class
No.
2
AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V
4
AC Input, 3-phase 400 V
No.
0P4
0P7
to
300
Max. Motor Capacity
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
to
300 kW
No.
0
1
Protective Structure
Open chassis (IEC IP00)
Enclosed wall-mounted (IEC IP20,
NEMA Type 1)
“P” Indicates the decimal point
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
1-5
Component Names
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.4. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.5.
Top protective cover (Part of Enclosed Wallmounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA Type 1)
Mounting hole
Front cover
Digital Operator
Diecast case
Nameplate
Terminal cover
Bottom protective cover
Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or Less)
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or Less)
1-6
Confirmations upon Delivery
Inverters of 22 kW or More
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.6. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.7.
Mounting holes
Inverter cover
Cooling fan
Front cover
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Nameplate
Fig 1.6 Inverter Appearance (22 kW or More)
Control
circuit
terminals
Charge indicator
Main
circuit
terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (22 kW or More)
1-7
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)
Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.55 to 18.5 kW
200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 30 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW
Fig 1.8 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1)
Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1) are shown below.
Grommet
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.55 to 18.5 kW
200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 30 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW
Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters
1-8
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
Max.
AppliVoltage cable
Class Motor
Output W
[kW]
Caloric
Value(W)
Dimensions (mm)
Open Chassis (IP00)
H
D
W1 H1
H2
D1
Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA1)
t1
Approx.
Mass
W
H
D
W1 H0
H1
H2
H3
D1
t1
Approx.
Mass
Mounting
Holes
d*
0.55
20
39
0.75
27
42
50
50
100
129
1.5
2.2
157
140 280
3.7
7.5
11
15
200 V
(3-phase) 18.5
240 350 207 216 335 7.5
275 450
75
375 600
258
300
330
195 385
78
13
450 725 350 325 700
500 850 360 370 820
110
575 885 380 445 855
6
2.3
3.2
140
300
310
350
21
250 535
24
275 615
86
87
4.5
200
240
63
39
126 280 266
7
380
380 890
59
197 186 300 285
10
207 216 350 335 7.5
258
300
330
0
30
195 400 385
135
220 450 435
165
250 600 575
210
13
455 1100 350 325 725 700
108
3
5
0
177
11
57
130
15
140 280
7
100
250 575
157
4
100
220 435
90
3
5
65.5
30
55
7
200 300 197 186 285
250 400
37
126 266
59
22
45
39
177
5.5
305
4
6
65.5
78
2.3
100
3.2
11
69 Natural
70
59
112
74
186
164
84
248
374 170 544
M6
429 183 612
501 211 712
24
586 274 860
27
865 352 1217
62
1015 411 1426
68
94
M10
95
---
150
59
219 113 332
7
100
130
M5
1266 505 1771
1588 619 2207
M12
2437 997 3434
2733 1242 3975
14
39
53
17
41
58
36
48
84
59
56
115
80
68
148
70
91
161
5.5
127
82
209
7.5
193 114 307
0.75
157
39
3
157
39
3
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
11
15
18.5
22
30
140 280
126 266
7
177
59
200 300 197 186 285
6
78
7.5
100
140 280
4
65.5
240 350 207 216 335
275 450 258 220 435
5
10
2.3
21
75
110
132
160
185
220
300
5
0
200 300 197 186 300 285
4
65.5
240 350 207 216 350 335
275 535 258 220 450 435
59
6
78
7.5
85
100
M5
252 158 410
10
2.3
24
325 550 283 260 535
105
36
450 725 350 325 700
13
3.2
130
500 850 360 370 820
575 925 380 445 895
710 1305 415 540 1270
88
89
102
4.5 120
15
140
325
715
426 208 634
M6 466 259 725
678 317 995
784 360 1144 Fan
283 260 550 535
455 1100 350 325 725 700
505 1245 360 370 850 820
160 580 1325 380 445 925 895
916 1475 416 730 1440
280
405
165
13
105
15
40
901 415 1316
1203 495 1698
305
3.2
130
260
125,5
Natural
326 172 498
635
55
90
7
177
37
45
126 280 266
Fan
2019 838 2857
0.55
400 V
(3-phase)
Total Cooling
Heat
Method
Exter InterGennal
nal
eration
395
400 140
96
97
122
M10
1399 575 1974
1614 671 2285
2097 853 2950
4.5 130 M12 2388 1002 3390
170
2791 1147 3938
3237 1372 4609
––
3740 1537 5277
5838 2320 8158
* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters.
1-9
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment.
Table 1.4 Installation Site
Type
Ambient Operating Temperature
Humidity
Enclosed wall-mounted
-10 to + 40 &deg;C
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Open chassis
-10 to + 45 &deg;C
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers
before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally
enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
• When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other
foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
• Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
• Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
• Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme
temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan
or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45&deg;C.
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter
Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be
reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
1-10
Installation Orientation and Space
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always
provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
120 mm min.
50 mm min.
Air
30 mm min.
50 mm min.
30 mm min.
120 mm min.
Air
Horizontal Space
Vertical Space
Fig 1.10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
IMPORTANT
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wallmounted (IP20, NEMA 1) Inverters.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of
18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or
400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.
1-11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-F7C25P5 Shown Above)
Inverters of 22 kW or More
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
Fig 1.12 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-F7C2022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Terminal Cover
When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove
on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and
Front Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in
addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the
front cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are described below.
Removing the Digital Operator
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator
and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the following illustration.
2
1
Fig 1.13 Removing the Digital Operator (Model CIMR-F7C45P5 Shown Above)
1-13
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in
the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
1
2
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-F7C45P5 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover
After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing the steps to remove the front
cover in reverse order.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of
the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator
After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverter using the following procedure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in
the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
A
B
1-14
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Fig 1.15 Mounting the Digital Operator
IMPORTANT
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other
than those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect
contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front
cover.
1-15
Inverters of 22 kW or More
For inverters with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and main cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover
Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Fig 1.16 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-F7C2022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover
After completing required work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the
front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is
attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it
clicks into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
1-16
2
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connections to Peripheral Devices..............................2-2
Connection Diagram ....................................................2-3
Terminal Block Configuration .......................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ......................................2-6
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................ 2-21
Wiring Check .............................................................2-28
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................2-29
Connections to Peripheral Devices
Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2.1.
Power supply
Molded-case
circuit breaker
Magnetic contactor (MC)
AC reactor for power
factor improvement
Braking resistor
Input noise filter
DC reactor for power
factor improvement
Inverter
Ground
Output noise filter
Motor
Ground
Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices
2-2
Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2.2.
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
DC reactor to improve input
power factor (optional)
U
Braking resistor unit (optional)
X
Short-circuit bar
Main contactor
T
1
2
B1
B2
Fuses
L1
R/L1
3-phase power
380 to 480 V L2
50/60 Hz
L3
Line
Filter
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
PE
Multi-function
digital inputs
[Factory setting]
M
Varispeed F7
CIMR-F7C47P5
MA
Forward Run/Stop
S1
Reverse Run/Stop
S2
External fault
S3
Fault reset
S4
M1
Multi-step speed setting 1
S5
M2
Multi-step speed setting 2
S6
M3
Jog frequency selection
S7
M4
SN
M5
SC
M6
SP
E(G)
2k Ω
3
1
MC
Shield
terminal
Shield
terminal
2
A2
4 to 20mA
P
P
Contact output 1
[Default : Running]
Contact output 2
[Default : Zero speed]
Multi-function digital
output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
Contact output 3
[Default :
Frequency agree 1]
E(G)
MP
AC
Pulse train output
0 to 32kHz (2.2 k Ω)
[Default: Output frequency]
Adjustment,
20 k Ω
FM
A1 Analog input 1: Master
frequency reference
0V to +10V (20 k Ω)
0V to 10V
Fault contact output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
24V
RP Pulse train input [Default:
Frequency reference input]
0 to 32kHz
+V
Analog input power supply
+15V, 20mA
Analog input setting
adjustment
2k Ω
MB
+
FM
Adjustment,
20 k Ω
Multi-function analog input 2
[Default: Frequency bias
4 to 20mA (250 Ω )]
AM
AC
+
-
Multi-function analog output 1
(-10 to +10V 2mA / 4 to 20mA)
[Default: Output frequency 0 to +10V]
-
Multi-function analog output 2
(-10 to +10V 2mA / 4 to 20mA)
[Default: Output current 0 to +10V]
AM
AC
0V
-V
R+
P
MEMOBUS
communication
RS-485/422
Analog input power supply
-15V, 20mA
Terminating
resistance
RS+
P
SIG
Shielded wires
P
Twisted-pair
Shielded wires
Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-F7C47P5 Shown Above)
2-3
Circuit Descriptions
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
IMPORTANT
2. The output current capability of the +V terminal is 20 mA.
Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = 0) or set it to enabled with Braking Resistor Unit
(L3-04 = 3) when using a Braking Option. If this user constant is not changed to disable stall prevention,
the system may not stop within set deceleration time.
Set parameter L8-01 to 1 when using a breaking resistor that is to be mounted to the backside of the
inverters heatsink (ERF-type). When using a Braking Resistor Unit, a shutoff control circuit for the power
supply has to be installed using a thermal overload relay trip contact.
3. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single circles.
4. The wiring of the digital inputs S1 to S7 is shown for the connection of contacts or NPN transistors (0V
common and sinking mode). This is the default setting.
For the connection of PNP transistors or for using a 24V external power supply, refer to Table 2.14.
5. The master speed frequency reference can be input either at terminal A1 or at terminal A2 by changing
the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is terminal A2.
6. The multi-function analog outputs are dedicated meter outputs for analog frequency meters, ampmeters,
voltmeters, wattmeters, etc. Do not use these outputs for feedback control or for any other control purposes.
7. DC reactors to improve the input power factor are built into 200 V Class Inverters from 22 up to 110 kW
and 400 V Class Inverters from 22 up to 300 kW. A DC reactor is an option only for Inverters of 18.5 kW
or less. Remove the short circuit bar when connecting a DC reactor.
2-4
Terminal Block Configuration
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangements are shown in Fig 2.3 and Fig 2.4.
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW)
Control
circuit
terminals
Charge indicator
Main
circuit
terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 22 kW or more)
2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2.1 to Table 2.3. Refer to instruction manual
TOE-C726-2 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C20P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C20P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C21P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C22P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C23P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C25P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C27P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C2011
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
W/T3
,
F7C2015
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
,
1,
2-6
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
3.5
(12)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
5.5
(10)
5.5
(10)
M5
2.5
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
8
(8)
M5
2.5
14 to 22
(6 to 4)
14
(6)
M6
4.0 to 5.0
30
(4)
M5
2.5
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M5
2.5
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
30 to 38
(4 to 2)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
22
(4)
30 to 38
(3 to 2)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
22
(4)
30 to 60
(3 to 1)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, U/T1, V/T2,
B1, B2
3
3
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7C2030
1.2 to 1.5
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7C2022
M4
2, B1, B2,
2, U/T1, V/T2,
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
2, B1, B2,
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
W/T3
F7C2018
1,
Possible
Wire Sizes
Terminal
Screws
mm2(AWG)
22
(4)
30
(3)
22
(4)
30
(3)
22
(4)
50
(1)
22
(4)
Wire Type
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V vinyl
power cables
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
r/l1, ∆/l2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7C2037
F7C2045
3
3
r/l1, ∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7C2055
3
r/l1, ∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7C2075
3
r/l1, ∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7C2090
3
r/l1, ∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
F7C2110
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
r/l1, ∆/l2
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Wire Type
60 to 100
60
(2/0 to 4/0)
(2/0)
5.5 to 22
–
(10 to 4)
30 to 60
30
(2 to 2/0)
(2)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
80 to 100
80
(3/0 to 4/0)
(3/0)
5.5 to 22
–
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
38
(1 to 2/0)
(1)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
50 to 100
50 &times; 2P
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 &times; 2P)
100
100
(4/0)
(4/0)
5.5 to 60
–
(10 to 2/0)
30 to 60
50
(3 to 4/0)
(1/0)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
80 to 125
80 &times; 2P
(3/0 to 250) (3/0 &times; 2P)
80 to 100
80 &times; 2P
(3/0 to 4/0) (3/0 &times; 2P) Power cables,
5.5 to 60
e.g., 600 V vinyl
–
(10 to 2/0)
power cables
100 to 200
100
(3/0 to 400)
(3/0)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
150 to 200
150 &times; 2P
(250 to 400) (250 &times; 2P)
100 to 150
100 &times; 2P
(4/0 to 300) (4/0 &times; 2P)
5.5 to 60
–
(10 to 2/0)
60 to 150
60 &times; 2P
(2/0 to 300) (2/0 &times; 2P)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
200 &times; 2P,
or 50 &times; 4P
200 to 325
(350 &times; 2P,
(350 to 600)
or 1/0 &times;
2P)
150 &times; 2P,
or 50 &times; 4P
150 to 325
(300 &times; 2P,
(300 to 600)
or 1/0 &times;
4P)
5.5 to 60
–
(10 to 2/0)
150
150 &times; 2P
(300)
(300 &times; 2P)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75&deg;C
2-7
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C40P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C40P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C41P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C42P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C43P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C44P0
,
F7C45P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C47P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
F7C4011
,
F7C4015
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
W/T3
F7C4018
F7C4022
F7C4030
,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
2-8
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
M5
2.5
M5
2.5
M5
(M6)
2.5
(4.0 to 5.0)
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M5
2.5
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1,
3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1,
3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
mm2 (AWG)
5.5(10)
2, B1, B2,
B1, B2
3
1.2 to 1.5
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7C4037
M4
2, B1, B2,
2, U/T1, V/T2,
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
Possible
Wire Sizes
Terminal
Screws
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
8 to 38
(8 to 2)
8
(8)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
14 to 22
(6 to 4)
14 to 38
(6 to 2)
22
(4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22 to 60
(4 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
5.5
(10)
3.5
(12)
8
(8)
5.5
(10)
8
(8)
5.5
(10)
8
(8)
8
(8)
8
(8)
14
(6)
14
(6)
22
(4)
22
(4)
38
(2)
22
(4)
Wire Type
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V vinyl
power cables
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7C4045
3
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
,
1
3
,
1
3
,
1
3
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
3
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
F7C4160
4.0 to 5.0
M6
3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
F7C4132
M6
9.0 to 10.0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7C4110
9.0 to 10.0
M8
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7C4090
M8
9.0 to 10.0
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
F7C4075
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
F7C4055
Terminal
Screws
3
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400
F7C4185
F7C4220
F7C4300
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2 (AWG)
38 to 60
(2 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
50 to 100
(1 to 4/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
60 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
100 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
100 to 200
(4/0 to 400)
80 to 200
(3/0 to 400)
80 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
50 to 150
(1/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Wire Type
38
(2)
22
(4)
50
(1)
22
(4)
60
(2/0)
50
(1/0)
38
(2)
1.25
(16)
100
(4/0)
100
(4/0)
50
(1)
1.25
(16)
50 &times; 2P Power cables,
(1/0 &times; 2P) e.g., 600 V vinyl
50 &times; 2P power cables
(1/0 &times; 2P)
600
(2/0)
1.25
(16)
80 &times; 2P
(3/0 &times; 2P)
60 &times; 2P
(2/0 &times; 2P)
100
(4/0)
1.25
(16)
100 &times; 2P
(4/0 &times; 2P)
80 &times; 2P
(3/0 &times; 2P)
50 &times; 2P
(1/0 &times; 2P)
1.25
(16)
Under development
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75&deg;C.
2-9
Table 2.3 Lug Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Wire Thickness (mm2)
0.5
0.75
1.25
Terminal Screws
Size
M3.5
1.25 / 3.5
M4
1.25 / 4
M3.5
1.25 / 3.5
M4
1.25 / 4
M3.5
1.25 / 3.5
M4
1.25 / 4
M3.5
2 / 3.5
M4
2/4
M5
2/5
M6
2/6
M8
2/8
M4
5.5 / 4
M5
5.5 / 5
M6
5.5 / 6
M8
5.5 / 8
M5
8/5
M6
8/6
M8
8/8
M6
14 / 6
M8
14 / 8
M6
22 / 6
M8
22 / 8
M8
38 / 8
M8
60 / 8
M10
60 / 10
2
3.5/5.5
8
14
22
30/38
50/60
80
100
M10
100
150
100 / 10
100 / 12
M12
200
325
80 / 10
150 / 12
200 / 12
M12 x 2
325 / 12
M16
325 / 16
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line
voltage drop is calculated as follows:
IMPORTANT
2-10
Line voltage drop (V) =
3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.4. Wire the terminals
correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Purpose
Main circuit power input
Inverter outputs
DC bus terminals
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4300
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
2022 to 2110
4022 to 4300
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4300
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4300
20P4 to 2011
40P4 to 4018
20P4 to 2018
40P4 to 4018
2022 to 2110
4022 to 4300
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4300
1,
Braking Resistor Unit connecB1, B2
tion
DC reactor connection
1,
Braking Unit connection
3,
Ground
Model: CIMR-F7C
200 V Class
400 V Class
2
2-11
Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Table 2.5.
Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
200 V Class
CIMR-F7C20P4 to 4018
Power
supply
Control
circuits
CIMR-F7C2022, 2030
Power
supply
Control
circuits
CIMR-F7C2037 to 2110
Power
supply
Control
circuits
Note: Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-phase rectification.
2-12
400 V Class
CIMR-F7C40P4 to 4018
Control
circuits
Power
supply
CIMR-F7C4022 to 4055
Power
supply
Control
circuits
CIMR-F7C4075 to 4300
Power
supply
Control
circuits
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.5. These are the same for both 200 V Class and
400 V Class Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
CIMR-F7C20P4 to 2018 and 40P4 to
4018
CIMR-F7C2022, 2030, and 4022 to 4055
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
DC reactor
(optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
3-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC)
3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
The DC reactor is built in.
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting
the DC reactor.
CIMR-F7C2037 to 2110
CIMR-F7C4075 to 4300
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
3-phase
200 VAC
3-phase
400 VAC
Control power is supplied internally from the DC bus at all inverter models.
Fig 2.5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
2-13
Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs
Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.
Installing Fuses
To protect the inverter, it is recommended to use semiconductor fuses like they are shown in the table below.
Table 2.6 Input Fuses
Inverter Type
2-14
Voltage (V)
FUSE
Current (A)
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
10
10
15
20
30
40
60
80
100
130
150
180
240
300
350
450
550
600
I2t (A2s)
12~25
12~25
23~55
34~98
82~220
220~610
290~1300
450~5000
1200~7200
1800~7200
870~16200
1500~23000
2100~19000
2700~55000
4000~55000
7100~64000
11000~64000
13000~83000
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
5
5
10
10
15
20
25
30
50
60
70
80
100
125
150
150
250
300
350
400
450
600
700
900
6~55
6~55
10~55
18~55
34~72
50~570
100~570
100~640
150~1300
400~1800
700~4100
240~5800
500~5800
750~5800
920~13000
1500~13000
3000~55000
3800~55000
5400~23000
7900~64000
14000~250000
20000~250000
34000~400000
52000~920000
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker
When connecting the power input terminals (R/L2, S/L2, and T/L3) to the power supply using a molded-case
circuit breaker (MCCB) observe that the circuit breaker is suitable for the Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times of the inverter's rated current.
• For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the inverter's overload protection (one minute at
150% of the rated output current).
Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter
Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. If a ground fault
interrupter should be used, select an interrupter that detects only the leakage current which is in the frequency
range that is hazardous to humans but not high-frequency leakage currents.
• For the special-purpose ground fault interrupter for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sen-
sitivity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter.
• When using a general ground fault interrupter, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amper-
age of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off by a control circuit, a magnetic contactor can be used.
The following things should be considered:
• The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes.
• When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after
recovery from a power interruption.
• If a Braking Resistor Unit is used, design the control circuit so that the magnetic contactor is turned OFF
by the contact of the Unit's thermal overload relay.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block
Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of
input power supply is irrelevant to the output phase sequence.
Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or a phase advancing
capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the inverter
unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reactor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber
Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit
Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
2-15
Connecting the Inverter and Motor
Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 respective to the motor lead wires U, V, and W.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. If voltage is applied to the output
terminals, the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals
If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter casing, an electric shock or grounding may occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor
Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the
Inverter output may overheat and be damaged and may cause other parts to burn.
Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch
Never connect an electromagnetic switch (MC) between the Inverter and motor and turn it ON or OFF during
operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be created and the
inverter’s overcurrent protection will operate.
When using a MC to switch for instance between two motors, stop the Inverter output before operating the
MC.
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay Contact
This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however,
more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal
relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The control circuit
should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the
main circuit inputs.
2-16
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust
the carrier frequency (set in C6-01, C6-02) as shown in Table 2.7. (For details, refer to Chapter 5 User Constants.)
Table 2.7 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
Cable length
50 m max.
100 m max.
More than 100 m
Carrier frequency
15 kHz max.
10 kHz max.
5 kHz max.
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and that
of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω.
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
• Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the
length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the
ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
• When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
OK
NO
Fig 2.6 Ground Wiring
2-17
Connecting a Braking Resistor (ERF)
A Braking Resistor mounted to the Inverter can be used with 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with outputs
from 0.4 to 11 kW.
Connect the braking resistor as shown in Fig 2.7.
Table 2.8
L8-01 (Protection selection for internal DB resistor)
1 (Enable overheat protection)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either of them.)
0 (Disable stall prevention function)
3 (Enable stall prevention function with braking resistor)
Braking resistor
Inverter
Fig 2.7 Connecting the Braking Resistor
The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect the resistor to any other terminals. Otherwise the resistor and other equipment may get damaged
IMPORTANT
Connecting a Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR)
Connect a Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to the Inverter as shown in the Fig 2.8.
Table 2.9
L8-01 (Protection selection for internal DB resistor)
0 (Disable overheat protection)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either of them.)
0 (Disable stall prevention function)
3 (Enable stall prevention function with braking resistor)
The Braking Resistor Unit will not work if L3-04 is set to 1 (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration). Hence the deceleration time may be longer than the set time (C1-02/04/06/08).
2-18
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
To prevent the braking unit/braking resistor unit from overheating, design the control circuit to turn OFF the
power supply using the thermal overload relay contacts of the Unit as shown in Fig 2.8.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 0.4 to 18.5 kW Output Capacity
LKEB Braking
Resistor Unit
Thermal overload
relay contact
Inverter
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output Capacity
CDBR Braking
Unit
LKEB Braking
Resistor Unit
Thermal overload
relay contact
Inverter
Thermal overload
relay contact
Fig 2.8 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and jumper settings like shown in Fig
2.9. There is a jumper for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a master or slave. Select “Master” for
the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from the second unit onwards).
2-19
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Inverter
Level
detector
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Braking Unit #2
Braking Unit #3
Thermal overload relay
contact
Thermal overload relay
contact
Braking Unit #1
Thermal overload relay
contact
Fig 2.9 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
Breaking Unit Application Precautions
When using a Braking Resistor Unit, design the control circuit to detect overheating of the braking resistor.
2-20
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Analog Operator or operation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from main power lines or other control circuits to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency setter (and not from a Digital Operator), used shielded
twisted-pair wires and ground the shield so as the contact area of the shield and ground becomes maximal.
See the figure below for details on the wiring.
Fig 2.10
Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.10.
Table 2.10 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminals
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2(AWG)
0.75
(18)
1.25
(12)
FM, AC, AM, SC, SP,
SN, A1, A2, +V, –V, S1,
S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7
MA, MB, MC, M1, M2,
M3, M4, M5, M6
MP, RP, R+, R-, S+, S-,
IG
Phoenix
type
0.5 to 0.6
Single wire*3:
0.14 to 2.5
Stranded
wire:
0.14 to 1.5
(26 to 14)
E (G)
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.5 to 2*2
(20 to 14)
Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire*1
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electrical
Wire or equivalent)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Refer to Table 2.3 Lug Sizes for suitable lug sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
2-21
Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.
Table 2.11 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Model
d1
d2
L
0.25 (24)
AI 0.25 - 8YE
0.8
2
12.5
0.5 (20)
AI 0.5 - 8WH
1.1
2.5
14
0.75 (18)
AI 0.75 - 8GY
1.3
2.8
14
1.25 (16)
AI 1.5 - 8BK
1.8
3.4
14
2 (14)
AI 2.5 - 8BU
2.3
4.2
14
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
L
Wire Size mm2 (AWG)
Fig 2.11 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
Screwdriver
Blade of screwdriver
Control circuit
terminal block
Strip the end for
7 mm if no solderless terminal is
used.
Solderless terminal or wire
without soldering
Wires
3.5 mm max.
Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Fig 2.12 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
2-22
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.12. Use the appropriate terminals for the
correct purposes.
Table 2.12 Control Circuit Terminals with default settings
Type
Digital
input
signals
Analog
input
signals
No.
S1
Signal Name
Forward run/stop command
Function
Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2
Reverse run/stop command
Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S3
External fault input*1
Fault when ON.
S4
Fault reset*
Reset when ON
S5
Multi-step speed reference
1*1
(Master/auxiliary switch)
Auxiliary frequency reference when ON.
S6
Multi-step speed reference
2*1
Multi-step setting 2 when
ON.
S7
Jog frequency reference*1
Jog frequency when ON.
SC
Digital input common
–
–
SN
Digital input neutral
–
–
SP
Digital input power supply
+24VDC power supply for digital inputs
24 VDC, 250 mA max. *2
+V
15 V power output
15 V power supply for analog references
15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
–V
–15 V power output
–15 V power supply for analog references
–15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
A1
Frequency reference
–10 to +10 V/100%
–10 to +10 V(20 kΩ)
A2
Multi-function analog input
4 to 20 mA/100%
–10 V to +10 V/100%
AC
Analog reference common
–
–
Shield wire, optional ground
line connection point
–
–
E(G)
M1
M2
Running signal
(1NO contact)
M3
Sequence
output
signals
M6
Function is
selected by setting H3-09.
Multi-function
contact outputs
Zero level (b2-01) or
below when ON
Speed agreement detection
Within &plusmn;2 Hz of set frequency when ON.
Fault output signal (SPDT)
Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC
Fault when OPEN across MB and MC
MA
MB
MC
Analog
output
signals
24 VDC, 8 mA
Photocoupler isolation
4 to 20 mA(250Ω)
–10 V to +10 V(20kΩ)
Operating when ON.
Zero speed
M4
M5
Functions are
selected by setting H1-01 to
H1-05.
Signal Level
FM
Multi-function analog output –10 to +10 V/100% fre(frequency output)
quency
AC
Analog common
AM
Multi-function analog output 5 V/Inverter's rated cur(current monitor)
rent
Multi-function
analog output 1
–
Multi-function
analog output 2
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC*3
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC*3
–10 to +10 V max. &plusmn;5%
2 mA max.
2-23
Table 2.12 Control Circuit Terminals with default settings (Continued)
Type
Pulse
I/O
RS485/
422
No.
Signal Name
Function
RP
Pulse input*4
H6-01 (Frequency reference input)
MP
Pulse monitor
H6-06 (Output frequency)
R+
MEMOBUS communications input
RS+
S-
MEMOBUS communications output
IG
Signal common
0 to 32 kHz
+5 V output (2.2 kΩ)
For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well
as R- and S-.
–
Signal Level
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
High level voltage 3.5 to
13.2 V
Differential input, PHC
isolation
Differential input, PHC
isolation
–
* 1. The default settings are given for terminals S3 to S7. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1
for S6 and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.
* 2. Do not use this power supply for supplying any external equipment.
* 3. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil with DC power supply, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2.13.
* 4. Pulse input specifications are given in the following table.
Low level voltage
0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage
3.5 to 13.2 V
H duty
30% to 70%
Pulse frequency
0 to 32 kHz
Flywheel diode
Coil
External power:
30 VDC max.
1 A max.
The rating of the flywheel diode
must be at least as high as the
circuit voltage.
Fig 2.13 Flywheel Diode Connection
Jumper CN15 and DIP Switch S1
The jumper CN 15 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.
S1
OFF ON
I
V
CN15
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH2
Terminating resistance
Analog input A2 switch
: Factory settings
Analog output switch
Voltage output
Current output
}
}
I
V
S1
CN15
Fig 2.14 Jumper CN15 and DIP Switch S1
2-24
Note: Refer to Table 2.13 for S1
functions.
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
The functions of DIP switch S1 and jumper CN15 are shown in the following table.
Table 2.13 DIP Switch S1 and jumper CN15
Name
Function
Setting
S1-1
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance
OFF: No terminating resistance
ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω
S1-2
Input method for analog input A2
V: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 kΩ)
I: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω)
CN15CH1
Multifunction analog output FM voltage/ I: Current output
current switch
V: Voltage output
CN15CH2
Multifunction analog output AM voltage/ I: Current output
current switch
V: Voltage output
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24V
common) by using the terminals SN, SC, and SP. An external power supply is also supported, providing more
freedom in signal input methods.
Table 2.14 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply – Sinking Mode
External Power Supply – Sinking Mode
External +24V
Internal Power Supply – Sourcing Mode
External Power Supply – Sourcing Mode
External +24V
2-25
Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.15.
≈
Multi-function
digital inputs
[Factory setting]
≈
MA
Forward Run/Stop
S1
Reverse Run/Stop
S2
External fault
S3
Fault reset
S4
M1
Multi-step speed setting 1
S5
M2
Multi-step speed setting 2
S6
M3
Jog frequency selection
S7
M4
SN
M5
SC
M6
SP
E(G)
2k Ω
3
1
MC
Shield
terminal
Shield
terminal
A2
4 to 20mA
P
P
Contact output 1
[Default : Running]
Contact output 2
[Default : Zero speed]
E(G)
Pulse train output
0 to 32kHz (2.2 k Ω)
[Default: Output frequency]
AC
Adjustment,
20 k Ω
+
FM
FM
AM
AC
0V
R+
P
MEMOBUS
communication
RS-485/422
Analog input power supply
-15V, 20mA
Terminating
resistance
RS+
P
SIG
Shielded wires
P
Twisted-pair
Shielded wires
Fig 2.15 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
2-26
-
Multi-function analog output 1
(-10 to +10V 2mA / 4 to 20mA)
[Default: Output frequency 0 to +10V]
-
Multi-function analog output 2
(-10 to +10V 2mA / 4 to 20mA)
[Default: Output current 0 to +10V]
Adjustment,
20 k Ω
Multi-function analog input 2
[Default: Frequency bias
4 to 20mA (250 Ω )]
AC
-V
Multi-function digital
output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
Contact output 3
[Default :
Frequency agree 1]
MP
A1 Analog input 1: Master
frequency reference
0 to +10V (20 k Ω)
0 to 10V
2
Fault contact output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
24V
RP Pulse train input [Default:
Frequency reference input]
0 to 32kHz
+V
Analog input power supply
+15V, 20mA
Analog input setting
adjustment
2k Ω
MB
+
AM
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3,
,
1,
2, and
3) and other high-power lines.
• Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, and M6 (contact out-
puts) from wiring to other control circuit terminals.
• If using an optional external power supply, it shall be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.
• Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults.
• Ground the cable shields so as to maximise the contact area of the shield and ground.
• Cable shields have to be grounded on both cable ends.
2-27
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform continuity check on control circuits. Perform the following checks on the wiring.
• Is all wiring correct?
• Have no wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
• Are all screws tight?
• Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
2-28
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Option Card Models and Specifications
Up to two Option Cards can be mounted in the Inverter. You can mount up one card into each of the two places
on the controller card (A, and C) shown in Fig 2.16.
Table 2.15 lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.
Table 2.15 Option Card Specifications
Card
Model
Specifications
Mounting
Location
PG-A2
One phase (phase A or B), +12V or open collector
input, max. response frequency: 30 kHz
A
PG-B2
Two phase (phase A and B), +12V inputs, max.
response frequency: 30 kHz
A
PG-D2
One phase (phase A or B), line driver input (RS422),
max. response frequency: 300 kHz
A
PG-X2
Three phase (phase A, B, Z), line driver inputs
(RS422), max. response frequency: 300 kHz
A
DeviceNet
communications card
SI-N
Option card for DeviceNet fieldbus
C
Profibus-DP
communications card
SI-P
Option card for Profibus-DP fieldbus
C
InterBus-S
communications card
SI-R
Option card for InterBus-S fieldbus
C
PG Speed Control Cards
Installation
Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter does not light anymore. After that remove the Digital Operator and front cover and then mount the
Option Card.
Refer to documentation provided with the Option Card for actual mounting instructions for option slots
A and C.
2-29
Preventing A and C Option Card Connectors from Rising
After installing an Option Card into slot A or C, insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector
from rising. The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and
pulling it out.
A Option Card mounting spacer hole
CN4
A Option Card connector
CN2
C Option Card connector
A Option Card mounting spacer
(Provided with A Option Card)
C Option Card mounting spacer
C Option Card
Option Clip
(To preventraising of
C Option Card)
A Option Card mounting spacer
A Option Card
Fig 2.16 Mounting Option Cards
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications
PG-A2
The terminal specifications for the PG-A2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.16 PG-A2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
1
2
3
TA1
4
5
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
8
TA2
2-30
(E)
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
Terminal for switching between12 V voltage input
+12 V/open collector selection termiand open collector input. For open collector input,
nal
short across 3 and 4.
Pulse input terminals
6
7
Specifications
12 VDC (&plusmn;5%), 200 mA max.
H: +4 to 12 V; L: +1 V max. (Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
GND for pulse input
Pulse monitor output terminals
Shield connection terminal
12 VDC (&plusmn;10%), 20 mA max.
GND for pulse output
–
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
PG-B2
The terminal specifications for the PG-B2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.17 PG-B2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
1
2
3
TA1
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
Pulse input terminals phase A
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
H: +8 to 12 V
L: +1 V max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
GND pulse input phase A
5
H: +8 to 12 V
L: +1 V max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
1
2
3
4
TA3
12 VDC (&plusmn;5%), 200 mA max.
4
Pulse input terminals phase B
6
TA2
Specifications
(E)
GND pulse input phase B
Pulse monitor output terminals
phase A
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
Pulse monitor output terminals
phase B
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
Shield connection terminal
-
PG-D2
The terminal specifications for the PG-D2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.18 PG-D2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
Contents
1
2
12 VDC (&plusmn;5%), 200 mA max.*
Power supply for pulse generator
3
TA1
TA2
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
5 VDC (&plusmn;5%), 200 mA max.*
4
Pulse input terminal phase A/B (+)
5
Pulse input terminal phase A/B (–)
6
Common terminal
7
Pulse monitor output terminal phase
A/B (+)
8
Pulse monitor output terminal phase
A/B (–)
(E)
Specifications
Shield connection terminal
Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
–
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
–
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
2-31
PG-X2
The terminal specifications for the PG-X2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.19 PG-X2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
Contents
Specifications
1
2
12 VDC (&plusmn;5%), 200 mA max.*
Power supply for pulse generator
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
3
TA1
TA2
TA3
5 VDC (&plusmn;5%), 200 mA max.*
4
Pulse input terminal phase A (+)
5
Pulse input terminal phase A (–)
6
Pulse input terminal phase B (+)
7
Pulse input terminal phase B (–)
8
Pulse input terminal phase Z (+)
9
Pulse input terminal phase Z (–)
10
Common terminal inputs
1
Pulse monitor output terminal phase A (+)
2
Pulse monitor output terminal phase A (–)
3
Pulse monitor output terminal phase B (+)
4
Pulse monitor output terminal phase B (–)
5
Pulse monitor output terminal phase Z (+)
6
Pulse monitor output terminal phase Z (–)
7
Common terminal monitor outputs
–
Shield connection terminal
–
(E)
Line driver input (RS422 level)
(maximum response frequency: 300 kHz)
–
Line driver output (RS422 level output)
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
Wiring
Wiring the PG-A2
Wiring examples for the PG-A2 are provided in the following illustrations.
Three-phase, 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
R/L1 U/T1
V/T2 V/T2
W/T3 W/T3
PG-A2
CN4
E
1
2
4CN
3
TA1 4
5
6
E
7
TA2 (E)
8
+12 V
0V
12 V voltage input (phase A/B)
Pulse input 0 V
Pulse monitor output
Fig 2.17 Wiring a 12 V Voltage Input
2-32
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Three-phase,
200 VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
R/L1
R/L1
V/T2
V/T2
W/T3
W/T3 W/T3
U/T1
V/T2
PG-A2
1
2
4CN
CN4
+12 V
0V
3
TA1
E
E
4
5
6
TA2 (E)
7
8
Open collector input (phase A/B)
Pulse input 0 V
Pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
Fig 2.18 Wiring an Open-collector Input
PG power
supply
+12 V
to inverter
Short for
open-collector
input
Pulse
monitor
output
Pulse
input
3.9 k
Fig 2.19 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-A2
2-33
Wiring the PG-B2
Wiring examples for the PG-B2 are provided in the following illustrations.
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
CN4
Pulse input phase A
GND pulse input phase A
Pulse input phase B
GND pulse input phase B
Pulse monitor output phase A
Pulse monitor output phase B
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05. The factory preset if for forward
rotation, A-phase advancement.
A-phase pulses
B-phase pulses
Fig 2.20 PG-B2 Wiring
Pulse input
phase A
Pulse input
phase B
A-phase
pulses
Division rate circuit
PG power
supply +12 V
Pulse monitor
output phase A
Pulse monitor
output phase B
B-phase
pulses
• When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output impedance with
a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler (diode).
• The pulse monitor dividing ratio can be changed using constant F1-06.
Fig 2.21 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-B2
2-34
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Wiring the PG-D2
Wiring examples for the PG-D2 are provided in the following illustrations.
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
+12 V
0V
+5 V
Pulse input phase A/B (+)
Pulse input phase A/B (–)
Pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
Fig 2.22 PG-D2 Wiring
Wiring the PG-X2
Wiring examples for the PG-X2 are provided in the following illustrations.
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
PG-X2
+12 V
0V
+5 V
A-phase pulse input (+)
Pulse input phase A (–)
Pulse input phase B (+)
Pulse input phase B (–)
Pulse monitor output phase A
Pulse monitor output phase B
Pulse monitor output phase Z
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory preset if
for motor forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.23 PG-X2 Wiring
2-35
Wiring Terminal Blocks
Use not more than 100 meters of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines, and keep them separate from power
lines.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the
shield connection terminal.
Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)
Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2.20.
Table 2.20 Wire Sizes
Terminal
Pulse generator power supply
Pulse input terminal
Pulse monitor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
Terminal
Screws
Wire Thickness (mm2)
-
Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25
M3.5
0.5 to 2
Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl
sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electric Wire or
equivalent)
Straight Solderless Terminals
We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Refer to Table 2.11 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes for specifications.
Closed-loop Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque
The lug connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in Table 2.21.
Table 2.21 Closed-loop Connectors and Tightening Torques
Wire Thickness [mm2]
Terminal
Screws
0.5
0.75
1.25
Crimp Terminal Size
Tightening Torque (N • m)
1.25 - 3.5
M3.5
2
1.25 - 3.5
1.25 - 3.5
0.8
2 - 3.5
Wiring Method and Precautions
The wiring method is the same as the one used for straight solderless terminals. Refer to page 2-22. Observe
the following precautions when wiring.
• Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Card from main power lines and other control
circuits.
• Connect the shield when connecting to a PG. The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors
caused by noise. Also, do not use any lines that are more than 100 m long.
• Connect the shield (green grounding cable of the option card) to the shield terminal (E).
• Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.
• When not using straight solderless terminals, strip the wires to a length of approximately 5.5 mm.
2-36
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses
The setting for the number of PG pulses depends on the model of PG Speed Control Card being used. Set the
correct number for your model.
PG-A2/PG-B2
The maximum response frequency is 32,767 Hz.
Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 20 kHz for the nominal speed of the motor.
Motor speed at maximum output frequency (min–1)
60
x PG rating (p/rev) = 20,000 Hz
Some examples of PG output frequency (number of pulses) for the maximum frequency output are shown in
Table 2.22.
Table 2.22 PG Pulse Selection Examples
Motor's Nominal Speed (min–1)
PG Rating
(p/rev)
PG Output Frequency for Maximum
Output Frequency (Hz)
1800
600
18,000
1500
800
20,000
1200
1000
20,000
900
1200
18,000
Note 1. The motor speed at maximum frequency output is expressed as the sync rotation speed.
2. The PG power supply is 12 V.
3. A separate power supply is required if the PG power consumption is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup
capacitor or other method.)
PG power supply
Capacitor for momentary
power loss
Signals
Fig 2.24 PG-B2 Connection Example
2-37
PG-D2/PG-X2
There are 5 V and 12 V PG power supplies.
Check the PG power supply specifications before connecting.
The maximum response frequency is 300 kHz.
Use the following equation to calculate the output frequency of the PG (fPG).
f
Motor speed at maximum output frequency (min–1)
(Hz)
=
x PG rating (p/rev)
PG
60
A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply consumption is higher than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)
PC power
supply
Capacitor for
momentary
power loss
Fig 2.25 PG-X2 Connection Example (for 12 V PG power supply)
2-38
3
Digital Operator and Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of
operating modes and switching between modes.
Digital Operator............................................................3-2
Modes ..........................................................................3-4
Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display
The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.
Drive Mode Indicators
FWD:
Lights up when a forward run command is
input.
REV:
Lights up when a reverse run command is
input.
SEQ:
Lights up when the run command from the
control circuit terminal is enabled.
REF:
Lights up when the frequency reference from
control circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lights up when an error or alarm has
occurred.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, constant numbers, and
settings.
Mode Display
DRIVE: Lights up in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lights up in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV:
Lights up in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lights up in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE:Lights up in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user constants, monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Key
3-2
Name
Function
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and
control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user constant o2-01.
MENU Key
Selects modes.
ESC Key
Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
Digital Operator
Table 3.1 Key Functions (Continued)
Key
Name
Function
JOG Key
Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the
Digital Operator.
FWD/REV Key
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being
operated from the Digital Operator.
Shift/RESET Key
Sets the active digit when programming user constants.
Also acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred.
Increment Key
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and increments set
values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Decrement Key
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and decrements set
values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
DATA/ENTER Key
Pressed to enter menu items, user constants, and set values.
Also used to switch from one screen to another.
RUN Key
Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by
the Digital Operator.
STOP Key
Stops Inverter operation.
This key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control
circuit terminal by setting user constant o2-02.
Note: Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to the Key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators
will light and flash to indicate operating status.
The RUN key indicator will flash and the STOP key indicator will light during initial excitation or DC brake.
The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP keys and the Inverter status is shown in Fig
3.2.
Inverter output frequency
Frequency setting
: Light up : Blinking
: Not light up
Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators
3-3
Modes
This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's user constants and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to read and set user constants.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3.2.
Table 3.2 Modes
Mode
Primary function(s)
Drive mode
The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output current, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.
Quick programming mode
Use this mode to read and set the basic user constants to operate the Inverter.
Advanced programming mode
Use this mode to reference and set all user constants.
Verify mode
Use this mode to read/set user constants that have been changed from their factoryset values.
Autotuning mode*
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor constants in the vector
control mode. The motor constants are measured/calculated and set automatically.
This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line-to-line resistance.
* Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating in vector control mode.
3-4
Modes
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from a monitor or setting display.
Press the MENU key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes.
Press the DATA/ENTER key from the mode selection display to monitor data and from a monitor display to
access the setting display.
Power ON
Drive Mode
(Operation possible)
Quick
Programming Mode
Advanced
Programming Mode
Verify Mode
When returning from a setting
display, the right digit
of the monitor display will
flash.
Autotuning
Mode
If a user constant is changed
the number will be displayed.
Mode Selection Displays
Light up
Monitor Displays
Blinking
Setting Displays
Not light up
Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions
3-5
Drive Mode
Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. The following monitor displays are possible in
drive mode: The frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage, as well as fault
information and the fault history.
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display.
Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Example Operations
Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display
Drive Mode
Monitor Constant Display Deleted Monitor Constant
Display
Power On
Frequency reference
Monitor Display
Frequency reference setting/
display unit 01-03
Output frequency
Output current
Monitor setting for o1-01
Status Monitor
Frequency reference
Fan operating time
Fault Trace
Current error
Operating time at error
Fault History
1st previous error
Operating time at 4th
previous error
Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode
The display for the first monitor constant (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON.
The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).
Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.
IMPORTANT
3-6
Modes
Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode, the constants required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to
change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants displayed in quick programming mode.
Example Operations
Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display
Quick Programming Mode
Monitor Display
Setting Display
Control method selection
Reference source selection
RUN command source selection
Stopping method selection
C1-01: Acceleration time 1
C1-02: Deceleration time 1
C6-01: Heavy/Normal duty Selection
C6-02: Carrier frequency selection
d1-01: Frequency reference 1
d1-02: Frequency reference 2
d1-03: Frequency reference 3
d1-04: Frequency reference 4
d1-17: Jog frequency reference
AO FM1 output gain
E1-01: Input voltage setting
E1-03: V/f pattern selection
E1-04: Max. output frequency
E1-05: Max. voltage
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-09: Min. output frequency
E1-13: Base voltage
E2-01: Motor rated current
AO AM2 output gain
Motor protection selection
Deceleration stall selection
Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
3-7
Advanced Programming Mode
In advanced programming mode all Inverter constants can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to
change the constant. The user constant will be written and the display will return to monitor display when the
DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants.
Example Operations
Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display
Advanced Programming Mode
Function Selection Display
Setup settings: A1-xx
Monitor Display
Setting Display
Language
Access level
Control mode selection
PID control: b5-xx
PID control mode selection
Proportional gain
PID feedback command
loss detection time
Torque limits: L7-xx
Forward torque limit
Reverse torque limit
Reverse regenerative
torque limit
Copy functions: 03-xx
Copy function selection
Read permitted selection
Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
3-8
Modes
Setting User Constants
Here the procedure to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s is shown.
Table 3.3 Setting User Constants in Advanced Programming Mode
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Description
1
Power supply turned ON.
2
Press MENU key to enter drive mode.
3
Press MENU key to enter quick programming
mode.
4
Press MENU key to enter advanced programming mode.
5
Press DATA/ENTER to access monitor display.
6
Press Increment or Decrement key to display
C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
7
Press DATA/ENTER key to access setting display. The setting of C1-01 (10.00) is displayed.
8
Press Shift/RESET key to move the flashing
digit to the right.
9
Press Increment key to change set value to
20.00 s.
10
Press DATA/ENTER key to enter the set data.
“END” is displayed for 0.5 s and then the
entered value is displayed for 0.5 s.
11
The monitor display for C1-01 returns.
3-9
Verify Mode
Verify mode is used to display any constants that have been changed from their default settings in a programming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
Even in verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as they are used in the programming
modes. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change the settings. The user constant will be
written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed.
Example Operations
An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their
default settings: b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting), and
E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).
Mode Selection Display
Monitor Display
Setting Display
Verify Mode
Frequency reference
selection
Frequency reference
selection
Acceleration time 1
Acceleration time 1
Input voltage setting
Input voltage setting
Motor rated current
Motor rated current
Fig 3.7 Operations in Verify Mode
3-10
Modes
Autotuning Mode
Autotuning automatically measures and sets the required motor constants for the best performance in all control modes. Always perform autotuning before starting operation when using vector control.
When V/f control has been selected, only stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance can be selected.
When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, and vector control shall be used perform stationary
autotuning.
Example of Operation
Set the motor rated output power (in kW), rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated speed, and number of poles specified on the nameplate of the motor and then press the RUN key. The motor is automatically
run and the measured motor constants are set.
Always set the above items. Otherwise autotuning cannot be started otherwise, e.g. it cannot be started from
the motor rated voltage display.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to
change the setting. The user constant will be written and the display will be returned to monitor display when
the DATA/ENTER key is pressed.
The following example shows autotuning for open-loop vector control.
3-11
Autotuning Monitor Display
Autotuning
Setting Display
Tuning mode
Tuning mode:
rotational tuning
Motor output power
Motor output power
Motor rated voltage
Motor rated voltage
Motor rated current
Motor rated current
Motor base frequency
Motor base frequency
No. of motor poles
No. of motor poles
Motor base speed
Motor base speed
Autotuning start*
Autotuning
Stop command input
Autotuning completed
* TUn10 will be displayed during rotational autotuning and TUn11 will be displayed during stationary autotuning. The DRIVE indicator will light when
autotuning starts.
Fig 3.8 Operation in Autotuning Mode
If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting.
IMPORTANT
3-12
4
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example
of trial operation.
Trial Operation Procedure............................................4-2
Trial Operation .............................................................4-3
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................4-14
Trial Operation Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart. When setting the basic user constants,
always set C6-01 (Heavy/Normal Duty Selection) according to the application.
START
Installation
Wiring
*1
Set power supply voltage.
Turn ON power
Confirm status
Select operating
method.
Basic settings
(Quick programming mode)
NO
Open-loop vector control (A1-02=2)
V/f control?
YES
YES
(A1-02=1)
PG?
NO
(Default: A1-02=0)
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200V/50Hz (400V/50Hz)
*2
Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.
V/f default: 200V/50Hz (400V/50Hz)
Settings according
to control mode
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly
causing motor to stall or
overload?
OK to operate
*3
motor during autotuning
without load?
YES
YES
NO
Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line
resistance only*4
Application settings
(Advanced programming mode)
No-load operation
Rotating autotuning
Non-rotating
autotuning
*1. Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 75 kW or more.
*2. If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set
the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced
programming mode.
*3. Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy
whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated.
Loaded operation
Optimum adjustments and
constant settings
*4. If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual
installation, perform non-rotating autotuning for the line-toline resistance only on-site.
Check/record constants.
END
Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart
4-2
NO
Trial Operation
Trial Operation
The procedure for the trial operation is described in order in this section.
Application Confirmation
First, confirm the application before using the Inverter.
• Fan, blower, pump
• Other equipment
For any Inverter application other than a fan, blower, or pump (with quadratic torque characteristic), set C6-01
(Heavy/Normal Duty Selection) to 0 (Heavy Duty: low carrier, constant torque). The default setting is 1 (Normal Duty: high carrier, variable torque).
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW
or Higher)
Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting) for 400 V Class Inverters
of 75 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply
voltage.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the
following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Fig 4.2).
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
Connector
Jumper (factory-set position)
200 V class power supply
400V class power supply
Power supply input terminals
CHARGE indicator
Fig 4.2 Large-capacity Inverter Connections
Power ON
Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.
• Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VDC, 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VDC, 50/60 Hz
• Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
• Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
4-3
• Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF.
• When using a PG Speed Control Card, make sure that it is wired correctly.
• Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status) if possible.
Checking the Display Status
If the Digital Operator's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
Display for normal operation
The frequency reference monitor is displayed in the data display section.
When a fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case,
refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.
Display for fault operation
4-4
The display will differ depending on the
type of fault.
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.
Trial Operation
Basic Settings
Switch to the quick programming mode (the QUICK indicator on the Digital Operation should light) and then
set the following user constants.
Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating procedures and to Chapter 5
User Constants and Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function for details on the user constants.
Table 4.1 Basic Constant Settings
O : Must be set. O : Set as required.
Class
O
O
O
Constant
Number
A1-02
b1-01
b1-02
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Page
Control method
selection
Sets the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control
0 to 2
0
5-7
Reference selection
Sets the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal multifunction
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
1
5-9
6-6
6-69
6-88
Operation
method selection
Sets the run command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (digital multifunction input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
5-9
6-11
6-69
6-88
Selects stopping method when stop command is sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
0 to 3
0
5-9
6-13
Name
0 to 4
O
b1-03
Stopping method
selection
O
C1-01
Sets the acceleration time in seconds for
Acceleration time
the output frequency to climb from 0% to
1
100%.
0.0 to 6000.0
10.0 s
5-17
6-18
O
C1-02
Sets the deceleration time in seconds for
Deceleration time
the output frequency to fall from 100% to
1
0%.
0.0 to 6000.0
10.0 s
5-17
6-18
0 or 1
1
5-22
6-2
0 to F
Depends
on setting
of C6-01.
5-22
O
C6-01
Heavy /Normal
Duty selection
Set to Heavy Duty (low carrier frequency, maximum current overload:
150% for 1 min.) or Normal Duty (high
carrier frequency, maximum current
overload:120% for 1 min.).
0: Heavy Duty
1: Normal Duty
O
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
Sets the carrier frequency. The factory
setting and setting range depends on the
setting of C6-01.
4-5
Table 4.1 Basic Constant Settings (Continued)
O : Must be set. O : Set as required.
Class
O
Constant
Number
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Page
0 to 400.00 Hz
d1-01 to
d1-04:
0.00 Hz
d1-17:
6.00 Hz
5-23
6-9
Input voltage set- Sets the Inverter's nominal input voltage
ting
in volts.
155 to 255 V
(200 V class)
310 to 510 V
(400 V class)
200 V
(200 V
class)
400 V
(400 V
class)
5-27
6-116
Motor rated current
Setting for
general10% to 200% purpose
of Inverter's
motor of
rated current
same
capacity
as Inverter
Name
Description
Frequency referd1-01 to
ences 1 to 4 and Sets the required speed references for
d1-04 and
jog frequency ref- multi-step speed operation or jogging.
d1-17
erence
E1-01
O
O
E2-01
O
H4-02
and H405
O
O
Sets the motor rated current.
Can be used to adjust the analog output
FM and AM terwhen an instrument is connected to the
minal output gain
FM or AM terminal.
L1-01
Motor protection
selection
Used to enable or disable the motor overload protection function.
0: Disabled
1: Protection for general purpose motor
(fan cooled)
2: Protection for frequency converter
motor (externally cooled)
3: Protection for special vector control
motor
L3-04
Stall prevention
selection during
deceleration
If using the dynamic brake option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Units, and
Braking Units), be sure to set constant
L3-04 to 0 (disabled) or 3 (enabled with
braking resistor).
5-29
6-51
6-114
0.00 to 2.50
H4-02:
1.00
H4-05:
0.50
5-42
0 to 3
1
5-45
6-51
0 to 3
1
5-48
6-23
When C6-01 is set to 0 (Heavy Duty), low carrier frequency will be applied and the Inverter overload capability will be 150% of the inverter rated current for one minute. When C6-01 is set to 1 (Normal Duty), high
carrier frequency will be applied and the inverter overload capability will be 120% of the inverter rated current for one minute.
IMPORTANT
4-6
Trial Operation
Settings for the Control Methods
Autotuning methods depend on the control method set for the Inverter. Make the settings required by the control method.
Overview of Settings
Make the required settings in quick programming mode and autotuning mode according to the following flowchart.
START
NO
Open-loop vector control (A1-02=2)
V/f control?
YES
(A1-02 = 0 or 1)
Control mode selection
PG?
YES
(A1-02 = 1)
NO
(Default: A1-02=0)
Set E1-03.
V/F default: 200 V/50 Hz (400V/50 Hz)
Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.
V/f default: 200 V/50 Hz (400V/50 Hz)
*2
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly
causing motor to stall
or overload?
YES
OK to operate
motor during autotuning
without load?
*1
NO
YES
NO
Non-rotating autotuning for
line-to-line resistance only
Rotating autotuning
Non-rotating autotuning
END
Note: If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual installation, perform non-rotating autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only on-site.
* 1. Use rotating autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy whenever it is possible to disconnect motor and load.
* 2. If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13.
Fig 4.3 Settings According to the Control Method
4-7
Setting the Control Method
Any of the following three control methods can be set.
• V/f control without PG (normal variable control)
• V/f control with PG (simple speed feedback control)
• Open-loop vector control (high-performance control without PG)
V/f Control without PG (A1-02 = 0)
• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced programming mode.
Simple operaton of a general-purpose motor E1-03 = 0 or F (default)
at 50 Hz:
Simple operaton of a general-purpose motor E1-03 = 1
at 60 Hz:
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 50 Hz
• It is recommended to perform non-rotating autotuning for the line-to-line resistance if the motor cable is 50
m or longer for the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on non-rotating autotuning.
V/f Control with PG (A1-02=1)
• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced programming mode.
Simple operaton of a general-purpose motor E1-03 = 0 or F (default)
at 50 Hz:
Simple operaton of a general-purpose motor E1-03 = 1
at 60 Hz:
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 50 Hz
• Set the number of motor poles in E2-04 (Number of Motor Poles)
• Set the number of pulses per rotation in F1-01 (PG Constant). If there is a reduction gear between the
motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced programming mode.
• It is recommended to perform non-rotating autotuning for the line-to-line resistance if the motor cable is 50
m or longer for the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on non-rotating autotuning.
Open-loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2)
Always perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotating autotuning. If the motor cannot be
operated, perform stationary autotuning. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotuning.
4-8
Trial Operation
Autotuning
Use the following procedure to perform autotuning to automatically set motor constants when using the openloop vector control method, when the cable length is long, etc.
Setting the Autotuning Mode
One of the following three autotuning modes can be set.
• Rotating autotuning
• Non-rotating autotuning
• Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
Rotating Autotuning (T1-01 = 0)
Rotating autotuning is used for open-vector control only. Set T1-01 to 0, input the data from the nameplate,
and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will stop the motor for approximately
1 minute and then set the required motor constants automatically while operating the motor for approximately
1 minute
1. Always disconnect the motor from the machine and confirm that it is safe to operate the motor before
performing rotational autotuning.
2. If the motor and load cannot be disconnected perform non-rotating autotuning, but always use rotating
autotuning whenever it is possible to operate the motor to increase performance.
IMPORTANT
Non-rotating Autotuning (T1-01 = 1)
Non-rotating autotuning is used for open-vector control only. Set T1-01 to 1, input the data from the nameplate, and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The inverter will supply power to the non-rotating
motor for approximately 1 minute and some of the motor constants will be set automatically. The remaining
motor constants will be set automatically during the first time operation.
IMPORTANT
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when non-rotating autotuning is performed but the motor will not turn.
Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing non-rotating autotuning connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
holding brake is not activated during autotuning.
3. Try to keep the motor load ratio to 50% or less when the system is operated the first time after performing non-rotating autotuning.
Non-rotating Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance (T1-01 = 2)
Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance can be used in any control method. This is the only possible
autotuning for V/f control and V/f control with PG.
Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable is long, the cable length has changed or
when the motor and inverter have different capacities.
To perform autotuning in V/f control or V/f control with PG, set T1-02 (Motor rated power) and T1-04 (Motor
rated current) and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the nonrotating motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor line-to-line resistance (E2-05) and cable resistance
will be automatically measured
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance is performed
but the motor will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing non-rotating autotuning connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
holding brake is not activated during autotuning.
IMPORTANT
4-9
Constant Settings for Autotuning
The following constants must be set before autotuning.
Table 4.2 Constant Settings before Autotuning
Constant
Number
Name
Motor 1/2
T1-00*1 selection
Display
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Set the location where the autotuned
motor constants are to be stored.
1: E1 to E2 (motor 1)
2: E3 to E4 (motor 2)
1 or 2
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 to 2
2 (V/f and
V/f with
PG)
0 (openloop vector)*2
Yes
(only
2)
Yes
(only
2)
Yes
Same as
Inverter
rated output
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 to 255.0 V
(200 V class)
0 to 510.0 V
(400 V class)
200.0 V
(200 V
class)
400.0 V
(400 V
class)
–
–
Yes
10% to 200%
of Inverter
rated current*3
Same as
generalpurpose
motor with
same
capacity as
Inverter
Yes
Yes
Yes
50.0 Hz
–
–
Yes
T1-01
Autotuning
mode selection
Set the autotuning mode.
0: Rotating autotuning
1: Non-rotating autotuning
2: Non-rotating autotuning for lineto-line resistance only
T1-02
Motor rated
power
Set the output power of the motor in
Kilowatts.
10% to 200%
of Inverter
rated output
*3
T1-03
Motor rated
voltage
Data Displays during
Autotuning
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
Vector
Set the rated voltage of the motor in
Volts.*4
T1-04
Motor rated
current
Set the rated current of the motor in
Amps.
T1-05
Motor rated
frequency
Set the base frequency of the motor
in Hertz.*4
0 to 400.0 Hz
T1-06
Number of
motor poles
Set the number of motor poles.
2 to 48 poles
4 poles
–
–
Yes
T1-07
Motor rated
speed
Set the base speed of the motor in
r/min.
0 to 24000
1450
r/min
–
–
Yes
*5
Normally not displayed. Displayed only, when a motor switch command is set for a multi-function digital input (one of H1-01 to H1-05 set to 16).
Only setting 2 (non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance only) is possible for V/f control or V/f control with PG.
Stable vector control will be possible when the setting is between 50% and 100%.
For an inverter motor or vector control motor, the voltage and frequency may be lower than for a general-purpose motor. Always confirm setting on the
nameplate or in test reports. Also, if you know the no-load values, set the no-load voltage in T1-03 and the no-load frequency in T1-05 to obtain better
accuracy.
* 5. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity and the setting of C6-01 (Heavy/Normal Duty Selection).
*
*
*
*
4-10
1.
2.
3.
4.
Trial Operation
Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning
The following displays will appear on the Digital Operator during autotuning.
Table 4.3 Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning
Digital Operator Display
Description
Autotuning mode selection: T1-01
Using the same procedures as for the programming
modes check and set the T1 constants according to
information on the previous page.
Be sure that T1-01 (Autotuning Mode Selection) is set
correctly and check safety around the motor and
machine.
Motor base speed: T1-07
(For rotational autotuning)
The autotuning start display will appear when all settings through T1-07 have been completed. The
A.TUNE and DRIVE indicators will light.
Autotuning started: TUn10
Autotuning will start when the RUN key is pressed
from the autotuning start display.
The left digit in TUn is the Motor 1/2 Selection
(T1-00) and the right digit is the Autotuning Mode
Selection (T1-01).
Autotuning
Stop command input
If the STOP key is pressed or a measurement error
occurs during autotuning, and error message will be
display and autotuning will be stopped.
Refer to Errors during Autotuning on page 7-13.
Autotuning completed
END will be displayed after approximately 1 minute,
indicating that autotuning has been completed.
4-11
Application Settings
User constants can be set as required in advanced programming mode (i.e. the ADV indicator lights on the
Digital Operator). All the constants that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set
in advanced programming mode.
Setting Examples
The following are examples of settings for applications.
• When using an Inverter-mounted braking resistor (ERF), set L8-01 to 1 to enable ERF braking resistor
overheating protection.
• To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation.
• To increase the speed of a 50 Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 55.0 Hz.
• To use a 0 to 10 V analog signal for a 50 Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 45 Hz (0%
to 90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
• To limit the speed range between 20% and 80% set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.
No-load Operation
This section describes trial operation in which the motor is in no-load state, that means the machine is not connected to the motor. To avoid failures caused due to the wiring of the control circuit it’s recommended to use
the LOCAL mode. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the
SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be OFF).
Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital
Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter. For applications, at which the machine can be driven in one direction only, check the motor rotation direction.
Operation with Jog frequency reference (d1-17, default: 6.00 Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and
releasing the JOG key on the Digital Operator. If the external control circuit prevents operation from the Digital Operator, confirm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then
start operation in REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminal). The safety precautions
must always be taken before starting the inverter and the motor connected.
Both, a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed command) must
be provided to start Inverter operation.
Loaded Operation
Connecting the Load
• After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
• Be sure to tighten all the screws when connecting the motor shaft to the mechanical system.
4-12
Trial Operation
Operation using the Digital Operator
• Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
• If fault occurs during operation, make sure that the STOP key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.
• At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed, e.g. to one tenth of the normal operating speed.
Checking Operating Status
• Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow
speed, increase the frequency reference.
• After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnor-
mal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too
high.
• Refer to Adjustment Suggestions on page 4-14 if hunting, vibration, or other problems originated by the
control system occur.
Check and Recording User Constants
Use verify mode (i.e., when the VERIFY indicator on the Digital Operator lights up) to check user constants
that have been changed for trial operation and record them in a user constant table.
Any user constants that have been changed by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.
If required, the copy function in constants o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be
used to copy the changed settings from the inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed settings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system
recovery if for any reason the inverter has to be replaced.
The following functions can also be used to manage user constants.
• Recording user constants
• Setting access levels for user constants
• Setting a password
Recording User Constants (o2-03)
If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of user constants will be saved in a separate
memory area in the inverter. When the Inverter settings have been changed for any reason, the user constants
can be initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110.
User Constant Access Levels (A1-01)
A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent user constants from being changed. A1-01 can also be set
to 1 (User-specified Constants) to display only constants required by the machine or application in a programming mode. These constants can be determined by setting the A2-XX constants.
Password (A1-04 and A1-05)
When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that user constants will
be displayed only when the correct password has been input.
4-13
Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration, or other problems originated by the control system occur during trial operation,
adjust the constants listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists only the
most commonly used user constants.
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Constants
Control
Method
V/f control
(A1-02 = 0
or 1)
Name (Constant
Number)
Performance
Factory
Setting
0.50 to 2.00
• Reduce the setting if
torque is insufficient for
heavy loads.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for
light loads.
0 to
default
• Increase the setting if
motor magnetic noise is
high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at
low to middle-range
speeds.
200 to 1000
ms
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
low.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
Hunting-prevention
gain (N1-02)
Carrier frequency
selection
(C6-02)
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting
and vibration at low
speeds
Depends
on capacity
Torque compensation
primary delay time
constant (C4-02)
• Increasing torque
and speed response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
Depends
on capacity
Torque compensation
gain (C4-01)
• Improving torque at
low speeds (10 Hz
or lower)
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
1.00
0.50 to 1.50
• Increase the setting if
torque is insufficient at
low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for
light loads.
Middle output frequency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
• Improving torque at
low speeds
• Controlling shock at
startup
Depends
on capacity and
voltage
Default to
Default + 3
to 5 V*
• Increase the setting if
torque is insufficient at
low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
0.50 to 2.00
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
low.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
20 to
100 ms
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
low.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
100 to
500 ms
• Reduce the setting if speed
response is low.
• Increase the setting if the
speed is not stable.
0.5 to 1.5
• Increase the setting if
speed response is low.
• Reduce the setting if the
speed is too high.
Torque compensation
primary delay time
constant (C4-02)
• Increasing torque
and speed response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
20 ms
• Increasing speed
Slip compensation priresponse
mary delay time (C3200 ms
• Improving speed sta02)
bility
Slip compensation
gain (C3-01)
4-14
Adjustment Method
Controlling hunting
and vibration in mid1.00
dle-range speeds (10 to
40 Hz)
• Increasing torque
Speed feedback detecand speed response
tion control (AFR)
• Controlling hunting
1.00
gain
and vibration in mid(N2-01)
dle-range speeds (10
to 40 Hz)
Open-loop
vector control (A1-02
= 2)
Recommended
Setting
• Improving speed
accuracy
1.0
Adjustment Suggestions
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Constants (Continued)
Control
Method
Open-loop
vector control (A1-02
= 2)
Name (Constant
Number)
Performance
Factory
Setting
Recommended
Setting
Adjustment Method
Carrier frequency
selection (C6-02)
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting
and vibration at low
speeds (10 Hz or
less)
Depends
on capacity
0 to
default
• Increase the setting if
motor magnetic noise is
high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at
low speeds.
Middle output frequency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
• Improving torque at
low speeds
• Controlling shock at
startup
Depends
on capacity and
voltage
Default to
Default + 3
to 5 V*
• Increase the setting if
torque or speed response is
low.
• Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
* The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.
• Do not change the Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01) from its default setting of 1.00 when using open-
loop vector control.
• If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in open-loop vector control, enable Slip Compensation during
regeneration (C3-04 = 1).
• Use slip compensation to improve speed control during V/f control (A1-02 = 0).
Set the Motor Rated Current (E2-01), Motor Rated Slip (E2-02), and Motor No-load Current (E2-03), and
then adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01) to between 0.5 and 1.5. The default setting for V/f control
is C3-01 = 0.0 (slip compensation disabled).
• To improve speed response and stability in V/f control with a PG (A1-02 = 1), set the ASR constants (C5-
01 to C5-05) to between 0.5 and 1.5 times the default. (Normally it is not necessary to adjust this setting.)
The following user constants will also affect the control system indirectly.
Table 4.5 Constants Affecting Control and Applications Indirectly
Name (Constant Number)
Application
Heavy/Normal Duty selection (C6-01)
Sets the maximum torque and overload capability to 120% or 150%.
DWELL function (b6-01 to b6-04)
Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes.
Acceleration/deceleration times
(C1-01 to C1-11)
Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 to C2-04)
Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration.
Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04)
Used to avoid resonance points during acceleration or deceleration.
Analog input filter time constant (H3-12)
Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.
Stall prevention (L3-01 to L3-06)
Used to prevent OV (overvoltage errors) and motor stalling for heavy
loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by
default and the setting normally has not to be changed. When using a
braking resistor, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration by
setting L3-04 to 0 or set it to 3 (enabled with braking resistor).
Torque limits (L7-01 to L7-04)
Set the maximum torque during vector control. If a setting is reduced,
stalling can occur under heavy loads.
4-15
4-16
5
User Constants
This chapter describes all user constants that can be set in the Inverter.
User Constant Descriptions .........................................5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..........5-3
User Constant Tables ..................................................5-7
User Constant Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user constant tables.
Description of User Constant Tables
User constant tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an
example.
Constant
Number
b1-01
Name
Reference
selection
Description
Sets the frequency reference
input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 4
1
No
Control Methods
MEMOV/f Open
BUS
Page
V/f with Loop
Register
PG Vector
Q
Q
Q
180H
-
• Constant Number:
The number of the user constant.
• Name:
The name of the user constant.
• Description:
Details on the function or settings of the user constant.
• Setting Range:
The setting range for the user constant.
• Factory Setting:
The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is
changed.)
Refer to page 5-67 for factory settings that are changed by setting the
control method.
• Change during Operation:
Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes are possible during operation.
No:
• Control Methods:
5-2
Changes are not possible during operation.
Indicates the control methods in which the user constant can be monitored or set.
Q:
The item can be monitored and set as well in quick programming mode as in advanced programming mode.
A:
The item can be monitored and set in advanced programming
mode only.
No:
The item cannot be monitored or set in this control method.
• MEMOBUS Register:
The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
• Page:
Reference page for more detailed information about the constant.
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.
MENU
Drive Mode
Inverter can be operated and
its status can be displayed.
No.
Function
Page
U1
Status Monitor Constants
5-61
U2
Fault Trace
5-65
U3
Fault History
5-66
A1
Initialize Mode
5-7
A2
User-specified Setting Mode
5-8
b1
Operation Mode Selections
5-9
b2
DC Injection Braking
5-10
Quick Programming Mode
b3
Speed Search
5-11
Minimum constants required
for operation can be monitored
or set.
b4
Timer Function
5-12
Advanced Programming Mode
All constants can be monitored
or set.
Verify Mode
Constants changed from the
default settings can be monitored or set.
Autotuning Mode
Automatically sets motor constants for open-loop vector
control or measures the lineto-line resistance for V/f control.
b5
PID Control
5-13
b6
Dwell Functions
5-15
b8
Energy Saving
5-16
C1
Acceleration/Deceleration
5-17
C2
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration
5-18
C3
Motor Slip Compensation
5-19
C4
Torque Compensation
5-20
C5
Speed Control (ASR)
5-21
C6
Carrier Frequency
5-22
d1
Preset Reference
5-23
d2
Reference Limits
5-24
d3
Jump Frequencies
5-25
d4
Reference Frequency Hold
5-25
5-26
d6
Field Weakening
E1
V/f Pattern
5-27
E2
Motor Setup
5-29
E3
Motor 2 V/f Pattern
5-30
E4
Motor 2 Setup
5-31
F1
PG Option Setup
5-32
F6
Communications Option Card
5-35
H1
Multi-function Digital Inputs
5-36
H2
Multi-function Digital Outputs
5-38
H3
Multi-function Analog Inputs
5-40
H4
Multi-function Analog Outputs
5-42
H5
MEMOBUS Communications
5-43
H6
Pulse Train
5-44
L1
Motor Overload
5-45
L2
Power Loss Ridethrough
5-46
L3
Stall Prevention
5-48
L4
Reference Detection
5-50
L5
Fault Restart
5-51
L6
Torque Detection
5-52
L7
Torque Limits
5-53
L8
Hardware Protection
5-53
N1
Hunting Prevention Function
5-55
N2
Automatic Frequency Regulator
5-55
N3
High-slip Braking
5-56
o1
Monitor Select
5-56
o2
Multi-function Selections
5-58
o3
Copy Function
5-59
T
Motor Autotuning
5-60
5-3
User Constants Setable in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum user constants required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming
mode. The user constants displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and
all other user constants, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0 to 2
0
No
Q
Q
Q
102H
0 to 4
1
No
Q
Q
Q
180H
Sets the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
RUN com1: Control circuit terminal (digital mulb1-02 mand source
0 to 3
tifunction inputs)
selection
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
1
No
Q
Q
Q
181H
0
No
Q
Q
Q
182H
Yes
Q
Q
Q
200H
Yes
Q
Q
Q
201H
No
Q
Q
Q
223H
No
Q
Q
Q
224H
Name
Control
A1-02 method
selection
Description
Sets the control method for the
Inverter.
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control
Sets the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
Reference
1: Control circuit terminal (analog
b1-01 source selecinput)
tion
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
Stopping
b1-03 method
selection
C1-01
C1-02
5-4
Control Methods MEMOBUS
V/f Open
V/f with Loop Register
PG Vector
Change
during
Operation
Constant
Number
Select stopping method when stop
command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than
coast to stop, without regenerative
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run
commands are disregarded during
deceleration time.)
Acceleration time 1
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate
from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency.
Deceleration time 1
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate
from the maximum output frequency
to 0 Hz.
0 to 3
0.0 to
6000.0
0: Heavy Duty (low carrier, constant
torque, 150% current overload for 1
Heavy/Normin.)
C6-01 mal Duty
1: Normal Duty (high carrier, variable
selection
torque, 120% current overload for 1
min.)
0 or 1
Carrier freC6-02 quency
selection
0 to F
Selects the carrier frequency.
Select F to enable detailed settings
using constants C6-03 to C6-05.
10.0 s
*1
1
6
*2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Constant
Number
Name
Setting
Range
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods MEMOBUS
V/f Open
V/f with Loop Register
PG Vector
d1-01
Frequency
reference 1
Sets the master frequency reference.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
280H
d1-02
Frequency
reference 2
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed command 1 is ON for
a multi-function input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
281H
d1-03
Frequency
reference 3
Yes
Q
Q
Q
282H
d1-04
Frequency
reference 4
Yes
Q
Q
Q
283H
Yes
Q
Q
Q
292H
No
Q
Q
Q
300H
No
Q
Q
No
302H
No
Q
Q
Q
303H
No
Q
Q
Q
304H
0.0 to 50.0 Hz
*5
400.0*4
No
Q
Q
Q
305H
0.0 to 1.3 Hz
*5
400.0*4
No
Q
Q
Q
308H
No
A
A
Q
30CH
No
Q
Q
Q
30EH
4
No
No
Q
No
311H
0 to
60000
1024
No
No
Q
No
380H
Sets the multi-function analog output 1
(terminal FM) gain.
Gain (termi- Sets the percentage of the monitor item
0 to
H4-02
nal FM)
that is equal to 10V/20mA output at
1.000%
terminal FM. Note that the maximum
output voltage/current is 10V/20mA.
100%
Yes
Q
Q
Q
41EH
Jog
d1-17 frequency
reference
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed command 2 is ON for
0 to 0.00 Hz
a multi-function input.
400.00
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed command 1 and 2 are
0.00 Hz
ON for a multi-function input.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-function inputs „Jog Frequency
Command“, „FJOG command“, or
„RJOG command“ is ON.
Input voltage setting
Sets the inverter input voltage. This set
value will be the basis for the protection functions.
V/f pattern
E1-03
selection
0 to E: Select from 15 preset patterns.
F:
Custom user-set pattern
(Applicable for the setting of
E1-04 to E1-10).
E1-01
Max. output
E1-04 frequency
(FMAX)
Max.
E1-05 voltage
(VMAX)
E1-06
Base frequency (FA)
Min. output
E1-09 frequency
(FMIN)
E1-13
0 to F
*3
FA FMAX
(E1-06) (E1-04)
Base voltage Sets the output voltage at the base fre(VBASE)
quency (E1-06).
Sets the motor rated current in Amps.
Motor rated This set value becomes the base value
E2-01
current
for motor protection and torque limit.
It is an input data for autotuning.
E2-04
*3
0.0 to
255.0
Frequency
(Hz)
FMIN
(E1-09)
155 to
255
0.0 to
255.0
*3
0.32 to
6.40
*8
Number of Sets the number of motor poles. It is an
2 to 48
motor poles input data for autotuning.
F1-01 PG constant
200 V
*3
F
40.0 to
50.0 Hz
400.0 *4
Output voltage (V)
VMAX
(E1-05)
VBASE
(E1-13)
VMIN
(E1-10)
6.00 Hz
Sets the number of PG pulses (pulse
generator or encoder).
200.0 V
*3
0.0 V
*6
1.90 A
*7
5-5
Control Methods MEMOBUS
V/f Open
V/f with Loop Register
PG Vector
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
50%
Yes
Q
Q
Q
421H
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: Protection for general purpose
motor (fan cooled)
2: Protection for frequency converter
motor (external cooled)
3: Protection for special vector control
0 to 3
motor
When the inverter power supply is
turned off, the thermal value is reset,
so even if this constant is set to 1,
protection may not be effective.
When several motors are connected to
one Inverter, set to 0 and ensure that
each motor is equipped with a protection device.
1
No
Q
Q
Q
480H
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If
deceleration time is too short, a
main circuit overvoltage may
result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped
when the DC bus voltage exceeds
the stall prevention level.
Deceleration restarts when voltage
Stall prevenfalls below the stall level again.)
tion selec2: Intelligent deceleration mode
L3-04
0 to 3
tion during
(Deceleration rate is automatically
deceleration
adjusted so that in Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest possible
time. The set deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor
Unit)
When a braking option (Braking Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, Braking
Unit) is used, always set to 0 or 3.
1
No
Q
Q
Q
492H
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Sets the multi-function analog output 2
(terminal AM) gain.
0 to
Gain (termi- Sets the percentage of the monitor item
H4-05
nal AM)
that is equal to 10V/20mA output at
1.000%
terminal AM. Note that the maximum
output voltage/current is 10V/20mA.
Motor proL1-01 tection
selection
* 1. The setting ranges for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to
0, the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
* 2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity.
* 3. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 4. The upper setting limit will be 150.0 Hz when C6-01 is set to 0.
* 5. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
* 6. After autotuning, E1-13 will contain the same value as E1-05.
* 7. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 8. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
5-6
User Constant Tables
User Constant Tables
A: Setup Settings
Initialize Mode: A1
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 6
0
Yes
A
A
A
100H
–
Used to set the constant
access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring drive mode
and setting A1-01 and A104.)
1: Used to select user
constant
Constant
A1-01
(Only constants set in A2- 0 to 2
access level
01 to A2-32 can be read
and set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read
and set in both, quick
programming mode (Q)
and advanced
programming (A) mode.)
2
Yes
A
A
A
101H
6-134
6-135
0
No
Q
Q
Q
102H
4-5
4-7
4-14
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Used to select the language
displayed on the Digital
Operator (JVOP-160 only).
0: English
Language
1: Japanese
selection for 2: German
A1-00 Digital
3: French
Operator
4: Italian
display
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
Control
A1-02 method
selection
Used to select the control
method for the Inverter
0: V/f control
1: V/f with PG feedback
2: Open loop vector
This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
0 to 2
5-7
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
A1-03 Initialize
Used to initialize the constants using the specified
method.
0:
No initializing
1110: Initializes using the
user constants that
have been stored
before using o2-03
parameter
2220: Initializes using a
two-wire sequence.
(Initializes to the
factory setting.)
3330: Initializes using a
three-wire sequence.
0 to
3330
0
No
A
A
A
103H
–
A1-04 Password
Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects
constants of the initialize
mode.
If the password is changed,
A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to
A2-32 constants can only be
changed after inputting the
right password.
0 to
9999
0
No
A
A
A
104H
6-134
Password
setting
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
Usually this constant is not
displayed. When the password (A1-04) is displayed,
hold down the RESET key
and press the Menu key and
A1-05 will be displayed.
0 to
9999
0
No
A
A
A
105H
6-134
Constant
Number
A1-05
Name
User-set Constants: A2
The constants set by the user are listed in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
A2-01 User specito
fied conA2-32 stants
5-8
Description
Setting
Range
Used to select the function for
each of the user specified constants. User constants are the b1-01 to
only accessable constants if
o2-08
Constant Access Level is set
to user constants (A1-01=1)
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
–
No
Control Methods MEMOBUS
V/f
Page
RegisV/f with Open
Loop
ter
PG
A
A
A
106H to
6-135
125H
User Constant Tables
Application Constants: b
Operation Mode Selections: b1
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
V/f with Open
Loop Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the frequency reference
input method.
0: Digital Operator
Reference
1: Control circuit terminal
b1-01 source selec(analog input)
tion
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
1
No
Q
Q
Q
180H
6-6
6-69
Sets the run command input
method.
0: Digital Operator
RUN com1: Control circuit terminal
(digital multifunction
b1-02 mand source
selection
inputs)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
181H
6-11
6-69
Used to set the stopping
method used when a stop
command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC injection braking stop
(Stops faster than coast to
stop, no regenerative
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer
(Run commands are
disregarded during
deceleration.)
0 to 3
0
No
Q
Q
Q
182H
6-13
A
A
A
183H
6-55
A
No
No
A
A
A
185H
–
Constant
Number
Name
Stopping
b1-03 method
selection
Prohibition
b1-04 of reverse
operation
b1-06
Control
input scan
Description
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
2: Output Phase Rotation
(both rotational directions are enabled)
Used to set the responsiveness of the control inputs
(forward/reverse and multifunction inputs.)
0: Two scans every 2 ms
(Use for fast responses.)
1: Two scans every 5 ms
(Use for possible
malfunction due to noise.)
0 to 2
0 or 1
0
1
No
No
5-9
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Used to set the operation
mode by switching to the
Remote mode using the
Local/Remote Key.
Operation
0: Run signals that are input
selection
during mode switching
b1-07 after switchare disregarded. (Input
ing to
Run signals after
remote mode
switching the mode.)
1: Run signals become
effective immediately
after switching to the
Remote mode.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
186H
-
Used to set an operation
interlock in programming
Run commodes.
mand selec0: Cannot operate.
b1-08 tion in
1: Can operate (Disabled
programwhen Digital Operator is
ming modes
set to select run command
(when b1-02 = 0)).
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
187H
-
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Used to set the frequency at
which DC injection braking
Zero speed
starts in units of Hz when b1level (DC
03 is set to 0 (deceleration to
injection
0.0 to
b2-01
stop).
braking
10.0
When b2-01 is less than E1starting fre09, E1-09 becomes the DC
quency)
injection braking starting frequency.
0.5 Hz
No
A
A
A
189H
6-13
Constant
Number
Name
Description
DC Injection Braking: b2
Constant
Number
5-10
Name
Description
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
BUS
Page
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
DC injecSets the DC injection braking
b2-02 tion braking current as a percentage of the
current
inverter rated current.
0 to
100
50%
No
A
A
A
18AH
6-13
6-16
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at
DC injecstart in units of 1 second.
b2-03 tion braking Used to stop coasting motor
time at start and restart it. When the set
value is 0, DC injection braking at start is not performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s
No
A
A
A
18BH
6-16
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at
stop in units of 1 second.
DC injecUsed to prevent coasting
b2-04 tion braking
after the stop command is
time at stop
input. When the set value is
0.00, DC injection braking at
stop is not performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.50 s
No
A
A
A
18CH
6-13
6-17
User Constant Tables
Speed Search: b3
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Control Methods MEMOBUS
V/f
Page
Open
V/f with Loop Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
2*
No
A
A
A
191H
6-57
Enables/disables the speed
search function for the RUN
command and sets the speed
search method.
0:Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed
search
selection
b3-01 (current
detection or
speed calculation)
Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the
motor speed is calculated and
acceleration/deceleration is
performed from the calculated
speed to the specified
frequency (motor direction is
also searched).
Current Detection:
The speed search is started
from the frequency when
power was momentarily lost
and the maximum frequency,
and the speed is detected at the
search current level.
Speed
search
operating
b3-02
current
(current
detection)
Sets the speed search operation
current as a percentage, taking
the Inverter rated current as
100%.
Usually not necessary to set.
When restarting is not possible
with the factory settings,
reduce the value.
0 to
200
120%*
No
A
No
A
192H
6-57
Speed
search
decelerab3-03
tion time
(current
detection)
Sets the output frequency
deceleration time during speed
search in 1-second units.
Sets the time for deceleration
from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output
frequency.
0.1 to
10.0
2.0 s
No
A
No
A
193H
6-57
Speed
search wait
time (curb3-05 rent detection or
speed calculation)
When a speed search is performed after recovering from a
momentary power loss, the
search operation is delayed for
the time set here.
If e.g. a contactor is used at the
output side of the inverter set
this constant to the contactor
delay time or more.
0.0 to
20.0
0.2 s
No
A
A
A
195H
6-57
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open Loop Vector factory settings are given.)
5-11
Timer Function: b4
5-12
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the timer function output
ON-delay time (dead time)
Timer func- for the timer function input,
0.0 to
b4-01 tion ONin 1-second units.
3000.0
delay time Enabled when a timer function is set in H1- and H2.
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
1A3H
6-101
Sets the timer function output
OFF-delay time (dead band)
Timer func- for the timer function input,
0.0 to
b4-02 tion OFFin 1-second units.
3000.0
delay time Enabled when a timer function is set in H1- and H2
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
1A4H
6-101
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
User Constant Tables
PID Control: b5
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is Dcontrolled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value
is D-controlled.)
3: PID control enabled
(frequency reference +
PID output, D control of
deviation)
4: PID control enabled
(frequency reference +
PID output, D control of
feedback value).
0 to 4
0
No
A
A
A
1A5H
6-103
0.00
to
25.00
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
1A6H
6-103
Sets I-control integral time in
1-second units.
I-control is not performed
when the setting is 0.0.
0.0 to
360.0
1.0 s
Yes
A
A
A
1A7H
6-103
Sets the I-control limit as a
percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
1A8H
6-103
Differential
b5-05
(D) time
Sets D-control differential
time in 1-second units.
D-control is not performed
when the setting is 0.00.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
1A9H
6-103
b5-06 PID limit
Sets the limit after PID-control as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
1AAH
6-103
Sets the offset after PID-con- -100.0
trol as a percentage of the
to
maximum output frequency. +100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
1ABH
6-103
Sets the time constant for low
pass filter for PID-control
0.00 to
outputs in 1-second units.
10.00
Usually not necessary to set.
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
1ACH
6-103
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
1ADH
6-103
0.0 to
25.0
1.0
No
A
A
A
1AEH
6-103
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
1AFH
6-103
Constant
Number
Name
PID control
b5-01 mode selection
Sets P-control proportional
Proportional gain.
b5-02
gain (P)
P-control is not performed
when the setting is 0.00.
Integral (I)
b5-03
time
b5-04
b5-07
Integral (I)
limit
PID offset
adjustment
PID delay
b5-08 time constant
Selects forward/reverse
PID output
direction for PID output.
b5-09 characteris0: PID output is forward.
tics selection
1: PID output is reverse
b5-10
PID output
gain
Sets output gain.
0: Limit to 0 when PID
output is negative.
PID reverse 1: Reverses when PID
b5-11 output selecoutput is negative.
tion
Limit to 0 is also active when
reverse prohibit is selected by
using b1-04.
5-13
Constant
Number
Name
Selection of
PID feedb5-12 back signal
loss detection
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: No detection of PID
feedback loss.
1: Detection of PID
feedback loss.
Operation continues
during detection, the fault
contact is not operated.
2: Detection of PID
feedback loss.
The motor coasts to stop
at detection, and the fault
contact operates.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
1B0H
6-103
PID feedback loss
b5-13
detection
level
Sets the PID feedback loss
detection level as percentage
0 to 100
using the maximum output
frequency as 100%.
0%
No
A
A
A
1B1H
6-103
PID feedback loss
b5-14
detection
time
Sets the PID feedback loss
detection level in s units.
0.0 to
25.5
1.0 s
No
A
A
A
1B2H
6-103
PID sleep
function
b5-15
operation
level
Sets the PID sleep function
start level as a frequency.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
1B3H
6-103
PID sleep
b5-16 operation
delay time
Sets the delay time until the
PID sleep function starts in
seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
1B4H
6-103
Accel/decel
Sets the accel/decel time for
b5-17 time for PID
PID reference in seconds.
reference
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
1B5H
6-103
PID Set0: Disabled
b5-18 point Selec1: Enabled
tion
0 to 1
0
No
A
A
A
1DCH
6-103
0 to
100.0%
0
No
A
A
A
10OH
6-103
b5-19 PID Setpoint PID-target value
5-14
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
User Constant Tables
Dwell Functions: b6
Constant
Number
Name
Dwell freb6-01 quency at
start
Dwell
b6-02 time at
start
Dwell freb6-03 quency at
stop
Dwell
b6-04 time at
stop
Setting
Range
Description
Run command
ON
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Page
0.0 to
0.0 Hz
400.0
No
A
A
A
1B6H
6-21
0.0 to
10.0
No
A
A
A
1B7H
6-21
0.0 to
0.0 Hz
400.0
No
A
A
A
1B8H
6-21
0.0 to
10.0
No
A
A
A
1B9H
6-21
OFF
Output frequency
b6-01 b6-03
b6-02
Factory
Setting
Time
b6-04
The dwell function is used to output
frequency temporarily when driving a
motor with a heavy load.
0.0 s
0.0 s
5-15
Energy Saving: b8
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Select whether to enable or
Energy-sav- disable energy-saving conb8-01 ing mode
trol.
selection
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
1CCH
6-111
Energy-sav- Sets the energy-saving gain
ing gain
in open loop vector control.
0.0 to
10.0
0.7
Yes
No
No
A
1CDH
6-111
Energy-savSets the energy-saving filter
ing filter
b8-03
time constant in open loop
time convector control.
stant
0.00 to
10.0
0.50 s
Yes
No
No
A
1CEH
6-111
Sets the energy-saving coefficient depending on the setEnergy-sav- ting in E2-11 (motor rated
b8-04 ing coeffi- current).
cient
Adjust the value in 5% steps
until the output power
becomes minimal.
0.0 to
655.00
*3
No
A
A
No
1CFH
6-111
0 to
2000
20 ms
No
A
A
No
1D0H
6-111
0%
No
A
A
No
1D1H
6-111
b8-02
Name
Description
Power detection filter
Sets the time constant for
b8-05
time conoutput power detection.
stant
Sets the limit value of the
voltage control range during
Search opersearch operation.
b8-06 ation volt0 to 100
Set to 0 to disable the search
age limiter
operation. 100% is the motor
rated voltage.
* 1. The factory setting is 1.0 when using V/f control with PG.
* 2. The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min.
* 3. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
5-16
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Constant
Number
*1
*2
User Constant Tables
Tuning Constants: C
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
V/f with Open
Loop Register
PG
Acceleration time 1
Sets the acceleration time to
accelerate from 0 Hz to the
maximum output frequency.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
200H
4-5
6-18
DeceleraC1-02
tion time 1
Sets the deceleration time to
decelerate from the maximum output frequency to
0 Hz.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
201H
4-5
6-18
AcceleraC1-03
tion time 2
Sets the acceleration time
when the multi-function
input “accel/decel time 1” is
set to ON.
Yes
A
A
A
202H
6-18
DeceleraC1-04
tion time 2
Sets the deceleration time
when the multi-function
input “accel/decel time 1” is
set to ON.
Yes
A
A
A
203H
6-18
AcceleraC1-05
tion time 3
Sets the acceleration time
when the multi-function
input “accel/decel time 2” is
set to ON.
No
A
A
A
204H
6-18
No
A
A
A
205H
6-18
C1-01
0.0 to
6000.0*
10.0 s
DeceleraC1-06
tion time 3
Sets the deceleration time
when the multi-function
input “accel/decel time 2” is
set to ON.
Acceleration time 4
Sets the acceleration time
when the multi-function
input “accel/decel time 1”
and “accel/decel time 2” are
set to ON.
No
A
A
A
206H
6-18
Deceleration time 4
Sets the deceleration time
when the multi-function
input “accel/decel time 1”
and “accel/decel time 2” are
set to ON.
No
A
A
A
207H
6-18
Sets the deceleration time
when the multi-function
input “Emergency (fast)
stop” is set to ON.
No
A
A
A
208H
6-17
No
A
A
A
209H
6-18
6-19
C1-07
C1-08
Emergency
C1-09
stop time
Accel/decel
C1-10 time setting
unit
0: 0.01-second units
1: 0.1-second units
0 or 1
1
5-17
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Sets the frequency for automatic acceleration/deceleration switching.
If the output frequency is
below the set frequency:
Accel/decel
Accel/decel time 4
time switchC1-11
If the output freuquency is
ing freabove the set frequency:
quency
Accel/decel time 1
The multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” or
“accel/decel time 2” has priority.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
A
A
A
20AH
6-19
* The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depends on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/deceleration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
S-Curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
Constant
Number
Name
Setting
Range
Description
Factory
Setting
S-curve
character0.00 to
C2-01 istic time When the S-curve characteristic time
0.20 s
2.50
at acceler- is set, the accel/decel times will
ation start increase by only half of the S-curve
S-curve
characteristic times at start and end.
character0.00 to
C2-02 istic time Run command
0.20 s
OFF
2.50
ON
at acceleration end Output frequency
S-curve
characterC2-03 istic time
at deceleration start
S-curve
characterC2-04 istic time
at deceleration end
5-18
C2-02
Change Control Methods
MEMOduring
V/f
Page
BUS
Open
Opera- V/f with
Loop Register
tion
PG
No
A
A
A
20BH
6-20
No
A
A
A
20CH
6-20
0.00 to
0.20 s
2.50
No
A
A
A
20DH
6-20
0.00 to
0.00 s
2.50
No
A
A
A
20EH
6-20
C2-03
C2-04
C2-01
Time
Taccel = C2-01
2
+ C1-XX +
C2-02
2
Tdecel = C2-03
2
+ C1-XX +
C2-04
2
User Constant Tables
Motor Slip Compensation: C3
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Slip comC3-01 pensation
gain
Used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a
load.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust this constant at the
following times.
• When motor speed is lower
than the frequency reference increase the set value.
• When motor speed is
higher than the frequency
reference decrease the set
value.
0.0 to
2.5
0.0*
Yes
A
No
A
20FH
4-14
6-35
Slip comC3-02 pensation
delay time
Slip compensation delay time
is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust this constant at the
following times.
• Reduce the setting when
slip compensation responsive is slow.
• When speed is not stabilized, increase the setting.
0 to
10000
2000
ms
No
A
No
A
210H
4-14
6-35
Slip comC3-03 pensation
limit
Sets the slip compensation
limit as a percentage of motor
rated slip.
0 to
250
200%
No
A
No
A
211H
6-35
0
No
A
No
A
212H
6-35
0
No
No
No
A
213H
6-35
Constant
Number
Name
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the slip compensation
Slip comduring regeneration function
pensation
has been activated and regenC3-04 selection
0 or 1
eration capacity increases
during
momentarily, it might be necregeneration
essary to use a braking option
(braking resistor, braking
resistor unit or braking unit.)
Output voltage limit
C3-05
operation
selection
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The motor flux
will be lowered automatically when the output
voltage become saturated.)
0 or 1
*
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
5-19
Torque Compensation: C4
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Sets the torque compensation gain.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust under the following
circumstances:
• When the cable is long
increase the set value.
• When the motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter
capacity (Max. applicable
Torque com- motor capacity), increase
0.00 to
C4-01 pensation
the set values.
2.50
gain
• When the motor is oscillating, decrease the set values.
Adjust the torque compensation gain so that at minimum
speed the output current does
not exceed the Inverter rated
output current.
Do not alter the torque compensation gain from its
default (1.00) when using
open loop vector control.
The torque compensation
delay time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Torque comAdjust under the following
pensation
0 to
C4-02
circumstances:
delay time
10000
• When the motor is oscillatconstant
ing, increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness
of the motor is low,
decrease the set values.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
215H
4-14
6-37
No
A
A
A
216H
4-14
6-37
200 ms
*
Starting
Sets the torque compensatorque comC4-03
tion value at start in FWD
pensation
direction
(FWD)
0.0 to
200.0%
0.0%
No
No
No
A
217H
6-37
Starting
Sets the torque compensatorque comC4-04
tion value at start in REV
pensation
direction
(REV)
0.0 to
200.0%
0.0%
No
No
No
A
218H
6-37
Starting
torque comC4-05 pensation
time constant
0 to 200 10 ms
No
No
No
A
219H
6-37
Sets starting torque start-up
time.
When 0 ~ 4 ms is set, it is
operated without filter.
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
5-20
User Constant Tables
Speed Control (ASR): C5
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change Control Methods
MEMOduring
V/f
Page
BUS
Open
Opera- V/f with
Loop Register
tion
PG
ASR proC5-01 portional
(P) gain 1
Sets the proportional gain of the
speed loop (ASR)
0.00 to
300.00
0.20
Yes
No
A
No
21BH
6-39
ASR inteC5-02 gral (I)
time 1
Sets the integral time of the speed
loop (ASR).
0.000
0.200
to
s
10.000
Yes
No
A
No
21CH
6-39
ASR proC5-03 portional
(P) gain 2
Usually changing this setting is not 0.00 to
necessary.
300.00
0.02
Yes
No
A
No
21DH
6-39
0.000
0.050
to
s
10.000
Yes
No
A
No
21EH
6-39
No
No
A
No
21FH
6-39
P,I
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
ASR inteC5-04 gral (I)
time 2
P = C5-03
I = C5-04
0
E1-04 Motor speed (Hz)
Sets the upper limit for the compensation frequency for the speed con- 0.0 to
C5-05 ASR limit
trol loop (ASR) as a percentage of
20.0
the maximum output frequency.
5.0%
5-21
Carrier Frequency: C6
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
0: Heavy Duty (low carrier, conHeavy/
stant torque, 150% current overNormal
load for 1 min.)
0 or 1
C6-01
*1
Duty selec- 1: Normal Duty (high carrier, varition
able torque, 120% current overload for 1 min.)
Carrier fre- Selects the carrier frequency.
C6-02 quency
Select F to enable detailed settings
selection using constants C6-03 to C6-05.
Sets the carrier frequency upper
Carrier
limit and lower limit in kHz units.
C6-03 frequency The carrier frequency gain is set as
upper limit follows:
With the vector control method, the
upper limit of the carrier frequency
is fixed in C6-03.
Carrier
C6-04 frequency
lower limit
Carrier frequency
0 to F
Factory
Setting
1
6
*2
2.0 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*3 *4
*2
0.4 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*3 *4
*2
00 to
99
00
Change Control Methods
MEMOduring
V/f
Page
BUS
Open
Opera- V/f with
Loop Register
tion
PG
No
Q
Q
Q
223H
4-5
6-2
No
Q
Q
Q
224H
4-5
4-14
6-2
No
A
A
A
225H
6-2
No
A
A
No
226H
6-2
No
A
A
No
227H
6-2
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K
Output
frequency
(Max. output frequency)
Carrier frequency
C6-05
proportional gain
*
*
*
*
5-22
1.
2.
3.
4.
K is a coefficient that depends on the
setting of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz &gt; C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz &gt; C6-03: K = 1
*4
On 200V class inverters with 110 kW and 400V class inverters with 220 kW and 300 kW the setting is fixed to 1. It cannot be changed to 0.
The factory setting depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
This constant can be monitored or set only when 1 is set for C6-01 and F is set for C6-02.
User Constant Tables
Reference Constants: d
Preset Reference: d1
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
V/f with Open
Loop Register
PG
Frequency
reference 1
Sets the frequency reference.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
280H
4-6
6-9
Frequency
d1-02
reference 2
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed command 1 is ON for a multifunction input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
281H
4-6
6-9
Frequency
d1-03
reference 3
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed command 2 is ON for a multifunction input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
282H
4-6
6-9
Frequency
d1-04
reference 4
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed commands 1 and 2 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
283H
4-6
6-9
Frequency
d1-05
reference 5
Sets the frequency when
multi-step speed command 3
is ON for a multi-function
input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
284H
6-9
Frequency
d1-06
reference 6
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed commands 1 and 3 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0 to 0.00 Hz
400.00
Yes
A
A
A
285H
6-9
Frequency
d1-07
reference 7
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed commands 2 and 3 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
286H
6-9
Frequency
d1-08
reference 8
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed commands 1, 2, and 3 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
287H
6-9
Frequency
d1-09
reference 9
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed command 4 is ON for a multifunction input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
288H
6-9
Sets the frequency reference
Frequency when multi-step speed comd1-10
reference 10 mands 1 and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
28BH
6-9
Sets the frequency reference
Frequency when multi-step speed comd1-11
reference 11 mands 2 and 4 are ON for a
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
28CH
6-9
d1-01
5-23
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the frequency reference
Frequency when multi-step speed comd1-12
reference 12 mands 1, 2, and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
28DH
6-9
Sets the frequency reference
Frequency when multi-step speed comd1-13
reference 13 mands 3 and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
28EH
6-9
Sets the frequency reference
Frequency when multi-step speed comd1-14
reference 14 mands 1, 3, and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
28FH
6-9
0 to
Sets the frequency reference 400.00
Frequency when multi-step speed comd1-15
0.00 Hz
reference 15 mands 2, 3, and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
Yes
A
A
A
290H
6-9
Sets the frequency reference
Frequency when multi-step speed comd1-16
reference 16 mands 1, 2, 3, and 4 are ON
for multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
291H
6-9
6.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
292H
4-6
6-9
6-78
Constant
Number
Name
Jog
d1-17 frequency
reference
Description
Setting
Range
Sets the frequency reference
when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG command is
ON.
Note: The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor, default: 0.01 Hz).
Reference Limits: d2
5-24
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Frequency
d2-01 reference
upper limit
Sets the frequency reference
upper limit as a percentage of
the max. output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
No
A
A
A
289H
6-30
6-73
Frequency
d2-02 reference
lower limit
Sets the frequency reference
lower limit as a percentage of
the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
A
A
28AH
6-30
6-73
Master
speed referd2-03
ence lower
limit
Sets the master speed reference lower limit as a percentage of the max. output
frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
A
A
293H
6-30
6-73
Constant
Number
Name
User Constant Tables
Jump Frequencies: d3
Constant
Number
Name
d3-01
Jump frequency 1
d3-02
Jump frequency 2
d3-03
Jump frequency 3
Jump fred3-04 quency
width
Description
Setting
Range
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
294H
6-27
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
295H
6-27
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
296H
6-27
A
A
A
297H
6-27
Set the center values of the
jump frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled
when the jump frequency is
set to 0 Hz. Always ensure
that the following applies:
d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03
Operation in the jump frequency range is prohibited
but during acceleration and
deceleration, the speed
changes smoothly without
jumping
0.0 to
400.0
Sets the jump frequency
bandwidth in Hz.
The jump frequency range
will be the jump frequency &plusmn;
d3-04.
0.0 to
20.0
1.0 Hz
No
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets whether or not frequency reference value on
hold will be recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation
is stopped or the power is
turned on again the frequency reference is set to
0.)
1: Enabled (when operation
is stopped or the power is
turned on again the inverter starts at the previous
hold frequency.)
This function is available
when the multi-function
inputs “Accel/Decel Ramp
Hold” or “Up/Down” commands are set.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
298H
6-72
10%
No
A
A
A
299H
6-76
Reference Frequency Hold: d4
Constant
Number
Name
Frequency
reference
d4-01 hold function selection
d4-02
+ – Speed
limits
Sets the frequency to be add
to or subtracted from the analog frequency reference as a
percentage of the max. output
frequency.
0 to 100
Enabled when the increase
(+) speed command or
decrease (–) speed command
is set for a multi-function
input.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
BUS
Page
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
5-25
Field Weakening: d6
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Sets the inverter output voltage when the field weakening
command is input at a multiField weak- function input.
d6-01
0 to 100
ening level Sets the voltage level as a
percentage taking the voltage set by the V/f pattern as
100%.
Field
weakening
d6-02
frequency
limit
5-26
Sets the lower limit of the
frequency range where field
control is valid.
The field weakening command is valid only at frequencies above this setting
and only when the speed is in
agreement with the current
speed reference.
0.0 to
400.0
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
80%
No
A
A
No
2A0H
6-113
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
No
2A1H
6-113
User Constant Tables
Motor Constants: E
V/f Pattern: E1
Constant
Number
E1-01
E1-03
Name
Description
Sets the Inverter input voltage.
Input voltThis setting is used as a reference
age setting
value for protection functions.
V/f pattern
selection
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset
patterns.
F:
Custom user-set pattern
(Applicable for setting of
E1-04 to E1-10.)
Max.
output
E1-04
frequency
(FMAX)
Max.
output
E1-05
voltage
(VMAX)
Output Voltage (V)
Base
E1-06 frequency
(FA)
Mid.
output
E1-07
frequency
(FB)
Mid.
output
E1-08 frequency
voltage
(VB)
Min.
output
E1-09
frequency
(FMIN)
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a
straight line, set the same values for
E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the
setting for E1-08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following
manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) &gt; E107 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Min.
output
E1-10 frequency
voltage
(VMIN)
Mid.
output
E1-11
frequency
2
Mid.
output
E1-12
frequency
voltage 2
Setting
Range
Change Control Methods
MEMOduring
V/f
Page
BUS
Opera- V/f with Open
Loop Register
tion
PG
155 to
200 V
255
*1
No
Q
Q
Q
300H
0 to F
F
No
Q
Q
No
302H
6-116
40.0 to
400.0
No
Q
Q
Q
303H
6-116
*2
50.0
Hz
0.0 to
255.0
200.0
V
No
Q
Q
Q
304H
6-116
*1
*1
0.0 to
400.0
50.0
Hz
No
Q
Q
Q
305H
6-116
0.0 to 2.5 Hz
*3
400.0
No
A
A
A
306H
6-116
0.0 to 15.0 V
255 *1 *1 *3
No
A
A
A
307H
0.0 to 1.2 Hz
*3
400.0
No
Q
Q
Q
308H
6-116
No
A
A
A
309H
4-14
4-15
*1
0.0 to
255.0
*1
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the
output range. Normally, this setting
is not required.
Factory
Setting
9.0 V
*1 *3
0.0 to 0.0 Hz
*4
400.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 V
*4
4-6
6-116
4-15
6-116
6-116
No
A
A
A
30AH
6-116
No
A
A
A
30BH
6-116
5-27
Constant
Number
Name
Base
E1-13 voltage
(VBASE)
*
*
*
*
*
5-28
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Description
Sets the output voltage of the base
frequency (E1-06).
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.0 to
255.0
0.0 V
*1
*5
Change Control Methods
MEMOduring
V/f
Page
BUS
Open
Opera- V/f with
Loop Register
tion
PG
No
A
These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
When C6-01 is set to 0, the upper limit of the setting range is 150.0 Hz.
The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
A
Q
30CH
6-116
User Constant Tables
Motor Setup: E2
Constant
Number
E2-01
Name
Motor rated
current
E2-02
Motor rated
slip
E2-03
Motor noload current
E2-04
Number of
motor poles
Motor lineE2-05 to-line resistance
E2-06
Motor leak
inductance
Motor iron
E2-07 saturation
coefficient 1
Motor iron
E2-08 saturation
coefficient 2
Description
Sets the motor rated current.
This set value will become
the reference value for motor
protection and torque limits.
This constant is an input data
for autotuning.
Sets the motor rated slip in
Hz units.
This set value will become
the reference value for the
slip compensation.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the motor no-load current.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the number of motor
poles.
This value is an input data for
autotuning.
Sets the motor phase-tophase resistance in Ω units.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the voltage drop due to
motor leakage inductance as
a percentage of the motor
rated voltage.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux.
This constant is automatically set during rotating autotuning.
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux.
This constant is automatically set during rotating autotuning.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.32 to
6.40
1.90 A
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
No
Q
Q
Q
30EH
6-51
6-114
No
A
A
A
30FH
6-111
6-114
No
A
A
A
310H
6-114
2 to 48 4 poles
No
No
Q
No
311H
6-114
0.000
9.842 Ω
to
*2
65.000
No
A
A
A
312H
6-114
0.0 to
40.0
No
No
No
A
313H
6-114
*1
*2
0.00 to 2.90 Hz
*2
20.00
0.00 to
1.89
*3
1.20 A
*2
18.2%
*2
0.00 to
0.50
0.50
No
No
No
A
314H
6-114
0.00 to
0.75
0.75
No
No
No
A
315H
6-114
No
A
A
No
317H
6-114
No
Q
Q
Q
318H
6-111
Motor iron
loss for
0 to
E2-10
Sets motor iron losses.
torque com65535
pensation
Sets the rated output of the
Motor rated
motor in units of 0.01 kW.
0.00 to
E2-11 output
This constant is an input data 650.00
power
for autotuning.
14 W
*2
0.40
*2
* 1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. The setting range depends on the inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
5-29
Motor 2 V/f Pattern: E3
Constant
Number
Name
Motor 2
control
E3-01
method
selection
Description
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control
Motor 2
max. outE3-02 put frequency
(FMAX)
Motor 2
max. outE3-03 put voltage
(VMAX)
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
319H
6-123
50.0
Hz
No
A
A
A
31AH
6-123
No
A
A
A
31BH
6-123
No
A
A
A
31CH
6-123
0.0 to 2.5 Hz
*3
400.0
No
A
A
A
31DH
6-123
0.0 to
15.0 V
255.0
*2
No
A
A
A
31EH
6-123
0.0 to 1.2 Hz
*3
400.0
No
A
A
A
31FH
6-123
No
A
A
A
320H
6-123
*1
Motor 2
max. voltE3-04 age frequency
(FA)
Frequency (Hz)
Motor 2
mid. output
E3-05
frequency
To set V/f characteristics in a
1 (FB)
straight line, set the same values for
Motor 2
E3-05 and E3-07.
mid. output In this case, the setting for E3-06
E3-06 frequency will be disregarded.
voltage 1 Always ensure that the four fre(VB)
quencies are set in the following
manner:
Motor 2
min. output E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) &gt; E3E3-07
frequency 05 (FB) &gt; E3-07 (FMIN)
(FMIN)
Motor 2
min. output
E3-08 frequency
voltage
(VMIN)
Factory
Setting
40.0 to
400.0
Output voltage (V)
Change Control Methods
MEMOduring
V/f
Page
BUS
Open
Opera- V/f with
Loop Register
tion
PG
Setting
Range
0.0 to
255.0
200.0
V
*2
*2
0.0 to
400.0
50.0
Hz
*2
0.0 to
255.0
*2
9.0 V
*2*3
* 1. When C6-01 is set to 0, the upper limit of the setting range is 150.0 Hz.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 3. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
5-30
User Constant Tables
Motor 2 Setup: E4
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Sets the motor rated current.
This set value will become a
Motor 2
reference value for motor
E4-01
rated current protection and torque limits.
This constant is an input data
for autotuning.
0.32
1.90 A
to 6.40
*2
No
A
A
A
321H
6-51
Sets the motor rated slip in
Hz units.
This set value will become a
reference value for slip compensation.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.00 to 2.90 Hz
*2
20.00
No
A
A
A
322H
6-122
No
A
A
A
323H
6-122
E4-02
Motor 2
rated slip
Sets the motor no-load curMotor 2 norent.
E4-03
load current This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
*1
0.00 to
1.89
*3
1.20 A
*2
Motor 2
number of
E4-04
poles (number of poles)
Sets the number of motor
poles.
2 to 48 4 poles
This value is an input data for
autotuning.
No
No
A
No
324H
6-122
Motor 2
E4-05 line-to-line
resistance
Sets the motor phase-tophase resistance in Ω units.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
No
A
A
A
325H
6-122
No
No
No
A
326H
6-122
No
A
A
A
327H
6-122
Sets the voltage drop due to
motor leakage inductance as
Motor 2 leak a percentage of the motor
E4-06
inductance rated voltage.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.000 to 9.842 Ω
*2
65.000
0.0 to
40.0
Sets the rated output of the
Motor 2
motor in units of 0.01 kW.
0.40 to
E4-07 rated capacThis constant is an input data 650.00
ity
for autotuning.
18.2%
*2
0.40
*2
* 1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. The setting range will depend upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
5-31
Option Constants: F
PG Option Setup: F1
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the number of PG (pulse
generator or encoder) pulses.
0 to
60000
1024
No
No
Q
No
380H
6-136
Sets the PG disconnection
stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration to stop
using the deceleration
Operation
time 1, C1-02.)
selection at 1: Coast to stop
F1-02
PG open cir- 2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
cuit (PGO)
using the deceleration
time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, avoid to use
this setting.)
0 to 3
1
No
No
A
No
381H
6-136
Operation
selection at
F1-03
overspeed
(OS)
Sets the stopping method
when an overspeed (OS) fault
occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration to stop
using the deceleration
time 1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration
time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, avoid to use
this setting.)
0 to 3
1
No
No
A
No
382H
6-136
Operation
F1-04 selection at
deviation
Sets the stopping method
when a speed deviation
(DEV) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration to stop
using the deceleration
time 1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration
time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV
is displayed and operation
continued.)
0 to 3
3
No
No
A
No
383H
6-136
Name
F1-01 PG constant
5-32
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
V/f with Open
Loop Register
PG
Setting
Range
Constant
Number
User Constant Tables
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
No
A
No
384H
6-136
Sets the division ratio for the
PG speed control card pulse
output.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m
(n=0 or 1 m=1 to 32)
PG division
The first digit of the value of
rate (PG
F1-06
F1-06 stands for n, the sec- 1 to 132
pulse moniond and the third stand for m.
tor)
This constant is only effective when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio
settings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06
≤ 1.
1
No
No
A
No
385H
6-137
Sets integral control during
acceleration/deceleration to
either enabled or disabled.
Integral
0: Disabled (The integral
value during
function isn't used while
F1-07 accel/decel
accelerating or
enable/disdecelerating; it is used at
able
constant speeds.)
1: Enabled (The integral
function is used at all
times.)
0
No
No
A
No
386H
6-137
No
No
A
No
387H
6-137
No
No
A
No
388H
6-137
10%
No
No
A
No
389H
6-137
0.5 s
No
No
A
No
38AH
6-137
Constant
Number
Name
F1-05 PG rotation
Overspeed
F1-08 detection
level
Overspeed
F1-09 detection
delay time
Description
0: Phase A leads with
forward run command.
(Phase B leads with
reverse run command.)
1: Phase B leads with
forward run command.
(Phase A leads with
reverse run command.)
0 or 1
Sets the overspeed detection
method.
0 to 120 115%
Motor speeds that continue to
exceed the value set in F1-08
(set as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency) 0.0 to
1.0 s
2.0
for the time set in F1-09 are
detected as overspeed faults.
Sets the speed deviation
detection method.
0 to 50
Any speed deviation above
the F1-10 set level (set as a
percentage of the maximum
output frequency) that continues for the time set in F1Excessive
11 is detected as a speed
speed deviadeviation.
0.0 to
F1-11 tion detecSpeed deviation is the differ10.0
tion delay
ence between actual motor
time
speed and the speed reference
command.
Excessive
speed deviaF1-10
tion detection level
5-33
Constant
Number
Name
Number of
F1-12 PG gear
teeth 1
Number of
F1-13 PG gear
teeth 2
Description
Sets the number of teeth on
the gears if there are gears
between the PG and the
motor.
Input pulses from PG x 60 x F1-13
F1-01
F1-12
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0
No
No
A
No
38BH
6-137
0
No
No
A
No
38CH
6-137
2.0 s
No
No
A
No
38DH
6-137
0 to
1000
A gear ratio of 1 will be used
if one of these constants is set
to 0.
Used to set the PG disconPG open-cirnection detection time. PGO
cuit detecF1-14
will be detected if the detection delay
tion time exceeds the set
time
time.
5-34
Setting
Range
0.0 to
10.0
User Constant Tables
Communications Option Cards: F6
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the stopping method for
communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using
Operation
the deceleration time in
selection
C1-02
F6-01 after com1: Coast to stop
munications
2: Emergency stop using the
error
deceleration time in C109
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
1
No
A
A
A
3A2H
-
Input level
of external
error from
0: Always detect
F6-02
Communica- 1: Detect during operation
tions Option
Card
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
3A3H
-
0: Deceleration to stop using
Stopping
the deceleration time in
method for
C1-02
external
1: Coast to stop
F6-03 error from
2: Emergency stop using the
Communicadeceleration time in C1tions Option
09
Card
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
1
No
A
A
A
3A4H
-
Trace sampling from
F6-04 Communications Option
Card
0 to
60000
0
No
A
A
A
3A5H
-
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
3A6H
-
Constant
Number
Name
Description
-
Sets the unit of current moniCurrent
tor
F6-05 monitor unit
0: Ampere
selection
1: 100%/8192
5-35
Terminal Function Constants: H
Multi-function Contact Inputs: H1
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
V/f with Open
Loop Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Terminal S3
Multi-function contact
H1-01 function
input 1
selection
0 to 77
24
No
A
A
A
400H
-
Terminal S4
Multi-function contact
H1-02 function
input 2
selection
0 to 77
14
No
A
A
A
401H
-
Terminal S5
Multi-function contact
H1-03 function
input 3
selection
0 to 77
3 (0)*
No
A
A
A
402H
-
Terminal S6
Multi-function contact
H1-04 function
input 4
selection
0 to 77
4 (3)*
No
A
A
A
403H
-
Terminal S7
Multi-function contact
H1-05 function
input 5
selection
0 to 77
6 (4)*
No
A
A
A
404H
-
Constant
Number
Name
Description
* The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
Multi-function Contact Input Functions
Setting
Value
5-36
Function
Control Methods
V/f Open
V/f with Loop
PG Vector
Page
0
3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run command)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-12
1
Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Constant b1-01/b1-02 setting)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-69
2
Operation Source Option Card/Inverter selection (ON: Option Card)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-78
3
Multi-step speed reference 1
When H3-09 is set to 2, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed
switch.
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-9
4
Multi-step speed reference 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-9
5
Multi-step speed reference 3
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-9
6
Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-9
6-69
7
Accel/decel time 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-19
8
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-70
6-61
9
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-70
6-61
A
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration stopped, frequency is hold)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-72
B
OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-71
C
Multi-function analog input A2 disable/enable (ON: Enable)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-71
User Constant Tables
Setting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f Open
V/f with Loop
PG Vector
Page
D
V/f control with/without PG (ON: Speed feedback control disabled,) (normal V/f
control)
No
Yes
No
6-42
E
Speed control integral disable (ON: Integral control disabled)
No
Yes
No
6-42
F
Not used (Set when a terminal is not used)
-
-
-
-
10
Up command (Always set with the Down command)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-73
11
Down command (Always set with the Up command)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-73
12
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-78
13
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-78
14
Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
7-2
15
Emergency stop. (NO: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when
ON.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-17
16
Motor switch command (Motor 2 selection)
Yes
Yes
Yes 6-122
17
Emergency stop (NC: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when
OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
18
Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function
outputs are set in H2-.)
Yes
Yes
Yes 6-101
19
PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)
Yes
Yes
Yes 6-104
1A
Accel/Decel time 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-19
1B
Constants write enable (ON: All constants can be written-in. OFF: All constants are
write protected.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-134
1C
Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequency is added to analog frequency reference.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-76
1D
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency
reference.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-76
1E
Analog frequency reference sample/hold
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-77
External fault
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-79
30
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped durYes
ing PID control)
Yes
Yes 6-104
31
PID control integral hold (ON: Hold)
Yes
Yes
Yes 6-104
32
Multi-step speed command 4
Yes
Yes
Yes
34
PID soft starter
Yes
Yes
Yes 6-104
35
PID input characteristics switch
Yes
Yes
Yes 6-104
60
DC injection braking command (ON: Performs DC injection braking)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-16
61
External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency)
Yes
No
Yes
6-58
62
External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency)
Yes
No
Yes
6-58
63
Field weakening command (ON: Field weakening control set for d6-01 and d6-02)
Yes
Yes
No
6-113
64
External speed search command 3
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-57
65
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NC contact)
Yes
Yes
Yes 6-124
66
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
Yes
Yes
Yes 6-124
67
Communications test mode
Yes
Yes
Yes 6-100
68
High-slip braking (HSB)
Yes
Yes
No
6-126
69
Jog Frequency 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-10
20 to 2F
6-17
6-9
5-37
Setting
Value
6A
Function
Drive enable (NC, ON: Drive enabled, OFF: Drive disabled
Control Methods
V/f Open
V/f with Loop
PG Vector
Page
Yes
6-71
Yes
Yes
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Terminal
M1-M2
H2-01
function
selection
Multi-function contact
output 1
0 to 37
0
No
A
A
A
40BH
-
Terminal
M3-M4
H2-02
function
selection
Multi-function contact
output 2
0 to 37
1
No
A
A
A
40CH
-
Terminal
M5-M6
H2-03
function
selection
Multi-function contact
output 3
0 to 37
2
No
A
A
A
40DH
-
Multi-function Contact Output Functions
0
During run (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output)
Control Methods
V/f Open Page
V/f with loop
PG Vector
Yes Yes Yes 6-80
1
Zero-speed
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-81
2
fref/fout agree 1 (detection width L4-02 is used.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-33
3
fref/fset agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = &plusmn;L4-01, with detection width L4-02 used
and during frequency agree)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-33
4
Frequency detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, with detection
width L4-02 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-33
5
Frequency detection 2 (ON: Output frequency ≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L4Yes
01, with detection width L4-02 used)
Yes
Yes
6-33
6
Inverter operation ready
READY: After initialization or no faults
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-81
7
During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-81
8
During baseblock (NO contact, ON: during baseblock)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-81
Setting
Value
5-38
Function
9
Frequency reference source selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-81
A
Run command source selection status (ON: Run command from Operator)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-81
B
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact, ON: Overtorque/undertorque
detection)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-48
C
Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-62
D
Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-64
E
Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and
CPF01 has occurred.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-81
F
Not used. (Set when the terminal is not used.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
10
Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-81
User Constant Tables
11
Fault reset command active
Control Methods
V/f Open Page
V/f with loop
PG Vector
Yes Yes Yes 6-82
12
Timer function output
Yes
Yes
Yes 6-101
13
fref/fout agree 2 (detection width L4-04 is used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-33
14
fref/fset agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, with detection width L4-04 is
used, and during frequency agree)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-33
15
Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency ≤ -L4-03, detection width L4-04 is
used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-33
16
Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency ≥ -L4-03, detection width L4-04 is
used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-33
17
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact, OFF: Torque detection)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-48
18
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact, ON: Torque detection)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-48
19
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact, OFF: Torque detection)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-48
1A
During reverse run (ON: During reverse run)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-82
1B
During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-82
1C
Motor selection (ON: Motor 2 selected)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-82
1E
Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-63
1F
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-51
20
Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-64
30
During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit)
No
No
Yes
6-44
37
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-80
38
Drive enabled
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-82
Setting
Value
Function
5-39
Analog Inputs: H3
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
410H
6-25
Yes
A
A
A
411H
6-25
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
412H
6-25
0 to 2
2
No
A
A
A
417H
6-25
Selects the multi-function
analog input function for ter0 to 1F
minal A2. Refer to the table
on the next page.
0
No
A
A
A
418H
6-25
Sets the input level when terminal A2 input is 10 V (20
Gain (termi0.0 to
H3-10
mA) according to the 100%
100.0%
nal A2)
1000.0
value of the function set in
constant H3-09.
Yes
A
A
A
419H
6-25
Sets the input level when terminal A2 is 0 V (4 mA)
-100.0
Bias (termiH3-11
according to the 100% value
to
nal A2)
of the function set in constant +100.0
H3-09.
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
41AH
6-25
Sets primary delay filter time
Analog input constant for the two analog
0.00 to
H3-12 filter time
input terminals (A1 and A2).
2.00
constant
Effective for noise control
etc.
0.00
s
No
A
A
A
41BH
6-25
0
No
A
A
A
41CH
-
Name
Description
Multi-function analog
0: 0 to +10V (11 bit)
input termiH3-01
1: –10V to +10V (11 bit plus
nal A1 sigsign)
nal level
selection
Sets the frequency as a perGain (termicentage of the maximum out- 0.0 to
H3-02
100.0%
nal A1)
put frequency, when 10 V is 1000.0
input.
H3-03
Sets the frequency as a per-100.0
Bias (termicentage of the maximum freto
nal A1)
quency, when 0 V is input.
+100.0
0: 0 to +10V (11 bit).
Multi-func1: –10V to +10V (11 bit plus
tion analog
sign).
input termiH3-08
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
nal A2 sigSwitch current and voltage
nal level
input using the switch S1 on
selection
the control terminal board.
Multi-function analog
input termiH3-09
nal A2 function
selection
Terminal
H3-13 A1/A2
switching
5-40
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Constant
Number
0: Use terminal A1 analog
input as main frequency
reference.
1: Use terminal A2 analog
input as main frequency
reference.
Effective when H3-09 is set
to 2.
0 or 1
User Constant Tables
H3-09 Settings
Setting
Value
0
Function
Contents (100%)
Control Methods
V/f Open Page
V/f with Loop
PG Vector
Yes Yes Yes 6-26
Frequency bias
Maximum output frequency
1
Frequency gain
Frequency reference (voltage) command
value
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-26
2
Auxiliary frequency reference (is
used as frequency reference 2)
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-7
4
Voltage bias
Motor rated voltage (E1-05)
Yes
Yes
No
-
5
Accel/decel time gain
Set acceleration and deceleration times (C101 to C1-08)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-20
6
DC injection braking current
Inverter rated output current
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-17
7
Overtorque/undertorque detection
level
Motor rated torque for vector control
Inverter rated output current for V/f control
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-50
8
Stall prevention level during run
Inverter rated output current
Yes
Yes
No
6-47
9
Frequency reference lower limit
level
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-31
A
Jump frequency
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-28
B
PID feedback
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes 6-104
C
PID target value
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes 6-104
E
Motor temperature input
Yes
Yes
Yes
10
Positive torque limit
Motor rated torque
No
No
Yes
6-44
11
Negative torque limit
Motor rated torque
No
No
Yes
6-44
12
Regenerative torque limit
Motor rated torque
No
No
Yes
6-44
15
Positive/negative torque limit
Motor rated torque
No
No
Yes
6-44
1F
Analog input not used.
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-54
–
5-41
Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4
Change
during
Operation
2
No
A
A
A
41DH
6-83
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM)
gain.
Sets the percentage of the
0 to
Gain (termiH4-02
monitor item that is equal to 1000.0
nal FM)
%
10V/20mA output at terminal
FM. Note that the maximum
output voltage/current is
10V/20mA.
100%
Yes
Q
Q
Q
41EH
4-6
6-83
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM)
bias.
Sets the percentage of the
Bias (termiH4-03
monitor item that is equal to
nal FM)
0V/4mA output at terminal
FM.
The maximum output from
the terminal is 10 V/20mA.
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
41FH
6-83
3
No
A
A
A
420H
6-83
Set the multi-function analog
output 2 (terminal AM) gain.
Sets the percentage of the
0 to
Gain (termi- monitor item that is equal to
H4-05
1000.0
nal AM)
10V/20mA output at terminal
%
AM. Note that the maximum
output voltage/current is
10V/20mA.
50.0%
Yes
Q
Q
Q
421H
4-6
6-83
Sets the multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM)
bias.
Sets the percentage of the
Bias (termiH4-06
monitor item that is equal to
nal AM)
0V/4mA output at terminal
AM.
The maximum output from
the terminal is 10 V/20mA.
-110.0
to
+110.0
%
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
422H
6-83
Sets the signal output level
for multi-function output 1
(terminal FM)
Analog out0: 0 to +10 V output
put 1 signal
H4-07
1: –10V to +10V output
level selec2: 4 – 20 mA
tion
Switch current and voltage
output using CN15 on the
control terminal board.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
423H
6-83
Name
Monitor
selection
H4-01
(terminal
FM)
Monitor
selection
H4-04
(terminal
AM)
5-42
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Factory
Setting
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1) at terminal FM.
1 to 38
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40
cannot be set.
-110 to
+110%
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1) at terminal AM.
1 to 38
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40
cannot be set.
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Sets the signal output level
for multi-function output 2
(terminal AM)
Analog out0: 0 to +10 V output
put 2 signal
H4-08
1: –10V to +10V output
level selec2: 4 – 20 mA
tion
Switch current and voltage
output using CN15 on the
control terminal board.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
0
No
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1F
No
A
A
A
425H
6-88
A
A
A
424H
6-83
MEMOBUS Communications: H5
Constant
Number
H5-01
Name
Station
address
Description
Sets the Inverter's node
address.
0 to 20
*
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Sets the baud rate for
MEMOBUS communications.
Communica0: 1200 bps
H5-02 tions speed
1: 2400 bps
selection
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
0 to 4
3
No
A
A
A
426H
6-88
Sets the parity for MEMOCommunica- BUS communications.
H5-03 tions parity 0: No parity
selection
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
427H
6-88
Sets the stopping method for
communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using
Stopping
the deceleration time in
method after
C1-02
H5-04
communica- 1: Coast to stop
tions error
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C109
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
428H
6-88
Communications error
H5-05
detection
selection
Sets whether or not a communications timeout is to be
detected as a communications error.
0: Do not detect.
1: Detect
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
429H
6-88
Send wait
H5-06
time
Sets the time from the
Inverter receiving data to
when the Inverter starts to
send.
5 to 65
5 ms
No
A
A
A
42AH
6-88
5-43
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1
No
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
42CH
6-6
6-29
6-103
1000 to
32000
1440
Hz
Yes
A
A
A
42DH
6-6
6-29
Sets the input level according
to 100% of the input item
0.0 to
selected in H6-01, when a
100.0%
1000.0
pulse train with the frequency
set in H6-02 is input.
Yes
A
A
A
42EH
6-29
Pulse train
H6-04
input bias
Sets the input level according
to 100% of the input item
-100.0
selected in H6-01, when the to 100.0
pulse train frequency is 0.
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
42FH
6-29
Pulse train
H6-05 input filter
time
Sets the pulse train input
delay filter time constant in
seconds.
0.10
s
Yes
A
A
A
430H
6-29
Pulse train
H6-06 monitor
selection
Select the pulse train monitor
output items (value of the
1, 2, 5,
part of U1-).
20, 24,
There are two types of moni36
tor items: Speed-related
items and PID-related items.
2
Yes
A
A
A
431H
6-85
Pulse train
H6-07 monitor
scaling
Sets the number of pulses
output in hertz when the
monitor item is 100%.
Sets H6-06 to 2, and H6-07
to 0, to make the pulse train
monitor output synchronously to the output frequency.
1440
Hz
Yes
A
A
A
432H
6-85
Constant
Number
H5-07
Name
Description
Setting
Range
RTS control
ON/OFF
Enables or disables RTS
control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always
ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON
only when sending)
0 or 1
A
A
A
42BH
6-88
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
Pulse Train I/O: H6
Constant
Number
Name
Pulse train
input funcH6-01
tion selection
Description
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
Sets the number of pulses in
Pulse train Hertz, that is equivalent to
H6-02
input scaling 100% of the input item
selected in H6-01.
H6-03
5-44
Pulse train
input gain
0.00 to
2.00
0 to
32000
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
BUS
Page
V/f with Open
Loop Register
PG
User Constant Tables
Protection Function Constants: L
Motor Overload: L1
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
V/f with Open
Loop Register
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets whether the motor overload function is enabled or
disabled at electric thermal
overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor
protection (fan cooled
motor)
2: Inverter motor protection
(externally cooled motor)
3: Vector motor protection
When the Inverter power
supply is turned off, the
thermal value is reset, so
even if this constant is set
to 1, protection may not
be effective.
When several motors are
connected to one Inverter, set
to 0 and ensure that each
motor is installed with a protection device.
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
480H
4-6
6-51
Sets the electric thermal
detection time in seconds
units.
Usually changing this setting
is not necessary.
Motor proThe factory setting is 150%
L1-02 tection time
overload for one minute.
constant
When the motor's overload
capability is known, also set
the overload resistance protection time for when the
motor is hot started.
0.1 to
5.0
1.0 min
No
A
A
A
481H
6-51
Selects the operation when
the input motor temperature
(thermistor) input exceeds
the alarm detection level
Alarm oper- (1.17 V) (H3-09 must be set
ation selec- to E).
L1-03 tion during
0: Decelerate to stop
motor over- 1: Coast to stop
heating
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C109.
3: Continue operation (oH3
on the Operator flashes).
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
482H
6-53
Constant
Number
Name
Motor proL1-01 tection
selection
5-45
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Selects the operation when
the motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the
overheating detection level
Motor over(2.34 V) (H3-09 must be set
heating
L1-04
to E).
operation
0: Decelerate to stop
selection
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C109.
0 to 2
1
No
A
A
A
483H
6-53
Motor temperature
L1-05 input filter
time constant
0.00 to
10.00
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
484H
6-53
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (DC bus
undervoltage (UV1)
detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when
the power returns within
the time set in L2-02.
When L2-02 is exceeded,
DC bus undervoltage is
detected.)
2: Enabled while CPU is
operating. (Restarts when
power returns during
control operations. Does
not detect DC bus
undervoltage.)
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
485H
6-56
6-124
No
A
A
A
486H
6-56
No
A
A
A
487H
6-56
6-57
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Sets H3-09 to E and sets the
delay time constant for the
motor temperature (thermistor) input in seconds.
Power Loss Ridethrough: L2
Constant
Number
Name
Momentary
L2-01 power loss
detection
Ridethrough time, when
Momentary
Momentary Power Loss
L2-02 power loss
Selection (L2-01) is set to 1,
ridethru time
in units of seconds.
L2-03
5-46
Min. baseblock time
0 to 2.0
Sets the Inverter's minimum
baseblock time, when the
Inverter is restarted after
power loss ridethrough.
Set the time to approximately
0.7 times the motor time con- 0.1 to
stant.
5.0
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting
a speed search or DC injection braking, increase the set
values.
0.1 s
*1
0.1 s
*1
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
BUS
Page
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Voltage
L2-04 recovery
time
Sets the time required to
return the Inverter output
voltage from 0V to normal
voltage at the completion of a
speed search.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s
UndervoltL2-05 age detection level
Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection level
(main circuit DC voltage).
Usually changing this setting
is not necessary.
Name
150 to
210
*2
Sets the time required to
decelerate from the speed
KEB decel- where the deceleration at
L2-06
eration time momentary power loss command (KEB) is input to zero
speed.
0.0 to
200.0
Sets the time to accelerate to
the set speed after recovery
from a momentary power
loss.
0.0 to
25.5
Momentary
L2-07 recovery
time
Sets the reduction gain of the
output frequency at the
Frequency beginning of deceleration at
reduction
momentary power loss
L2-08
0 to 300
gain at KEB (KEB).
start
Reduction = slip frequency
before KEB operation &times; L208 &times; 2
*1
190 V
*2
0.0 s
0s
*3
100
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
No
A
A
A
488H
6-56
6-57
No
A
A
A
489H
6-56
6-124
No
A
A
A
48AH
6-124
No
A
A
A
48BH
6-124
No
A
A
A
48CH
6-124
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Value for a 400 V class Inverter is double.
* 3. If the setting is 0, the axis will accelerate to the specified speed over the specified acceleration time (C1-01 to C1-08).
5-47
Stall Prevention: L3
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
1
No
A
A
A
48FH
6-21
Effective when L3-01 is set
to 1 or 2.
Stall preven- Set as a percentage of
120%
L3-02 tion level
Inverter rated current.
0 to 200
*
during accel Usually changing this setting
is not necessary. Reduce the
setting when the motor stalls.
No
A
A
A
490H
6-21
Sets the lower limit for stall
prevention during acceleraStall prevention, as a percentage of the
L3-03 tion limit
0 to 100
Inverter rated current.
during accel
Usually changing this setting
is not necessary.
50%
No
A
A
A
491H
6-21
1
No
Q
Q
Q
492H
4-6
6-23
Name
Description
0: Disabled (Acceleration as
set. With a heavy load, the
motor may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration
stopped when L3-02 level
is exceeded. Acceleration
Stall prevenstarts again when the
tion seleccurrent has fallen below
L3-01
tion during
the stall prevention level).
accel
2: Intelligent acceleration
mode (Using the L3-02
level as a basis,
acceleration is
automatically adjusted.
Set acceleration time is
disregarded.)
0: Disabled (Deceleration as
set. If deceleration time is
too short, a DC-Bus
overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the DC-Bus
voltage exceeds the stall
prevention level.
Deceleration restarts
when the voltage falls
below the stall prevention
Stall prevenlevel again.)
tion selec2: Intelligent deceleration
L3-04
tion during
mode (Deceleration rate is
decel
automatically adjusted so
that in Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest
possible time. The set
deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking
Resistor Unit)
When a braking option
(Braking Resistor, Braking
Resistor Unit, Braking Unit)
is used, always set to 0 or 3.
5-48
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Constant
Number
0 to 3
User Constant Tables
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (Runs as set.
With a heavy load, the
Stall prevenmotor may stall.)
tion selec1: Deceleration using
L3-05
tion during
deceleration time 1 (C1running
02.)
2: Deceleration using decelerationtime 2 (C1-04.)
0 to 2
1
No
A
A
No
493H
6-46
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or
2.
Stall preven- Set as a percentage of the
tion level
Inverter rated current.
L3-06
during run- Usually changing this setting
ning
is not necessary.
Reduce the setting when the
motor stalls.
30 to
200
120%
No
A
A
No
494H
6-46
Constant
Number
Name
Description
*
* The initial value when C6-01 is set to 1 is given. If C6-01 is set to 0, the initial value will be 150%.
5-49
Reference Detection: L4
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Effective when &quot;fout/fset
Speed agreeagree 1&quot;, &quot;Frequency detecL4-01 ment detection 1&quot; or &quot;Frequency detection level
tion 2&quot; is set for a multifunction output.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
499H
6-32
Effective when &quot;fref/fout
agree 1&quot;, &quot;fout/fset agree 1&quot; or
Speed agreeL4-02 ment detec- &quot;Frequency detection 1&quot; or
&quot;Frequency detection 2&quot; is
tion width
set for a multi-function output.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
49AH
6-32
Effective when &quot;fout/fset
Speed agreeagree 2&quot;, &quot;Frequency detecment detecL4-03
tion 3&quot; or &quot;Frequency detection level (+/
tion 4&quot; is set for a multi-)
function output.
-400.0
to
+400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
49BH
6-32
Effective when &quot;fref/fout
agree 2&quot; &quot;fout/fset agree 2&quot;,
&quot;Frequency detection 3&quot; or
&quot;Frequency detection 4&quot; is
set for a multi-function output.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
49CH
6-32
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
49DH
6-62
0.0 to
100.0%
80%
No
A
A
A
4C2H
6-62
Name
Speed agreement detecL4-04
tion width
(+/-)
Operation
when freL4-05 quency reference is
missing
Description
0: Stop (Operation follows
the frequency reference.)
1: Operation continues at the
frequency, set in parameter L4-06.
Frequency reference loss
means that the frequency
reference value drops over
90% in 400 ms.
Frequency
reference
Sets the frequency reference
L4-06 value at fre- value when the frequency
quency ref- reference is missing
erence loss
5-50
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Constant
Number
User Constant Tables
Fault Restart: L5
Constant
Number
Name
Number of
L5-01 auto restart
attempts
Description
Setting
Range
Sets the number of auto
restart attempts.
Automatically restarts after a
0 to 10
fault and conducts a speed
search from the run frequency.
Sets whether a fault contact
output is activated during
Auto restart fault restart.
L5-02 operation
0: No output (Fault contact
selection
is not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)
0 or 1
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0
No
A
A
A
49EH
6-63
0
No
A
A
A
49FH
6-63
5-51
Torque Detection: L6
Constant
Number
Name
Torque
L6-01 detection
selection 1
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Overtorque/undertorque
detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement;
operation continues
(warning is output).
2: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
continues (warning is output).
3: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement;
output stopped upon
detection.
4: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection.
5: Undertorque detection
only with speed agreement; operation continues
(warning is output).
6: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
continues (warning is output).
7: Undertorque detection
only with speed agreement; output stopped
upon detection.
8: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection.
0 to 8
0
No
A
A
A
4A1H
6-48
No
A
A
A
4A2H
6-48
Torque
L6-02 detection
level 1
Open loop vector control:
Motor rated torque is set as
100%.
V/f control: Inverter rated
current is set as 100%.
Torque
L6-03 detection
time 1
Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection time.
Torque
L6-04 detection
selection 2
Torque
L6-05 detection
level 2
Torque
L6-06 detection
time 2
5-52
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
See L6-01 to L6-03 for a
description.
0 to 300 150%
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
4A3H
6-48
0 to 8
0
No
A
A
A
4A4H
6-48
0 to
300
150%
No
A
A
A
4A5H
6-48
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
4A6H
6-48
User Constant Tables
Torque Limits: L7
Constant
Number
Name
Forward
drive
L7-01
torque
limit
Reverse
drive
L7-02
torque
limit
Forward
regeneraL7-03
tive torque
limit
Description
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
Four individual regions can be set.
Output torque
Change Control Methods
MEMOduring
V/f
Page
BUS
Open
Opera- V/f with
Loop Register
tion
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0 to
300
200%*
No
No
No
A
4A7H
6-44
0 to
300
200%*
No
No
No
A
4A8H
6-44
0 to
300
200%*
No
No
No
A
4A9H
6-44
0 to
300
200%*
No
No
No
A
4AAH
6-44
Positive torque
Reverse
No. of
motor
rotations
Regenerative
state
Regenerative
state
Forward
Negative torque
Reverse
regeneraL7-04
tive torque
limit
* A setting value of 100% is equal to the motor rated torque.
Hardware Protection: L8
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (no overheating
protection)
1: Enabled (overheating
protection)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
4ADH
6-64
Overheat
L8-02 pre-alarm
level
Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat
detection pre-alarm in &deg;C.
The pre-alarm detects when
the cooling fin temperature
reaches the set value.
50 to
130
95 &deg;C*
No
A
A
A
4AEH
6-65
Operation
selection
L8-03 after overheat prealarm
Sets the operation for when
the Inverter overheat prealarm occurs.
0: Decelerate to stop using
the deceleration time C102.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time
C1-09.
3: Continue operation
(Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault
will be given in setting 3.
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
4AFH
6-65
Constant
Number
Name
Protect
selection for
L8-01 internal DB
resistor
(Type ERF)
5-53
Constant
Number
Name
Input openphase proL8-05
tection
selection
Output
open-phase
L8-07
protection
selection
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Detects power
supply open-phase, power
supply voltage imbalance
or DC bus electrostatic
capacitor deterioration.)
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
4B1H
6-65
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Output openphase detected at less than
5% of Inverter rated
current.)
0 or 1
When the applied motor
capacity is small compared to
the Inverter capacity, the
detection may not work properly and should be disabled.
0
No
A
A
A
4B3H
6-65
0:Disabled
Ground pro- 1:Enabled
L8-09 tection
It is not recommended to use
selection
another setting than factory
setting.
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
4B5H
6-65
Set the ON/OFF control for
the cooling fan.
Cooling fan
0: ON only when Inverter is
L8-10 control
ON
selection
1: ON whenever power is
ON
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
4B6H
6-65
Set the time in seconds to
Cooling fan
delay turning OFF the coolL8-11 control delay
ing fan after the inverter
time
STOP command is given.
0 to 300
60 s
No
A
A
A
4B7H
6-65
No
A
A
A
4B8H
6-65
L8-12
Ambient
Set the ambient temperature. 45 to 60 45 &deg;C
temperature
0: OL2 characteristics at low
speeds disabled.
OL2 charac1: OL2 characteristics at
teristics
L8-15
low speeds enabled.
selection at
It is not be commonded to
low speeds
use another setting than factory setting.
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
4BBH
6-65
0: Disable (gain = 0)
1: Enable
It is not recommended to use
another setting than factory
setting.
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
4BFH
6-65
L8-18
Soft CLA
selection
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
5-54
User Constant Tables
N: Special Adjustments
Hunting Prevention Function: N1
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Hunting-pre- 0: Hunting-prevention
function disabled
vention
N1-01
function
1: Hunting-prevention
selection
function enabled
N1-02
Hunting-pre- Sets the hunting-prevention
vention gain gain multiplication factor.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
V/f with Open
Loop Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
No
580H
6-42
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
No
A
A
No
581H
4-14
6-42
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1.00
No
No
No
A
584H
4-14
6-43
Automatic Frequency Regulator: N2
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain.
Normally, there is no need to
change this setting.
If necessary, adjust this conSpeed feedstant as follows:
back detec0.00 to
N2-01
• If hunting occurs, increase
tion control
10.00
the set value.
(AFR) gain
• If response is low, decrease
the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a
time, while checking the
response.
Speed feedback detecN2-02 tion control
(AFR) time
constant
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Set the time constant to
decide the rate of change in
the speed feedback detection
control.
0 to
2000
50 ms
No
No
No
A
585H
6-43
Speed feedback detec- Set the time constant to
N2-03 tion control decide the amount of change
(AFR) time in the speed.
constant 2
0 to
2000
750 ms
No
No
No
A
586H
6-43
5-55
High-slip Braking: N3
Constant
Number
Name
High-slip
braking
N3-01 deceleration
frequency
width
Description
Setting
Range
Sets the frequency width for
deceleration during high-slip
braking in percent, taking the 1 to 20
maximum frequency (E1-04)
as 100%.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
5%
No
A
A
No
588H
Sets the current limit for
deceleration during high-slip
High-slip
braking in percent, taking the
N3-02 braking curmotor rated current as 100%.
rent limit
The resulting limit must be
150% of the Inverter rated
current or less.
100 to
200
150%
No
A
A
No
589H
Sets the dwell time for the
output frequency for FMIN
High-slip
(1.5 Hz) during V/f control.
N3-03 braking stop
Effective only during deceldwell time
eration with high-slip braking.
0.0 to
10.0
1.0 s
No
A
A
No
58AH
30 to
1200
40 s
No
A
A
No
58BH
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
High-slip
N3-04 braking OL
time
Set the OL time when the
output frequency does not
change for any reason during
deceleration with high-slip
braking.
6-126
6-126
6-126
6-126
Digital Operator Constants: o
Monitor Select: o1
Constant
Number
5-56
Name
Description
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
BUS
Page
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Monitor
o1-01
selection
Set the number of the 3rd.
monitor item to be displayed
4 to 33
in the Drive Mode. (U1-)
(Not on LCD operator.)
6
Yes
A
A
A
500H
6-127
Monitor
selection
o1-02
after power
up
Sets the monitor item to be
displayed when the power is
turned on.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for
o1-01
1
Yes
A
A
A
501H
6-127
1 to 4
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Sets the units that will be set
and displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum
output frequency is
100%)
2 to 39:
rpm units (Set the motor
poles.)
Frequency
units of ref- 40 to 39999:
User desired display
o1-03 erence setSet the desired values for
ting and
setting and display for the
monitor
max. output frequency.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
39999
0
No
A
A
A
502H
6-127
0 to 5
3
Yes
A
A
A
509H
–
Sets the value that is
to be displayed at
100% excluding the
decimal point.
Sets the number of
decimal places.
Example: When the max.
output frequency value is
200.0, set 12000
Sets the brightness on the
optional LCD operator
(JVOP-160).
1: light
o1-05 LCD-Focus
2:
3: normal
4:
5: dark
5-57
Multi-function Selections: o2
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
LOCAL/
REMOTE
o2-01
key enable/
disable
Sets the Digital Operator
Local/Remote key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches
between the Digital
Operator and the constant
settings b1-01, b1-02.)
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
505H
6-127
STOP key
during cono2-02 trol circuit
terminal
operation
Sets the Stop key in the run
mode.
0: Disabled (When the run
command is issued from
an external terminal, the
Stop key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even
during run.)
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
506H
6-127
User cono2-03 stant initial
value
Clears or stores user initial
values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records
the set constants as user
initial values.)
2: All clear (Clears all
recorded user initial
values)
When the set constants are
recorded as user initial values, 1110 will be set in A103.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
507H
6-127
Do not set unless using a control board from an Inverter
with a different capacity.
0 to FF
(Refer to page 5-69 for the
setting values).
0
No
A
A
A
508H
-
When the frequency reference is set on the Digital
Operator frequency reference monitor, sets whether
the Enter key is necessary or
not.
0: Enter key needed
1: Enter key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter
accepts the frequency reference without Enter key operation.
0
No
A
A
A
509H
6-127
o2-04
Name
kVA selection
Frequency
reference
o2-05 setting
method
selection
5-58
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Constant
Number
0 or 1
User Constant Tables
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the operation when the
Digital Operator is disconnected.
0: Disabled (Operation
Operation
continues even if the
selection
Digital Operator is
o2-06 when digital
disconnected.)
operator is
1: Enabled (OPR is detected
disconnected
at Digital Operator
disconnection. Inverter
output is switched off, and
fault contact is operated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
50AH
6-127
Sets the cumulative operation
Cumulative
time in hour units.
o2-07 operation
Operation time is calculated
time setting
from the set values.
0 to
65535
0 hr
No
A
A
A
50BH
6-127
0: Cumulative time when the
Inverter power is on. (All
time while the Inverter
power is on is
accumulated.)
1: Cumulative Inverter run
time. (Only Inverter
output time is
accumulated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
50CH
6-127
1: US
2: Europe
1 or 2
2
No
A
A
A
50DH
6-127
Set the initial value of the fan
Fan operaoperation time.
o2-10 tion time setThe operation time accumuting
lates from the set value.
0 to
65535
0 hr
No
A
A
A
50EH
6-127
0: Disable
1: Initialize (= zero clear)
after setting ”1“ o2-12 will be
returned to ”0“
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
511H
6-127
Constant
Number
Name
Cumulative
operation
o2-08
time selection
o2-09
Initialize
Mode
Fault trace
o2-12
initialize
Description
Copy Function: o3
User constants for the copy function are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
BUS
Page
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Copy funco3-01 tion selection
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to
Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to
Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0 to 3
0
No
A
A
A
515H
6-130
Read pero3-02 mission
selection
0: READ prohibited
1: READ permitted
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
516H
6-130
Constant
Number
Name
Description
5-59
T: Motor Autotuning
Constant
Number
T1-00
Name
Motor 1/2
selection
Description
Sets the location where the
autotuned motor constants
are to be stored.
1: E1 to E2 (motor 1)
2: E3 to E4 (motor 2)
Sets the autotuning mode.
0: Rotating autotuning
Autotuning
1: Non-rotating autotuning
T1-01 mode selec2: Non-rotating autotuning
tion
for line-to-line resistance
only
T1-02
*
*
*
*
*
5-60
Motor output power
Sets the output power of the
motor in kilowatts.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f
Page
BUS
Open
V/f with Loop
Register
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1 or 2
1
No
No
No
A
700H
4-10
0 to 2 *1
0
No
A
A
A
701H
4-9
4-10
0.40
kW
No
A
A
A
702H
4-10
0.00 to
650.00
*2
T1-03
Motor rated Sets the rated voltage of the
voltage
motor in volts.
0 to
200.0 V
*3
255.0*3
No
No
No
A
703H
4-10
T1-04
Motor rated Sets the rated current of the
current
motor in Amps.
0.32 to
6.40 *4
No
A
A
A
704H
4-10
T1-05
Motor base
frequency
No
No
No
A
705H
4-10
T1-06
Number of Sets the number of motor
motor poles poles.
2 to 48
4 poles
poles
No
No
No
A
706H
4-10
T1-07
Motor base
speed
0 to
24000
No
No
No
A
707H
4-10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.90 A
*2
0 to
Sets the base frequency of the
50.0 Hz
motor in Hertz.
400.0*5
Sets the base speed of the
motor in r/min.
1450
r/min
Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. For V/f control or V/f control with PG a set value 2 is possible only.
The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
The upper setting limit will be 150.0 Hz when C6-01 is set to 0.
User Constant Tables
U: Monitor Constants
Status Monitor Constants: U1
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level DurMin.
ing Multi-Function Analog
Unit
Output
Control Methods
MEMOV/f Open
BUS
V/f with Loop
Register
PG Vector
U1-01
Frequency
reference
Monitors/sets the frequency 10 V: Max. frequency
reference value.*
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
40H
U1-02
Output frequency
Monitors the output frequency.*
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
41H
0.1 A
A
A
A
42H
-
A
A
A
43H
0.01
Hz
No
A
A
44H
0.1 V
A
A
A
45H
1V
A
A
A
46H
0.1
kW
A
A
A
47H
0.1%
No
No
A
48H
Output curU1-03
rent
U1-04
Control
method
U1-05 Motor speed
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
10 V: Inverter rated output
current
Monitors the output current.
(0 to +10 V, absolute value
output)
Checks the current control
method.
(Cannot be output.)
10 V: Max. frequency
Monitors the detected motor
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
speed.*
U1-06
Output volt- Monitors the output voltage 10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
age
reference value.
(0 to +10 V output)
U1-07
DC bus volt- Monitors the main DC bus
age
voltage.
Output
U1-08
power
U1-09
Torque reference
Monitors the output power
(internally detected value).
10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
(0 to +10 V output)
10 V: Inverter capacity
(max. applicable motor
capacity)
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
Monitors the internal torque
10 V: Motor rated torque
reference value for open
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
vector control.
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).
5-61
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level DurMin.
ing Multi-Function Analog
Unit
Output
Control Methods
MEMOV/f Open
BUS
V/f with Loop
Register
PG Vector
Shows input ON/OFF status.
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON
1: REV command
(S2) is ON
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON
U1-10
Input terminal status
1: Multi input 2
(S4) is ON
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
49H
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
4AH
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
4BH
Cumulative
U1-13 operation
time
Monitors the total operating
time of the Inverter.
The initial value and the
(Cannot be output.)
operating time/power ON
time selection can be set in
o2-07 and o2-08.
1
hr
A
A
A
4CH
Software
U1-14 No. (flash
memory)
(Manufacturer’s ID number) (Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
4DH
0.1%
A
A
A
4EH
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON
Shows output ON/OFF status.
1: Multi-function
contact output 1
(M1-M2) is ON
U1-11
Output terminal status
1: Multi-function
contact output 2
(M3-M4) is ON
1: Multi-function
contact output 3
(M5-M6) is ON
Not used
(Always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/MB-MC) is
ON
Inverter operating status.
Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
Operation
U1-12
status
1: Reset signal
input
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter ready
1: Minor fault
1: Major fault
Monitors the input level of
Terminal A1 analog input A1. A value of 10 V: 100%
U1-15
input level 100% corresponds to 10V
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
input.
5-62
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level DurMin.
ing Multi-Function Analog
Unit
Output
Monitors the input level of
Terminal A2 analog input A2. A value of 10 V/20mA: 100%
U1-16
input level 100% corresponds to 10V/ (0 to &plusmn;10 V possible)
20mA input.
Motor secU1-18 ondary current (Iq)
Monitors the calculated
value of the motor second10 V:Motor rated current)
ary current.
(0 to &plusmn;10 V output)
The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the calculated
value of the motor excitation
Motor excitcurrent.
10 V:Motor rated current)
U1-19 ing current
The motor rated current cor- (0 to &plusmn;10 V output)
(Id)
responds to 100%.
Control Methods
MEMOV/f Open
BUS
V/f with Loop
Register
PG Vector
0.1%
A
A
A
4FH
0.1%
A
A
A
51H
0.1%
No
No
A
52H
Output frequency after
U1-20
soft-starter
(SFS output)
Monitors the frequency reference after the soft starter.
This frequency value does 10 V: Max. frequency
not include compensations, (0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
such as slip compensation.
The unit is set in o1-03.
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
53H
U1-21 ASR input
Monitors the input to the
speed control loop.
The maximum frequency
corresponds to 100%.
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
0.01
%
No
A
No
54H
Monitors the output from the
10 V:Max. frequency
speed control loop.
U1-22 ASR output
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
The maximum frequency
corresponds to 100%.
0.01
%
No
A
No
55H
0.01
%
A
A
A
57H
Monitors the Inverter interOutput voltnal voltage reference for
U1-26 age refermotor secondary current
ence (Vq)
control.
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
0.1 V
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
No
No
A
59H
Monitors the Inverter interOutput voltnal voltage reference for
U1-27 age refermotor excitation current
ence (Vd)
control.
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
0.1 V
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
No
No
A
5AH
(Manufacturer’s CPU software No.)
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
5BH
For testing LEDs on operator. If this monitor is
selected, all LED’s light up
(only on LED operator).
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
3CH
U1-24
U1-28
PID feedback value
Software
No. (CPU)
U1-31 LED Test
Monitors the feedback value 10 V: 100% feedback value
when PID control is used.
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
U1-32
Monitors the current control
ACR output
10 V: 100%
output value for the motor
of q axis
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
secondary current.
0.1
%
No
No
A
5FH
U1-33
Monitors the current control
10 V: 100%
ACR output
output value for the motor
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
of d axis
excitation current.
0.1
%
No
No
A
60H
U1-34
OPE fault
constant
-
A
A
A
61H
Shows the first constant
number when an OPE fault
is detected.
(Cannot be output.)
5-63
Output Signal Level DurMin.
ing Multi-Function Analog
Unit
Output
Control Methods
MEMOV/f Open
BUS
V/f with Loop
Register
PG Vector
Constant
Number
Name
U1-36
PID input
volume
PID input volume
10 V: 100% PID input
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
0.01
%
A
A
A
63H
U1-37
PID output
volume
PID control output
10 V: 100% PID output
(0 to &plusmn; 10 V possible)
0.01
%
A
A
A
64H
0.01
%
A
A
A
65H
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
66H
Monitors the total operating
Cooling fan
time of the cooling fan. The
U1-40 operating
(Cannot be output.)
time can be set in
time
02-10.
1
hr
A
A
A
68H
Description
U1-38 PID setpoint PID setpoint
10 V: 100% PID setpoint
Shows MEMOBUS errors.
MEMOBUS
communicaU1-39
tions error
code
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used
(always 0)
1: Parity error
1: Overrun error
1: Framing error
1: Timeout
Not used
(always 0)
5-64
User Constant Tables
Fault Trace: U2
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
U2-01 Current fault The content of the current fault.
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
MEMOV/f Open
BUS
V/f with Loop
Register
PG Vector
-
A
A
A
80H
-
A
A
A
81H
Reference
The reference frequency when
U2-03 frequency at
the last fault occurred.
fault
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
82H
Output freU2-04 quency at
fault
The output frequency when the
last fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
83H
The output current when the last
fault occurred.
0.1 A
A
A
A
84H
0.01
Hz
No
A
A
85H
0.1 V
A
A
A
86H
1V
A
A
A
87H
U2-02 Last fault
The error content of the last
fault.
U2-05
Output current at fault
U2-06
Motor speed The motor speed when the last
at fault
fault occurred.
Output voltThe output reference voltage
U2-07 age referwhen the last fault occurred.
ence at fault
U2-08
DC bus volt- The main current DC voltage
age at fault when the last fault occurred.
(Cannot be output.)
Output
U2-09 power at
fault
The output power when the last
fault occurred.
0.1
kW
A
A
A
88H
Torque refU2-10 erence at
fault
The reference torque when the
last fault occurred. The motor
rated torque corresponds to
100%.
0.1%
No
No
A
89H
The input terminal status when
Input termithe last fault occurred.
U2-11 nal status at
The format is the same as for
fault
U1-10.
-
A
A
A
8AH
Output ter- The output terminal status when
U2-12 minal status the last fault occurred. The forat fault
mat is the same as for U1-11.
-
A
A
A
8BH
Operation
U2-13 status at
fault
The operating status when the
last fault occurred. The format is
the same as for U1-12.
-
A
A
A
8CH
Cumulative
The operating time when the last
U2-14 operation
fault occurred.
time at fault
1
hr
A
A
A
8DH
Note The following errors are not included in the error trace: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
5-65
Fault History: U3
Constant
Number
Name
U3-01 Last fault
Description
Output Signal Level DurMin.
ing Multi-Function Analog
Unit
Output
The error content of 1st last
fault.
-
A
A
A
90H
U3-02
Second last
fault
The error content of 2nd last
fault.
-
A
A
A
91H
U3-03
Third last
fault
The error content of 3rd last
fault.
-
A
A
A
92H
U3-04
Fourth last
fault
The error content of 4th last
fault.
-
A
A
A
93H
Cumulative The total operating time
U3-05 operation
when the 1st previous fault
time at fault occurred.
1
hr
A
A
A
94H
AccumuThe total operating time
U3-06 lated time of when the 2nd previous fault
second fault occurred.
1
hr
A
A
A
95H
AccumuThe total operating time
U3-07 lated time of when the 3rd previous fault
(Cannot be output.)
third fault
occurred.
1
hr
A
A
A
96H
AccumuThe total operating time
lated time of
U3-08
when the 4th previous fault
fourth/oldoccurred.
est fault
1
hr
A
A
A
97H
A
804
805H
806H
807H
808H
809H
A
806H
80FH
810H
811H
812H
813H
U3-09 Fifth last to
–
tenth last
U3-14 fault
The error content of the 5th
to 10th last fault
AccumuU3-15
Total generating time when
lated time of
–
5th ... 10th pevious fault
fifth to tenth
U3-20
occured
fault
Note The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
5-66
Control Methods
MEMOV/f Open
BUS
V/f with Loop
Register
PG Vector
–
1hr
A
A
A
A
User Constant Tables
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
Factory Setting
Constant
Number
Name
3
Open
Loop
Vector
A1-02=2
2
120
-
100
0.0
-
1.0
V/f Con- V/F with
trol
PG
A1-02=0 A1-02=1
Setting Range
Unit
0 to 3
1
2
b3-02 Speed search operating current
0 to 200
1%
C3-01 Slip compensation gain
0.0 to 2.5
0.1
b3-01 Speed search selection
C3-02
Slip compensation primary delay time constant
0 to 10000
1 ms
2000
-
200
C4-02
Torque compensation primary delay time
constant
0 to 10000
1 ms
200
200
20
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 Hz
2.5
2.5
*1
*1
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.1 V
15.0
15.0
*1
*1
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 Hz
1.2
1.2
*1
*1
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.1 V
9.0
9.0
*1
*1
E1-07
Mid. output frequency (FB)
E3-05
E1-08
*2
E3-06 Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)
E1-09
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
E3-07
E1-10
*2
E3-08 Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
3.0
13.2
0.5
2.4
* 1. Settings vary as shown in the following tables depending on the Inverter capacity and E1-03.
* 2. The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
5-67
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 1.5 kW
Constant
Number
Factory Setting
Unit
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0
180.0
60.0
50.0
E1-05
*
V
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
E1-07
*
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
E1-08
*
V
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
19.0
24.0
19.0
24.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
13.2
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
E1-10
*
V
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
11.0
13.0
11.0
15.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
2.4
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2.2 to 45 kW
Constant
Number
Factory Setting
Unit
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0
180.0
60.0
50.0
E1-05
*
V
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
E1-07
*
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
E1-08
*
V
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
18.0
23.0
18.0
23.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
13.2
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
E1-10
*
V
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
6.0
7.0
6.0
7.0
9.0
11.0
9.0
13.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
2.4
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW
Constant
Number
Factory Setting
Unit
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0
180.0
60.0
50.0
E1-05
*
V
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
E1-07
*
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
E1-08
*
V
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
15.0
20.0
15.0
20.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
13.2
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
E1-10
*
V
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
6.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
9.0
7.0
11.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
2.4
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
5-68
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
User Constant Tables
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
200 V Class Inverters
Constant
Number
o2-04
b8-03
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
Energy-saving filter time
constant
kW
-
Factory Setting
0.4
0
0.75
1
s
1.5
2
2.2
3
3.7
4
5.5
5
7.5
6
11
7
15
8
0.50 (Open loop vector control only)
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
288.20
223.70
169.40
156.80
122.90
94.75
72.69
70.44
63.13
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection*
-
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
E2-01
Motor rated current
(E4-01)
A
1.90
3.30
6.20
8.50
14.00
19.60
26.60
39.7
53.0
E2-02
Motor rated slip
(E4-02)
Hz
2.90
2.50
2.60
2.90
2.73
1.50
1.30
1.70
1.60
E2-03
Motor no-load current
(E4-03)
A
1.20
1.80
2.80
3.00
4.50
5.10
8.00
11.2
15.2
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resis(E4-05) tance
Ω
9.842
5.156
1.997
1.601
0.771
0.399
0.288
0.230
0.138
E2-06
Motor leak inductance
(E4-06)
%
18.2
13.8
18.5
18.4
19.6
18.2
15.5
19.5
17.2
E2-10
Motor iron loss for
torque compensation
W
14
26
53
77
112
172
262
245
272
L2-02
Momentary power loss
ridethru time
s
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB)
time
s
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
&deg;C
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
Note: Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1, or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10
kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more, the Inverter
rated current will need to be reduced.
5-69
Constant
Number
o2-04
b8-03
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
Energy-saving filter time
constant
kW
s
Factory Setting
18.5
9
22
A
30
B
37
C
45
D
0.50 (Open loop vector control only)
55
E
75
F
90
10
110
11
2.00
(Open loop vector control only)
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
57.87
51.79
46.27
38.16
35.78
31.35
23.10
23.10
23.10
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection*
-
6
6
4
3
3
3
3
3
1
E2-01
Motor rated current
(E4-01)
A
65.8
77.2
105.0
131.0
160.0
190.0
260.0
260.0
260.0
E2-02
Motor rated slip
(E4-02)
Hz
1.67
1.70
1.80
1.33
1.60
1.43
1.39
1.39
1.39
E2-03
Motor no-load current
(E4-03)
A
15.7
18.5
21.9
38.2
44.0
45.6
72.0
72.0
72.0
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resis(E4-05) tance
Ω
0.101
0.079
0.064
0.039
0.030
0.022
0.023
0.023
0.023
E2-06
Motor leak inductance
(E4-06)
%
20.1
19.5
20.8
18.8
20.2
20.5
20.0
20.0
20.0
E2-10
Motor iron loss for
torque compensation
W
505
538
699
823
852
960
1200
1200
1200
L2-02
Momentary power loss
ridethru time
s
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB)
time
s
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.7
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
&deg;C
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
Note: Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1, or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10
kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more, the Inverter
rated current will need to be reduced.
5-70
User Constant Tables
400 V Class Inverters
Constant
Number
o2-04
b8-03
b8-04
C6-02
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
E2-10
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L8-02
Constant
Number
o2-04
b8-03
b8-04
C6-02
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
E2-10
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L8-02
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
Energy-saving filter time
constant
Energy-saving coefficient
Carrier frequency selection *
kW
-
Factory Setting
0.4
20
0.75
21
1.5
22
s
2.2
23
3.7
24
4.0
25
5.5
26
7.5
27
11
28
15
29
0.50 (Open loop vector control only)
-
576.40
447.40
338.80
313.60
245.80
236.44
189.50
145.38
140.88
126.26
-
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Motor rated current
A
1.00
1.60
3.10
4.20
7.00
7.00
9.80
13.30
19.9
26.5
Motor rated slip
Hz
2.90
2.60
2.50
3.00
2.70
2.70
1.50
1.30
1.70
1.60
Motor no-load current
A
0.60
0.80
1.40
1.50
2.30
2.30
2.60
4.00
5.6
7.6
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
38.198
22.459
10.100
6.495
3.333
3.333
1.595
1.152
0.922
0.550
Motor leak inductance
%
18.2
14.3
18.3
18.7
19.3
19.3
18.2
15.5
19.6
17.2
W
14
26
53
77
130
130
193
263
385
440
s
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.8
0.8
1.0
2.0
Motor iron loss for
torque compensation
Momentary power loss
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
time
Voltage recovery time
Overheat pre-alarm level
s
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
s
&deg;C
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
Energy-saving filter time
constant
Energy-saving coefficient
Carrier frequency selection *
kW
-
75
30
90
31
110
32
132
33
Factory Setting
18.5
2A
22
2B
30
2C
37
2D
45
2E
55
2F
s
0.50 (Open loop vector control only) 2.00 (Open loop vector control only)
-
115.74
103.58
92.54
76.32
71.56
67.20
46.20
41.22
36.23
33.18
-
6
6
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
Motor rated current
A
32.9
38.6
52.3
65.6
79.7
95.0
130.0
156.0
190.0
223.0
Motor rated slip
Hz
1.67
1.70
1.80
1.33
1.60
1.46
1.39
1.40
1.40
1.38
Motor no-load current
A
7.8
9.2
10.9
19.1
22.0
24.0
36.0
40.0
49.0
58.0
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
0.403
0.316
0.269
0.155
0.122
0.088
0.092
0.056
0.046
0.035
Motor leak inductance
%
20.1
23.5
20.7
18.8
19.9
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
W
508
586
750
925
1125
1260
1600
1760
2150
2350
s
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
s
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.7
s
&deg;C
0.6
95
0.6
95
0.6
95
0.6
95
0.6
95
1.0
100
1.0
95
1.0
110
1.0
110
1.0
110
Motor iron loss for
torque compensation
Momentary power loss
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
time
Voltage recovery time
Overheat pre-alarm level
5-71
Constant
Number
o2-04
b8-03
Name
Unit
Factory Setting
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
Energy-saving filter time
constant
kW
-
160 185 220 300
34
35
36
37
2.00 (Open loop vector
control only)
s
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
30.13
30.57
27.13
21.76
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection *
-
2
2
1
1
E2-01
Motor rated current
(E4-01)
A
270.0
310.0
370.0
500.0
E2-02
Motor rated slip
(E4-02)
Hz
1.35
1.30
1.30
1.25
E2-03
Motor no-load current
(E4-03)
A
70.0
81.0
96.0
130.0
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resis(E4-05) tance
Ω
0.029
0.025
0.020
0.014
E2-06
Motor leak inductance
(E4-06)
%
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
E2-10
Motor iron loss for
torque compensation
W
2850
3200
3700
4700
L2-02
Momentary power loss
ridethru time
s
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB)
time
s
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
&deg;C
100
95
95
95
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1, or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4:
10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more, the Inverter
rated current will need to be reduced.
5-72
6
Constant Settings by
Function
Application and Overload Selections ...........................6-2
Frequency Reference ..................................................6-6
Run Command........................................................... 6-11
Stopping Methods......................................................6-13
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ..........6-18
Adjusting Frequency References...............................6-25
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ..6-30
Frequency Detection..................................................6-32
Improved Operating Efficiency...................................6-35
Machine Protection ....................................................6-44
Automatically Restart.................................................6-56
Inverter Protection .....................................................6-64
Input Terminal Functions............................................6-69
Output Terminal Functions......................................... 6-80
Monitor Constants......................................................6-83
Individual Functions ...................................................6-86
Digital Operator Functions ....................................... 6-127
Options ....................................................................6-136
Application and Overload Selections
Select the Overload to Suit the Application
Set C6-01 (Heavy Duty: Low carrier, constant torque, Normal Duty: High carrier, variable torque) depending
on the application for which the Inverter is used. The setting ranges for the Inverter carrier frequency, overload
tolerance, and maximum output frequency depend on the setting of C6-01. For applications like fans and
blowers (quadratic torque characteristic) set C6-01 to 1 (Normal Duty). For applications with a constant
torque characteristic set C6-01 to 0 (Heavy Duty).
Related Constants
No.
Constant
No.
Name
C6-01
Heavy/Normal Duty selection
C6-02
Selects the carrier frequency.
Carrier frequency selection Select F to enable detailed settings using constants
C6-03 to C6-05.
C6-03
Carrier frequency upper
limit
Details
0: Heavy Duty (low carrier, constant torque,
150% current overload for 1 min.)
1: Normal Duty (high carrier, variable torque,
120% current overload for 1 min.)
Sets the upper and lower carrier frequency limits
in kHz.
Set the carrier wave gain as shown below.
In vector control method, the carrier frequency is
fixed according to C6-03 (Carrier Frequency
Upper Limit).
Control Methods
V/f
Open
with
Loop
V/f
PG
vector
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Changes
During
Operation?
0 or 1
1
No
Q
Q
Q
0 to F
6*2
No
Q
Q
Q
15.0 kHz
*1
No
A
A
A
15.0 kHz
No
A
A
No
No
A
A
No
2.0 to
15.0
*3 *4
Carrier frequency
C6-04
Carrier frequency lower
limit
Output frequency x
(C6-05) x K
Output frequency
0.4 to
15.0
*3 *4
*2
(Maximum output frequency)
C6-05
*
*
*
*
6-2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carrier frequency
proportional gain
K is the coefficient determined by the set
value in C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz &gt; C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz : K = 2
5.0 kHz &gt; C6-03: K = 1
00 to 99
*4
00
On 200V class inverters with 110 kW and 400V class inverters with 220 kW and 300 kW the setting is fixed to 1. It cannot be changed to 0.
The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
The setting ranges depend on the Inverter capacity.
Can be set and referenced only when C6-01 is set to 1, and C6-02 is set to F.
Application and Overload Selections
Difference Between Heavy Duty and Normal Duty
The characteristics of Heavy Duty (low carrier, constant torque) and Normal Duty (high carrier, variable
torque) are shown below.
Heavy Duty: Low Carrier, Constant Torque
Normal Duty: High Carrier, Variable Torque
Variable Torque
Constant Torque
Torque
Torque
Motor speed
Motor speed
Constant torque means a constant load torque for all
motor speed. Typical applications are pushers, conveyors, cranes, and other high friction or heavy loads. These
applications may require overload capability.
Variable torque means that the load torque will decrease
as the speed decreases. Typical applications are fans and
pumps. Normally not much overload capability is
required.
Low carrier: High audible noise is present.
High carrier: Almost no audible noise.
Setting Precautions
C6-01 (Heavy/Normal Duty Selection)
When setting C6-01, observe the following precautions.
• Depending on the set value in C6-01, the setting range of the related constants is limited as follows:
C6-01 Set Value
Inverter Overload Protection Level
C6-02 (Carrier Frequency Selection)
0 (Low Carrier, Constant
Torque) *1
1 (High Carrier, Variable
Torque)
150% Inverter rated current/1
min.
120% Inverter rated current/1
min.
0: Low carrier, low noise
1: Carrier 2 kHz
0: Low carrier low noise
1: Carrier 2 kHz
2: Carrier 5 kHz
3: Carrier 8.0 kHz
4: Carrier 10.0 kHz
5: Carrier 12.5 kHz
6: Carrier 15 kHz
F: User-set*2
E1-04 and E3-02 (Max. Output Frequency)
150 Hz
400 Hz
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level During
Acceleration)
150%
120%
L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level During
Operation)
150%
120%
* 1. C6-01 can not be set to 0 at 200V class inverters with 110 kW and 400V class inverters with 220 kW and 300 kW.
* 2. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity.
• When C6-01 is set to 0 for E1-04 or E3-02 no value higher than 150 Hz will be accepted.
6-3
Carrier Frequency
When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions:
• When using a device with C6-01 set to 1 (Normal Duty), adjust the carrier frequency according to the
cases shown below.
If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following
values as guidelines.
Wiring Length
50 m or less
100 m or less
Over 100 m
C6-02 (carrier frequency)
setting
0 to 6 (15 kHz)
0 to 4 (10 kHz)
0 to 2 (5 kHz)
If speed and torque vary at low speeds: Set the carrier frequency low.
If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices: Set the carrier frequency low.
If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Set the carrier frequency low.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Set the carrier frequency high.
• When using V/f control or V/f control with PG, you can vary the carrier frequency to match the output fre-
quency, as shown in the following diagram, by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04
(Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).
Carrier
C6-03
C6-04
Output frequency x C6-05
x K*
Output frequency
E1-04
Max. Output Frequency
Fig 6.1
*K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K=3
10.0 kHz &gt; C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K=2
5.0 kHz &gt; C6-03: K=1
• With vector control, the carrier frequency is fixed by the Carrier Frequency Upper Limit in C6-03 if
user-set, or by the carrier frequency set in C6-02.
• To fix the carrier frequency, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value, or set C6-05 to 0.
• If the settings are as shown below, OPE11 (Data setting error) will occur.
If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) &gt; 6 and C6-03 &lt; C6-04.
If C6-01 = 0 and Carrier Frequency Selection C6-02 is set from 2 to E.
If C6-01 = 1 and Carrier Frequency Selection C6-02 is set from 7 to E.
6-4
Application and Overload Selections
Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Current Level
The inverter overload capability depends among other things on the carrier frequency setting. If the carrier
frequency setting is higher than the factory setting, the overload current capability must be reduced like shown
in the tables below.
20P4
Initial carrier
frequency setting
6 (15 kHz)
Maximum carrier
frequency setting
6 (15 kHz)
20P7
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
21P5
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
22P2
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
23P7
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
25P5
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
27P5
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
2011
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
2015
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
2018
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
2022
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
2030
4 (10 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
80 %
2037
3 (8 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
2045
3 (8 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
2055
3 (8 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
2075
3 (5 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
–
2090
3 (5 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
–
2110
1 (2 kHz)
1 (2 kHz)
–
40P4
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
40P7
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
41P5
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
42P2
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
43P7
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
44P0
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
45P7
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
47P5
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
4011
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
4015
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
4018
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
4022
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
4030
4 (10 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
80 %
4037
4 (10 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
80 %
4045
4 (10 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
80 %
4055
4 (10 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
80 %
4075
3 (8 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
4090
3 (8 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
4110
3 (8 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
4132
2 (5 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
75 %
4160
2 (5 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
4185
2 (5 kHz)
–
–
4220
1 (2.5 kHz)
–
–
4300
1 (2.5 kHz)
–
–
Inverter Type
Current derating %
–
6-5
Frequency Reference
This section explains how to input the frequency reference.
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source
Set constant b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
b1-01
Reference selection
H6-01
Pulse train
input function selection
H6-02
Pulse train
input scaling
Description
Set the frequency reference source
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
Set the number of pulses that is equal to 100% of
the input item selected in H6-01.
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 4
1
No
Q
Q
Q
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
1000 to
32000
1440 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
Input the Frequency Reference from the Digital Operator
When b1-01 is set to 0, you can input the frequency reference from the Digital Operator.
For details on setting the frequency reference, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
Fig 6.2 Frequency Setting Display
6-6
Frequency Reference
Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage (Analog Setting)
When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input),
or control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input).
Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only
If inputting the master speed frequency reference only, input the voltage reference to control circuit terminal
A1.
Inverter
2 kΩ
+V (Power supply: 15 V, 20 mA)
2 kΩ
A1 (Master frequency reference)
A2 (Auxiliary frequency reference)
AC (Analog common)
Fig 6.3 Master Speed Frequency Reference Input
2-Step Switching: Master/Auxiliary
If performing 2-step switching between master and auxiliary speed frequencies, input the master speed frequency reference to control circuit terminal A1, and input the auxiliary speed frequency reference to A2.
When terminal S3 (multi-step speed command 1) is OFF, terminal A1 input (master speed frequency reference) will be the Inverter frequency reference, and when terminal S3 is ON, terminal A2 input (auxiliary
speed frequency reference) will be the Inverter frequency reference.
Inverter
Master/Auxil-
S3 Multi-step speed
command 1
SN Digital input neutral
2 kΩ
2 kΩ
0 to 10 V
input
2 kΩ
0 to 10 V input
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
A1 (Master frequency
reference)
A2 (Auxiliary frequency
reference)
AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.4 Master/Auxiliary Frequency Reference Input
Setting Precautions
When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2, turn OFF pin 2 on DIP switch S1 to switch to voltage input
(factory setting is ON).
6-7
Inputting Frequency Reference Using Current
When b1-01 is set to 1, the frequency reference can be input from control circuit terminal A2. Input the current
(4 to 20 mA) in control circuit terminal A2.
When H3-09 (Multi-Function analog input terminal A2 function selection) is set to 0 (factory setting) the
input on A2 is added to A1.
Inverter
+V (Power supply: 15 V, 20 mA)
4 to 20 mA input
A1 (Auxiliary frequency
reference)
A2 (Master frequency
reference)
AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.5 Frequency Reference Using Current
Setting Precautions
• When inputting a current signal to terminal A2, turn ON pin 2 on DIP switch S1 (factory setting: ON).
• If using terminal A2 to input the master speed reference and terminal A1 to input the auxiliary frequency
reference, set H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 Switching) to 1.
Setting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Signals
When b1-01 is set to 4, the pulse train input to control circuit terminal RP input is used as the frequency reference.
Set H6-01 (PulseTrain Input Function Selection) to 0 (frequency reference), and then set the reference pulse
frequency that is equal to 100% of the reference value to H6-02 (Pulse Train Input Scaling).
Inverter
Pulse Input Specifications
Low level voltage
0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage
3.5 to 13.2 V
Pulse duty factor
30 to 70%
Pulse frequency
0 to 32 kHz
32 kHz max.
3.5 to 13.2 V
(Pulse train input terminal)
Pulse input
(Analog common)
Fig 6.6 Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Input
6-8
Frequency Reference
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation
With Varispeed-F7 series Inverters, you can change the speed to a maximum of 17 steps, using 16 multi-step
frequency references, and one jog frequency reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 9-step operation using multi-step
references 1 to 3 and jog frequency selection functions.
Related Constants
To switch frequency references, set multi-step references 1 to 3 and the jog reference selection in the
multi-function contact inputs.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Terminal
Constant Number
Set Value
S4
H1-02
3
Multi-step speed command 1 (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when
multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference).)
S5
H1-03
4
Multi-step speed command 2
S6
H1-04
5
Multi-step speed command 3
S7
H1-05
6
Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed command)
Details
Combining Multi-Step Speed References and Multi-Function Contact Inputs
You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON/OFF status of S4 to S7 (multi-function
contact input terminals) . The following table shows the possible combinations.
TerminalS4
TerminalS5
TerminalS6
TerminalS7
Speed
Multi-step
Speed Command 1
Multi-step
Speed Command 2
Multi-step
Speed Command 3
Jog Frequency Selection
1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 1 d1-01, master speed frequency
2
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 2 d1-02, auxiliary frequency
3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 3 d1-03
Selected Frequency
4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 4 d1-04
5
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 5 d1-05
6
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 6 d1-06
7
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 7 d1-07
8
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 8 d1-08
-
ON*
Jog frequency d1-17
17
-
-
* Terminal S7's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed commands.
6-9
Setting Precautions
When setting analog inputs to step 1 and step 2, observe the following precautions.
• When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1 set b1-01 to 1, when setting d1-01 (Frequency Reference
1) to step 1 set b1-01 to 0.
• When setting terminal A2's analog input to step 2 set H3-09 to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference). When
setting d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to step 2 set H3-09 to 1F (do not use analog inputs).
Connection Example and Time Chart
The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step
operation.
Inverter
Forward/stop
Reverse/stop
Error reset
Multi-step command 1
Multi-step command 2
Multi-step command 3
Jog frequency
SN Digital input neutral
Fig 6.7 Control Circuit Terminal During 9-step Operation
Frequency
reference 8
Frequency
reference 7
Frequency
reference 6
Frequency
reference 5
Frequency
reference 4
Frequency
reference
Frequency reference 2: Auxiliary
speed frequency
Frequency reference 1: Master speed
frequency
Frequency
reference 3
Jog frequency
Forward/stop
Multi-step speed
command 1
Multi-step speed
command 2
Multi-step speed
command 3
Jog
frequency
selection
Fig 6.8 Multi-step speed command/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart
Note:
• The multifunction input setting “Multistep Speed Reference 4” (32) has to be used for selecting the fre-
quency references from d1-09 to d1-16.
• The multifunction input setting “Jog Frequency 2” (69) can be used for jog frequency selection when a
3-wire control is used for the control circuit. If it is selected while the inverter is initialized to 2-wire control an OPE03 error will be displayed.
6-10
Run Command
Run Command
This section explains input methods for the run command.
Selecting the Run Command Source
Set constant b1-02 to select the source for the run command.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
b1-02
Name
Operation method selection
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the run command source.
0: Digital operator
1: Control circuit terminal (digital multifunction
inputs)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Q
Q
Q
Performing Operations Using a Digital Operator
When b1-02 is set to 0, you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP, and
FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals
When b1-02 is set to 1, you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals.
Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Control
The factory setting is set to a 2-wire control. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward operation
will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when control circuit
terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter will
stop.
Forward/Stop
Inverter
Reverse/Stop
SN Digital input neutral
Fig 6.9 2-Wire Control Wiring Example with Positive Logic
6-11
Performing Operations Using 3-Wire Control
When any constant from H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7) is set to 0, terminals S1 and S2 are used for a 3-wire control, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set to 0 works
as a forward/reverse selection command terminal.
When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 becomes the input terminal for the forward/reverse run command.
Stop
switch
(NC contact)
Operation switch
(NO contact)
Run command (operates when ON)
Stop command (stopped when ON)
Forward/reverse command (multi-function input)
SN
Digital input neutral
Fig 6.10 3-Wire Control Wiring Example
50 ms min.
Run command
Can be either ON or OFF
OFF
(stopped)
Stop command
OFF (forward)
Forward/reverse command
ON (reverse)
Motor speed
Stop
Forward
Reverse
Stop
Forward
Fig 6.11 Three-wire Control Time Chart
Use a control circuit that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the run command. This will make the
run command self-holding in the Inverter.
INFO
6-12
Stopping Methods
Stopping Methods
This section explains methods of stopping the Inverter.
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input
There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a stop command is input:
• Deceleration to stop
• Coast to stop
• DC braking stop
• Coast to stop with timer
Set constant b1-03 to select the Inverter stopping method.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
0
No
Q
Q
Q
b1-03
Stopping method selection
Select stopping method when stop command is
given.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than coast to
stop, without regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run commands are
ignored during deceleration time.)
b2-01
Zero speed level (DC
injection braking starting
frequency)
Set the frequency at which the DC injection braking starts in units of Hz when b1-03 is set to 0
(deceleration to stop).
DC injection braking starts from E1-09 when
b2-01 &lt; E1-09.
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
No
A
A
A
b2-02
DC injection braking current
Set the DC injection braking current as a percentage, taking the Inverter rated current as 100%.
0 to
100
50%
No
A
A
A
b2-04
DC injection braking time
at stop
Set the DC injection braking time at stop.
Use when stopping if rotations continue due to the
machines inertia.
Set to 0.00 to disable DC injection braking time at
stop.
0.00
to
10.00
0.50 s
No
A
A
A
6-13
Deceleration to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor decelerates to stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration Time
1))
If the output frequency when decelerating to stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied
using the DC current set in b2-02 for the time set in b2-04.
For deceleration time settings, refer to page 6-19 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times.
Run command
Output frequency
Decelerates to stop
deceleration time
DC injection brake
DC injection brake
time when
stopping (b2-04)
Fig 6.12 Deceleration to Stop
Coast to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the Inverter output
voltage is switched off. The motor coasts to stop.
Run command
ON
OFF
Output frequency
Inverter output frequency interrupted
Fig 6.13 Coast to Stop
After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) has
elapsed.
INFO
6-14
Stopping Methods
DC Braking Stop
After the stop command is input and the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) has elapsed, DC injection will be
applied to the motor. The applied DC injection current is programmed in parameter b2-02. The DC injection
brake time depends on the set value of b2-04 and on the output frequency at the moment the stop command is
input.
DC injection brake time
Run command
OFF
ON
Output frequency
b2-04 x 10
Inverter output voltage interrupted
DC injection brake
Minimum baseblock
time (L2-03)
DC injection brake time
b2-04
Output frequency at
stop command input
10%
100% (maximum output frequency
Fig 6.14 DC Injection Braking Stop
Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping.
INFO
Coast to Stop with Timer
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter output
is switched off so that the motor coasts to stop. After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored
until the time T has elapsed. The time T depends on the output frequency when the stop command is input and
on the deceleration time.
Operation wait time T
Run command
Deceleration time
(e.g., C1-02)
Output frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
Operation wait time T
Minimum baseblock
time (L2-03)
Minimum output frequency
Output frequency at
stop command input
100% (Maximum output frequency)
Fig 6.15 Coast to Stop with Timer
6-15
Using the DC Injection Brake
Set constant b2-03 to apply DC injection to the motor, before it starts to accelerate. Applying DC injection at
start will stop the motor before starting if it was coasting through inertia or wind mill effect.
Set b2-03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start.
Set constant b2-04 to apply a DC injection brake to the motor at stopping. It prevents the motor from coasting
when it would not be stopped completely using the normal deceleration. This can occur if the inertia is very
high. The DC injection brake can be disabled by setting b2-04 to 0.
Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
b2-01
Zero speed level (DC
injection braking starting
frequency)
Used to set the frequency at which DC injection
braking starts in units of Hz when b1-03 is set to 0
(deceleration to stop).
When b2-01 is less than E1-09, E1-09 becomes
the DC injection braking starting frequency.
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
No
A
A
A
b2-02
DC injection braking current
Set the DC Injection Braking Current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
0 to
100
50%
No
A
A
A
b2-03
DC injection braking time
at start
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at start.
Used to stop coasting motor and restart it. When
the set value is 0, DC injection braking at start is
not performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s
No
A
A
A
b2-04
DC injection braking time
at stop
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at stop in units of 1 second. Used to prevent
coasting after the stop command is input. When
the set value is 0.00, DC injection braking at stop
is not performed.
0.00 to
10.0
0.50 s
No
A
A
A
Constant
Number
Name
Inputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals
If you set a multi-function contact input terminal (H1-) to 60 (DC injection brake command), you can
apply the DC injection brake to the motor by turning ON this terminal.
The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below.
DC injection brake command
FRUN
Output frequency
DC injection brake
E1-09
b2-01
DC injection brake
If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal, and if a run command
or jog command is input, the DC injection brake will be disabled, and operation will resume.
Fig 6.16 DC Injection Brake Time Chart
6-16
Stopping Methods
Changing the DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 6 (DC injection brake current), you can change the DC injection brake current level using the analog input.
At 10 V input (voltage) or 20 mA input (current), 100% of the Inverter rated current will be applied.
DC injection brake current level
Inverter rated current
Fig 6.17 DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
Using an Emergency Stop
Set a multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 15 or 17 (emergency stop) to decelerate to stop using the
deceleration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function
input terminal (H1-) to 15, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function
input terminal (H1-) to 17.
After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has
stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.
Related parameters
Constant
Number
C1-09
Name
Emergency stop time
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the deceleration time when the multi-function
input “Emergency (fast) stop” is ON.
This time will be used when a fault is detected, for
which emergency stop was programmed as stoping method.
0.0 to
6000.0*
10.0 s
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
* The acceleration and deceleration settings range varies depending on the setting in C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the acceleration/deceleration settings
range is 0.00 to 600.00 (seconds).
6-17
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Inverter.
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
Acceleration time indicates the time to increase the output frequency from 0% to 100% of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). Deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the output frequency from 100% to
0% of (E1-04). The accel./decel. times 1 are used with the factory setting, the accel./decel. times 2 to 4 can be
selected using a multifunction input.
Related Parameters
Constant
Number
Name
Setting
Range
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
C1-01
Acceleration time 1
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to
the maximum output frequency.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
C1-02
Deceleration time 1
Sets the deceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to fall from 100% to 0%.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
C1-03
Acceleration time 2
Sets the acceleration time when multi-function
input &quot;Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1&quot;
is ON.
Yes
A
A
A
C1-04
Deceleration time 2
Sets the deceleration time when multi-function
input &quot;Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1&quot;
is ON.
Yes
A
A
A
C1-05
Acceleration time 3
Sets the acceleration time when multi-function
input &quot;Acceleration/deceleration time selection 2&quot;
is ON.
No
A
A
A
C1-06
Deceleration time 3
Sets the deceleration time when multi-function
input &quot;Acceleration/deceleration time selection 2&quot;
is ON.
No
A
A
A
C1-07
Acceleration time 4
Sets the acceleration time when multi-function
input &quot;Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1&quot;
and &quot;Acceleration/deceleration time selection 2&quot;
are ON.
No
A
A
A
C1-08
Deceleration time 4
Sets the deceleration time when multi-function
input &quot;Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1&quot;
and &quot;Acceleration/deceleration time 2&quot; are ON.
No
A
A
A
C1-10
Acceleration/deceleration
time setting unit
C1-11
Acceleration/deceleration
time switching frequency
C2-01
S-curve characteristic time
at acceleration start
C2-02
S-curve characteristic time
at acceleration end
C2-03
S-curve characteristic time
at deceleration start
C2-04
S-curve characteristic time
at deceleration end
0: 0.01 s
1: 0.1 s
Sets the frequency at which acceleration/deceleration time switches automatically.
Less than set frequency: Acceleration/deceleration
time 4
Set frequency or above: Acceleration/deceleration
time 1
Multi-function inputs &quot;Acceleration/deceleration
time selection 1&quot; and &quot;Acceleration/deceleration
time selection 2&quot; are given priority.
Sets the S-curve characteristic time for each part
in seconds.
When you set the S-curve characteristic time, the
start time and end time S-curve characteristic
time's acceleration/deceleration time is lengthened
by 1/2 only.
Run
command
Output frequency
10.0 s
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s
No
A
A
A
OFF
ON
C2-02
C2-01
0.0 to
6000.0*
C2-03
C2-04
Time
* The acceleration and deceleration settings range varies depending on the setting in C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the acceleration/deceleration settings
range is 0.00 to 600.00 (seconds).
6-18
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units
Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C1-10. The factory setting is 1.
Set value
Details
0
The acceleration/deceleration time setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.01 s.
1
The acceleration/deceleration time setting range is 0.00 to 6000.0 in units of 0.1 s.
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal
Commands
Four different acceleration times and deceleration times can be set. When the multi-function input terminals
(H1-) are set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1) and 1A (acceleration/deceleration time
selection 2), you can switch the acceleration/deceleration time even during operation by combining the
ON/OFF status of the terminals.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/DeceleraAcceleration/Deceleration Time Selection 1 Ter- tion Time Selection 2 Terminal
minal
Acceleration Time
Deceleration Time
OFF
OFF
C1-01
C1-02
ON
OFF
C1-03
C1-04
OFF
ON
C1-05
C1-06
ON
ON
C1-07
C1-08
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically
Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration/deceleration time automatically using the output frequency.
When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1-11, the Inverter switches the acceleration/deceleration
time automatically as shown in the following diagram.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.
Output frequency
Acceleration/deceler
ation time switching
frequency (C1-11)
C1-07
C1-01
C1-02
C1-08
When output frequency ≥ C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When output frequency &lt; C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 4 (C1-07, C1-08).
Fig 6.18 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
6-19
Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 5 (acceleration/deceleration time gain), you can adjust the acceleration/deceleration time using terminal A2's input voltage.
The resulting acceleration time is as follows:
Acceleration time = C1-01 set value x acceleration/deceleration time gain
Acceleration/deceleration time gain
(Acceleration/deceleration gain from 1 to
10 V) = 10 V/Input voltage (V) x 10 (%)
Fig 6.19 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain Using an Analog Input
Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time
By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting and
stopping the machine.
Four different S-curve characteristic times can be set: At acceleration start, at deceleration start, at acceleration
end and at deceleration end.
When S-curve is set, calculate acceleration/deceleration time as follows:
C2-01 + C2-02
2
C2-03 + C2-04
Decel. time =
2
Accel. time
INFO
=
+ C1-01/03/05/07
+ C1-02/04/06/08
Setting Example
The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.
Forward
Reverse
Output frequency
Fig 6.20 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching
6-20
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function)
The dwell function temporarily holds the output frequency when starting or stopping heavy loads. By using
this function the motor can be prevented from stalling. When using the dwell function, deceleration to stop
must be set as stopping method (b1-03 = 0).
Related Parameters
Constant
Number
b6-01
Name
Dwell frequency at start
b6-02
Dwell time at start
b6-03
Dwell frequency at stop
b6-04
Dwell time at stop
Description
Run command
ON
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
OFF
Output frequency
b6-01 b6-03
b6-02
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Time
b6-04
The Dwell function temporarily stores the
frequency when starting and stopping heavy loads.
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention
During Acceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is applied
to the motor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.
If you set L3-01 to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current reaches 85 % of the set value in L3-02, the
acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, the acceleration will stop.
If you set L3-01 to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor accelerates so that the current is held at the level set in
L3-03. With this setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Constant
Number
Name
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
1
No
A
A
A
L3-01
Stall prevention selection
during acceleration
0: Disabled (Accelerates according to the setting.
Motor may stall if the load is too high.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stops when the level set
in L3-02 is exceeded. Acceleration continues
when current value falls below the level set in
L3-02.)
2: Optimum adjustment (Adjusts acceleration
using the current level set in L3-02 as reference. The acceleration time setting is
ignored.)
L3-02
Stall prevention level during acceleration
Set as a percentage taking the Inverter rated current to be 100%.
Normally, it is not necessary to change this setting.
Lower the set value if the motor stalls using the
factory setting.
0 to 200
120%*
No
A
A
A
L3-03
Stall prevention limit during acceleration
Sets the lower current limit for stall prevention
during acceleration as a percentage taking the
inverter rated current as 100%.
Normally, it is not necessary to change this setting.
0 to 100
50%
No
A
A
A
* Shows the initial value when C6-01 is set to 1. If C6-01 is set to 0, the initial value is 150%.
6-21
Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Output current
Stall level during
acceleration
Time
Output frequency
*1.
*2.
* 1. The acceleration rate is lowered.
* 2. The acceleration is stopped to reduce the output current.
Time
Fig 6.21 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
Setting Precautions
• If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity or if the inverter is operated using the fac-
tory settings and the motor stalls, lower the set value of L3-02.
• If using the motor in the constant output range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling.
L3-03 is the limit value to prevent the stall prevention level in the constant output range from being
reduced more than necessary.
• Set the constants as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.
Stall prevention level during
acceleration
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during
Acceleration)
L3-03 (Stall Prevention Limit during
Acceleration)
E1-06
Base Frequency (FA)
Output frequency
Fig 6.22 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
6-22
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During
Deceleration Function)
This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the DC-bus voltage to avoid overvoltage tripping.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
L3-04
Name
Stall prevention selection
during deceleration function selection
Description
0: Disabled (Motor decelerates according to
setting. When the deceleration time is too
short, there is a risk of DC bus overvoltage
(OV) occurring.)
1: Enabled
2: Optimum adjustment
3: Enabled (with dynamic braking)
If using the dynamic brake option (braking resistor, braking resistor units, and braking units), be
sure to set constant L3-04 to 0 or 3.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
1
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
Setting the Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration (L3-04)
There are four different settings selectable for L3-04.
L3-04=0: This setting disables the stall prevention function during deceleration. The motor will be decelerated using the time set in C1-02 (C1-04/06/08). If the load inertia is very high and an OV fault
occurs during deceleration a Braking option has to be used or the time has to be lengthened.
L3-04=1: This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration. The inverter tries to decelerate within
the set deceleration time. It also observes the DC bus voltage. If the DC bus voltage reaches the
stall prevention level the deceleration is stopped and the output frequency is held. When the DC
bus voltage falls below the stall prevention level the deceleration will be continued.
L3-04=2: This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration. The deceleration time set as C1-
is taken as reference. The function automatically tries to optimize the deceleration time by observing the DC bus voltage and shortening the deceleration time. The function does not lengthen the
deceleration time, i.e. if C1- is set too short OV may occure.
L3-04=3: This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration using a braking option. It works similar to setting 2, the only difference is that a braking option is used. The deceleration time set in
C1- is also disregarded.
6-23
Setting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 is shown below.
Deceleration time controlled to
prevent overvoltage
Output frequency
Time
Deceleration time
(set value)
Fig 6.23 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation
Setting Precautions
• The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the inverter rated voltage and input
voltage. Refer to the following table for details.
Inverter Rated/Input Voltage
200 V class
400 V class
Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration (V)
380
E1-01 ≥ 400 V
760
E1-01 &lt; 400 V
660
• When using the braking option (braking resistor, braking resistor units, and braking units), be sure to set
constant L3-04 to 0 or 3.
• When a braking option is used and the deceleration time shall be optimized (shorter than setting of
C1-02/04/06/08), L3-04 has to be set to 3.
6-24
Adjusting Frequency References
Adjusting Frequency References
This section explains methods of adjusting frequency references.
Adjusting Analog Frequency References
Gain and bias are among the constants used to adjust analog inputs.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
H3-01
Multi-function analog
input terminal A1 signal
level selection
H3-02
Frequency reference termi- Sets the frequency as a percentage of the maxinal A1 input gain
mum output frequency, when 10V is input.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
H3-03
Frequency reference termi- Sets the frequency as a percentage of the maxinal A1 input bias
mum output frequency, when 0V is input.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
H3-08
Multi-function analog A2
signal level selection
0: 0 to +10V (11 bit)
1: –10V to +10V (11 bit plus sign)
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input)
Switch current and voltage input using the switch
S1 on the control terminal board.
0 to 2
2
No
A
A
A
H3-09
Multi-function analog A2
function selection
Selects the multi-function analog input function
for terminal A2.
0 to 1F
0
No
A
A
A
H3-10
Multi-function analog A2
input gain
Sets the input levelwhen terminal A2 input is 10V
(20mA) according to the 100% value of the function set in constant H3-09.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
H3-11
Multi-function analog A2
input bias
Sets the input level when terminal A2 input is 0V
(4mA) according to the 100% value of the function set in constant H3-09.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
H3-12
Analog input filter time
constant
Sets primary delay filter time constant for the two
analog input terminals (A1 and A2). Effective for
noise control etc.
0.00 to
2.00
0.00 s
No
A
A
A
Terminal A1/A2 switching
0: Use terminal A1 analog input as main frequency reference.
1: Use terminal A2 analog input as main frequency reference.
Effective when H3-09 is set to 2.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
H3-13
0: 0 to +10V (11 bit)
1: –10V to +10V (11 bit plus sign)
Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Constants
The frequency reference can be input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current signals.
If using terminal A1 as an input terminal for the frequency reference value, perform adjustments using constants H3-01 to H3-03. If using multi-function analog input terminal A2 as a frequency reference terminal,
perform adjustments using H3-08 to H3-11. Set the analog input signal level using the constants H3-01 or
H3-08. Refer the following figures for setting the input gain and bias.
Frequency reference
Frequency reference
Terminal A2 input
voltage (current)
Terminal A1
input voltage
Terminal A2 input
Terminal A1 input
Fig 6.24 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs
6-25
Adjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input
When H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), you can adjust the frequency gain using an analog input.
Frequency gain
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.25 Frequency Gain Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
The frequency gain for terminal A1 is the sum of H3-02 and terminal A2 gain. For example, when H3-02 is set
to 100% and terminal A2 is set to 5 V, the terminal A1 frequency reference will be 50%.
Frequency reference
terminal A1 input voltage
Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 is set to 0 (Frequency Bias), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 input voltage is
added to A1 as a bias.
Frequency bias
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.26 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the frequency reference from
terminal A1 when 0 V is input to A1 will be 10%.
6-26
Adjusting Frequency References
Frequency reference
Terminal A1 input voltage
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)
• This function allows the prohibition or „jumping“ of certain frequencies within the Inverter’s output fre-
quency range so that the motor can operate without resonant oscillations caused by some machine systems.
• It can also be used for deadband control.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
d3-01
Jump frequency 1
d3-02
Jump frequency 2
d3-03
Jump frequency 3
d3-04
Jump frequency width
Description
Setting
Range
Set the frequency center value of the jump frequency settings, in hertz.
Set to 0.0 to disable the jump frequency function.
Make sure that the settings are as follows: d3-01 ≥
d3-02 ≥ d3-03.
Operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited. Changes during acceleration and deceleration are made gradually without performing
jumps.
0.0 to
400.0
Sets the jump frequency width in hertz.
The jump frequency range is as follows: (Jump
frequency &plusmn;d3-04).
0.0 to
20.0
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
1.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows:
6-27
Output
frequency
Frequency reference descending
Jump frequency width d3-04
Frequency
reference
ascending
Jump
frequency
Jump
frequency width d3-04
width d3-04
Jump
frequency
3 (d3-03)
Jump
frequency
2 (d3-02)
Jump frequency reference
Jump
frequency
1 (d3-01)
Fig 6.27 Jump Frequency
Setting Jump Frequency Reference Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) is set to A (jump frequency), you can change the jump frequency using the terminal A2 input.
Jump frequency
Max. output frequency
E1-04
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.28 Jump Frequency Setting Using an Analog Input
Setting Precautions
• Set the jump frequencies according to the following formula: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 &gt; Analog input.
• When constants d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0 Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.
6-28
Adjusting Frequency References
Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Input
The pulse train input will be accepted as frequency reference when b1-01 (Reference Source Selection) is set
to 4 (Pulse Train Input). Set the pulse frequency that is equal to 100% reference in constant H6-02, and then
adjust the gain and bias accordingly using H6-03 and H6-04.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
H6-01
Pulse train input function
selection
H6-02
Pulse train input scaling
Set the number of pulses in Hz, taking the reference to be 100%.
1000 to
32000
1440 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
H6-03
Pulse train input gain
Set the input gain level as a percentage of the frequency set in H6-02.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
H6-04
Pulse train input bias
Set the input bias when the pulse train is 0.
-100.0 to
100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
H6-05
Pulse train input filter time
Set the pulse train input primary delay filter time
constant in seconds.
0.00 to
2.00
0.10
s
Yes
A
A
A
The following block diagram explains the functioning of the pulse train input.
Gain and bias
Filter
Cycle
measurement
Master speed
fequency
PID feedback
PID target value
Scaling using H6-02
Fig 6.29 Frequency Reference Adjustments Using Pulse Train Inputs
The principle for setting the input gain and bias is the same as for the analog inputs (refer page 6-25 pp). The
only difference is that the input signal is not a voltage or a current but a pulse train.
6-29
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit
Function)
This section explains how to limit the motor speed.
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency, use constant d2-01.
Set the upper limit value of the frequency reference as a percentage, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output Frequency) to be 100%.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
d2-01
Frequency reference upper
limit
Description
Set the output frequency upper limit, taking the
max. output frequency to be 100%.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
Limiting Minimum Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate at below a given frequency, use constants d2-02 or d2-03.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:
• Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.
• Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency,
multi-step speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted).
Related Constants
6-30
Constant
Number
Name
d2-02
Frequency reference lower
limit
d2-03
Master speed reference
lower limit
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the output frequency lower limit, taking the
base reference to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
A
A
Set the master speed reference lower limit, taking
the max. output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
A
A
Description
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)
Adjusting Frequency Lower Limit Using an Analog Input
If you set constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 9 (output frequency lower level), you can adjust the frequency lower level using the terminal A2 input level.
Output frequency lower level
Max. output frequency
E1-04
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.30 Analog Output Characteristics of Output Frequency Lower Level
If constant d2-02 and terminal A2 output frequency lower level have been set at the same time, the larger set
value will become the frequency lower limit.
6-31
Frequency Detection
Speed Agreement Function
There are eight different types of frequency detection methods available. The digital multifunction outputs
M1 to M6 can be programmed for this function and can be used to signalize a frequency detection or agreement to any external equipment.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Regelungsarten
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
L4-01
Speed agreement detection level
Effective when &quot;fout/fset agree 1&quot;, &quot;Frequency
detection 1&quot; or &quot;Frequency detection 2&quot; is set for a
multi-function output.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
L4-02
Speed agreement detection width
Effective when &quot;fref/fout agree 1&quot;, &quot;fout/fset agree
1&quot;, &quot;Frequency detection 1&quot; or &quot;Frequency detection 2&quot; is set for a multi-function output.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
L4-03
Speed agreement detection level (&plusmn;)
Effective when &quot;fout/fset agree 2&quot;, &quot;Frequency
detection 3&quot; or &quot;Frequency detection 4&quot; is set for a
multi-function output.
-400.0 to
+400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
L4-04
Speed agreement detection width (&plusmn;)
Effective when &quot;fref/fout agree 2&quot;, &quot;fout/fset agree
2&quot;, &quot;Frequency detection 3&quot; or &quot;Frequency
detection 4&quot; is set for a multi-function output.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
• With L4-01 an absolute speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected in both directions
(FWD and REV).
• With L4-03 a signed speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected only in the set direc-
tion (positive level → FWD direction, negative level → REV direction).
6-32
Frequency Detection
Time Charts
The following table shows the time charts for each of the speed agreement functions.
Related constant
L4-01: Speed Agree Level
L4-02: Speed Agree Width
L4-03: Speed Agree Level +/–
L4-04: Speed Agree Width
fref/fout Agree 2
fref/fout Agree 1
Frequency
reference
Frequency
reference
L4-02
Output
frequency or
fref/fout Agree motor speed
L4-04
Output
frequency or
motor speed
L4-02
fref/fout Agree 1
OFF
L4-04
ON
fref/fout Agree 2
(Multi-function output setting = 2)
ON
OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 13)
fout/fset Agree 1
(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)
fout/fset Agree 2
(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)
L4-02
L4-04
L4-01
fout/fset Agree
Output frequency or
motor speed
L4-03
Output frequency or
motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
OFF
fout/fset Agree 1
ON
OFF ON
fout/fset Agree 2
(Multi-function output setting = 3)
(Multi-function output setting = 14)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1
(L4-01 &gt; | Output frequency |)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 3
(L4-03 &gt; Output frequency)
L4-04
L4-02
L4-01
L4-03
Output frequency or
motor speed
Output frequency or
motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 1
Frequency
Detection
ON
OFF
Freq. Detection 3
ON
OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 4)
(Multi-function output setting = 15)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2
(L4-01 &lt; | Output frequency |)
Frequency Detection 4
(L4-03 &lt; Output frequency)
L4-02
L4-04
L4-01
Output frequency or
motor speed
L4-03
Output frequency or
motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 2
OFF
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 5)
Freq. Detection 4
OFF
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 16)
6-33
Multifunction Output Settings: H2-01 to H2-03
(M1 – M6 function selection)
The table below shows the necessary H2-01 to H2-03 parameter setting for each of the speed agreement
functions.
Function
6-34
Setting
fref/fout Agree 1
2
fout/fset Agree 1
3
Frequency detection 1
4
Frequency detection 2
5
fref/fout Agree 2
13
fout/fset Agree 2
14
Frequency detection 3
15
Frequency detection 4
16
Improved Operating Efficiency
Improved Operating Efficiency
This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency.
Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)
When the load is large, the motor slip also grows and the motor speed decreases. The slip compensation function keeps the motor speed constant, regardless of changes in load. When the motor is operating at the rated
load, constant E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) &times; the slip compensation gain value in constant C3-01 is added to the
output frequency.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Slip compensation gain
Use this constant to improve speed accuracy when
operating under a load. Normally, there is no need
to make this setting.
Adjust constant C3-01 under the following conditions:
• Increase the set value when the motor speed
falls to below the target value.
• Decrease the set value when the motor speed
rises to above the target value.
0.0 to 2.5
0.0*
Yes
A
No
A
C3-02
Slip compensation delay
time
Sets the delay time constant for the slip compensation function.
Normally, there is no need to change this setting.
Adjust constant C3-02 under the following conditions:
• When the slip compensation response is low,
lower the set value.
• When the speed is unstable, increase the set
value.
0 to
10000
2000 ms
No
A
No
A
C3-03
Slip compensation limit
Set the upper limit of the compensation amount
for the slip compensation function as a percentage,
taking the motor rated slip to be 100%.
0 to
250
200%
No
A
No
A
C3-04
Slip compensation during
regeneration
0: Slip compensation is disabled during
regeneration.
1: Slip compensation is enabled during
regeneration.
If the slip compensation function operates during
regeneration, you might have to use a braking
option (braking resistor, braking resistor unit, or
braking unit).
0 or 1
0
No
A
No
A
C3-05
Output voltage limit operation selection
0 or 1
0
No
No
No
A
Constant
Number
C3-01
Name
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The motor flux will be lowered automatically when the output voltage become saturated.)
*
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
6-35
Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01)
The setting value of C3-01 depends on the control method. The factory settings are:
• V/f control without PG: 0.0
• Open loop vector control: 1.0
Set C3-01 to 1.0 to compensate the slip depending on the actual torque output status using the rated slip
(E2-02/E4-02) as reference.
Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure.
1. Set E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) and E2-03 (Motor No-load Current) correctly.
The motor rated slip can be calculated using the values on the motor nameplate and the following formula.
Motor rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - Rated Motor speed (rpm) &times; No. of motor poles / 120
The motor rated slip is set automatically in vector control using the autotuning function.
2. In V/f control, set C3-01 to 1.0. Setting this constant to 0.0 disables the slip compensation.
3. Apply a load, and measure the speed to adjust the slip compensation gain. Adjust the slip compensation
gain by 0.1 at a time. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain, and if
the speed is higher than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant (C3-02)
The slip compensation delay time constant is set in ms.
The setting value of C3-02 depends on the control method. The factory settings are:
• V/f control without PG: 2000 ms
• Open loop vector control: 200 ms
Normally, there is no need to change these settings. When the slip compensation response is low, lower the set
value. When the speed is unstable, increase the set value.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Limit (C3-03)
Using constant C3-03 the upper limit for the slip compensation can be set as a percentage, taking the motor
rated slip as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even after adjusting the slip compensation gain,
the slip compensation limit may have reached. Increase the limit, and check the speed again. Always make
sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency does not exceed the tolerance of the
machine.
The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range.
Slip compensation limit
Output frequency
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-04: Maximum output frequency
Fig 6.31 Slip Compensation Limit
6-36
Improved Operating Efficiency
Selecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration (C3-04)
Set whether to enable or disable the slip compensation function during regeneration.
If the slip compensation function operates during regeneration, you might have to use a braking option (braking resistor, braking resistor unit, and braking unit).
Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated (C3-05)
The Inverter cannot output a voltage that is higher than the input voltage. If the output voltage command to the
motor (monitor constant U1-06) exceeds the input voltage in the high-speed region, the output voltage
becomes saturated, and inverter cannot respond to speed or load changes. This function automatically reduces
the output voltage to avoid voltage saturation.
Torque Compensation for Sufficient Torque at Start and Low-speed
Operation
The torque compensation function detects a rising motor load, and increases the output torque.
In V/f control the inverter calculates the motor primary loss voltage and adjusts the output voltage (V) to compensate insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation. The compensation voltage is calculated
as follows: Motor primary voltage loss &times; constant C4-01.
The vector control separates the motor excitation current and the torque producing current and controlles each
of the two separately.
The torque producing current is calculated as follows: Calculated torque reference &times; C4-01
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Torque compensation gain
Sets the torque compensation gain using the multiplication factor. Normally, there is no need to set
this constant. Adjust the torque compensation gain
under the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the motor capacity is smaller than the
Inverter capacity (max. applicable motor
capacity), increase the set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this constant so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the
Inverter rated output current range.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
C4-02
Torque compensation
delay time constant
Set the delay for the torque compensation function
in ms.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Adjust this constant in the following circumstances.
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set
value.
0 to
10000
200 ms
No
A
A
A
C4-03
Starting torque compensation value (forward direction)
Sets the torque compensation value at start in
FWD direction.
0.0 to
200.0%
0.0
No
No
No
A
C4-04
Starting torque compensation value (reverse direction)
Sets the torque compensation value at start on
REV direction.
–200.0 to
0.0%
0.0
No
No
No
A
C4-05
Starting torque compensation time constant
Sets starting torque start-up time.
When 0 ~ 4 ms is set, it is operated without filter.
0 to 200
1 ms
No
No
No
A
C4-01
*
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
6-37
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01)
Normally, there is no need to change this setting. Do not adjust the torque compensation gain when using open
loop vector control.
Adjust the torque compensation gain in V/f control under the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (max. applicable motor capacity), increase the
set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this constant so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated
output current range.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant (C4-02)
Set the torque compensation function primary delay in ms.
The setting value of C4-02 depends on the control method. The factory settings are:
• V/f control without PG: 200 ms
• V/f control with PG: 200 ms
• open loop vector control: 20 ms
Normally, there is no need to change this setting. Adjust the constant under the following circumstances:
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.
Starting Torque Compensation Function (C4-03 to C4-05)
Starting torque compensation can be input to speed up the torque command at starting with open-loop vector
control.
This function is effective for machinery with large friction loads, cranes, and other applications where high
starting torque is required. It works like shown in the following diagram.
Forward (Reverse) Run
command
ON
OFF
Time constant: C4-05
Torque compensation
volume
Time constant: C4-02
C4-03 (forward)
C4-04 (reverse, negative polarity)
C4-05 x 4
E1-09
Output frequency
The larger value of
b2-01 and E1-09
Fig. 6.32 Time Chart for Starting Torque Frequency
When this function is used, the following should be considered:
• When the machine runs in FWD and REV direction both values, C4-03 and C4-04 have to be set.
• The compensation works only for the motoring side. It can not be used with a regenerative load.
• If a large shock is generated at starting increase the starting torque compensation time constant (C4-05).
6-38
Improved Operating Efficiency
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) (for V/f with PG only)
In V/f with PG control mode the Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) is used to control the motor speed. The
speed control structure is shown in the figure below.
Frequency
reference
Output frequency
Change
limiter
Detected
speed
Limiter
Fig. 6.33 Speed Control Structure
Related Constants
Constant
Numberr
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
C5-01
ASR proportional (P) gain Sets the proportional gain of the speed loop
1
(ASR).
0.00 to
300.00
0.20
Yes
No
A
No
C5-02
ASR integral (I) time 1
Sets the integral time of the speed loop (ASR).
0.000 to
10.000
0.200
s
Yes
No
A
No
C5-03
ASR proportional (P) gain Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
2
0.00 to
300.00
0.02
Yes
No
A
No
0.000 to
10.000
0.050
s
Yes
No
A
No
P,I
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P = C5-03
I = C5-04
Motor
speed
(Hz)
C5-04
ASR integral (I) time 2
C5-05
ASR limit
Sets the upper limit for the compensation frequency for the speed control loop (ASR) as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
20.0
5.0%
No
No
A
No
F1-07
Sets integral control during acceleration/deceleration to either enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled (The integral function isn’t used
Integral value during
while accelerating or decelerating; it is used at
accel/decel enable/disable
constant speeds.)
1: Enabled (The integral function is used at all
times.)
0 or 1
0
No
No
A
No
0
E1-04
6-39
Adjusting Gain and Integral Times (C5-01 to C5-04)
The ASR proportional gain and ASR integral time can be set different for low and high output frequency (see
Fig. 6.34.
Motor speed [Hz]
(Max. output frequency)
Fig. 6.34 ASR Gain and Integral Time Depending on the Output Frequency
Use the following procedure to adjust the ASR gain and integral time. The mechanical system and the load
should be connected while this procedure.
Gain and Integral Time at Minimum Output Frequency (C5-03 and C5-04)
1.
Operate the motor at the minimum output frequency.
2.
Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2) to a level where there is no oscillation in motor speed.
3.
Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) to a level where there is no oscillation in motor speed.
4.
Monitor the inverter’s output current and verify that it is less than 50% of the inverter rated current. If the
output current exceeds 50% of the inverter’s rated current, decrease C5-03 and increase C5-04.
Gain and Integral Time at Maximum Output Frequency (C5-01 and C5-02)
1.
Operate the motor at the maximum output frequency.
2.
Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) to a level where there is no oscillation in motor speed.
3.
Decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) to a level where there is no oscillation in motor speed.
Gain and Integral Time Adjustments for Integral Control during
Acceleration/Deceleration (F1-07)
Normally the integral control is disabled during Acceleration/Deceleration (F1-07=0). Enable this function if
you want the motor speed to follow the frequency reference very closely during accel./decel. The integral
operation causes the speed to reach the target value as fast as possible. Wrong setting may cause oscillations
or low speed response.
1.
Set F1-07 to “1” to enable integral operation at all times.
2.
Make the constant settings shown below in order to observe the speed waveform while making fine
adjustments to the gain.
Constant
H4-01 Analog output selection (terminal FM)
Explanation
2
H4-02 Analog output gain (terminal FM)
100 %
H4-03 Analog output bias (terminal FM)
0.0 %
H4-04 Analog output selection (terminal AM)
6-40
Setting
Settings that allow multi-function analog output 1
to be used to monitor the output frequency.
5
H4-05 Analog output gain (terminal AM)
100 %
H4-06 Analog output bias (terminal AM)
0.0 %
H4-07 Analog output 1 signal level selection
1
H4-08 Analog output 2 signal level selection
1
Settings that allow multi-function analog output 2
to be used to monitor the motor speed.
This setting allows a 0 to &plusmn; 10 V signal range to
be monitored.
Improved Operating Efficiency
The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these constant settings.
•
Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM): Outputs Inverter’s output frequency 0 to &plusmn;10 V).
•
Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM): Outputs the actual motor speed (0 to &plusmn; 10 V).
Terminal AC is the multi-function analog output common.
We recommend monitoring both, the output frequency and the motor speed to monitor the response delay
or deviations from the reference value, as shown in the following diagram.
Output frequency
Motor speed
Motor speed (response)
Time
Fig. 6.35 Example Monitor Waveforms
3.
Give acceleration/deceleration commands and adjust the gain while observing the waveform.
Motor speed
If overshooting occurs:
Decrease C5-01 and increase C5-02
Time
If undershooting occurs:
Decrease C5-03 and increaseC5-04
Fig. 6.36 Gain Adjustments
4.
If the overshooting or undershooting can’t be eliminated by adjusting the gain and integral time values,
decrease the ASR limit (C5-05) to lower the frequency reference compensation limit.
Note the following:
•
Since C5-05 can’t be changed during operation, stop the Inverter’s operation and then decrease the
ASR limit by 0.5 (%).
•
Perform step 3 again after the setting has been changed.
•
The ASR limit is the frequency limit for compensation by speed control. This frequency limit is set
as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
•
If the frequency limit is lowered too much, the motor speed might not reach the target speed. Verify
that the target speed is reached during normal operation.
6-41
Multi-function Input Settings (H1-01 to H1-05) (Terminal S3 to S7)
V/f Control with/without PG Selection: “D”
•
When one of the digital inputs is set to “D” this input can be used to switch over to normal V/f control and
thereby to disable the ASR.
•
The ASR is disabled when the multifunction input is ON.
Speed Control Integral Disable: “E”
•
When one of the digital inputs is set to “E” this input can be used to switch the speed control between PI
and P control.
•
P control is active when the input is ON (Integral value is reset).
Hunting-Prevention Function
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load. This function can be used in the V/f control modes only.
If high response has the priority to vibration suppression this function should be disabled (N1-01 = 0).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
N1-01
Hunting-prevention function selection
N1-02
Hunting-prevention gain
Description
0: Hunting-prevention function disabled
1: Hunting-prevention function enabled
Set the hunting-prevention gain multiplication factor.
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
No
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
No
A
A
No
Adjusting the Hunting-Prevention Gain (N1-02)
Normally it is not necessary to change this setting. Adjust the value under the following circumstances:
• If vibrations occur under light load condition increase the setting.
• If the motor stalls reduce the setting.
6-42
Improved Operating Efficiency
Stabilizing Speed (Automatic Frequency Regulator)
The speed feedback detection control (AFR) function controls the stability of the speed when a load is suddenly applied by calculating the amount of fluctuation using the torque current (Iq) feedback value, and compensating the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation.
fout
fref
Iq
Fig. 6.37 AFR Control Loop
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
N2-01
Speed feedback detection
control (AFR) gain
Sets the internal speed feedback detection control
gain.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00
No
No
No
A
N2-02
Speed feedback detection
control (AFR) time constant
Sets the time constant to detect the rate of change
in the speed feedback detection control.
0 to 2000
50 ms
No
No
No
A
N2-03
Speed feedback detection
control (AFR) time constant 2
Sets the time constant to detect the amount of
change in the speed.
0 to 2000
750 ms
No
No
No
A
Setting the AFR Gain (N2-01)
Normally there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:
•
If hunting occurs increase N2-01.
•
If the response is too low, decrease N2-01.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a time while checking the response.
Setting the AFR Time Constants 1 and 2 (N2-02, N2-03)
Normally the setting value of N2-02 is used as AFR time constant. The setting value of N2-03 is used when:
•
L2-04 is set to 1 or 2 AND
•
output frequency &gt; 5 Hz AND
•
a transient load change occurs (causing transient regeneration or overshoot at acceleration).
Generally there is no need to change the settings.
6-43
Machine Protection
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)
The motor torque limit function can only be used with open-loop vector control.
This function allows limitation of motor shaft torque independendly for each of the four quadrands.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
L7-01
Forward drive torque limit
L7-02
Reverse drive torque limit
Set the torque limit value as a percent of the motor
rated torque.
You can set up to four separate limits.
L7-03
Forward regenerative
torque limit
Output torque
Positive torque
Reverse
L7-04
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0 to 300
200%*
No
No
No
A
0 to 300
200%*
No
No
No
A
0 to 300
200%*
No
No
No
A
0 to 300
200%*
No
No
No
A
No. of
motor
rotations
Regenerative status
Reverse regenerative
torque limit
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Change
during
Operation
Regenera
-tive status
Negative torque
* A setting value of 100% is equal to the motor rated torque.
Setting the Torque Limit in Constants
Using L7-01 to L7-04, you can set individually four torque limits in the following directions: Forward drive,
reverse drive, forward regeneration, and reverse regeneration.
Set the Torque Limit Value Using an Analog Input
The analog input A2 can also be used to input several torque limits. The table below shows the possible analog input settings (H3-09) for the torque limit function.
Set
Value
Function
100% of Contents
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
10
Positive torque limit
Motor rated torque
No
No
Yes
11
Negative torque limit
Motor rated torque
No
No
Yes
12
Regenerative torque limit
Motor rated torque
No
No
Yes
15
Positive/negative torque limit
Motor rated torque
No
No
Yes
The analog input terminal A2 signal level is factory-set as follows: 4 to 20 mA (20 mA at input, torque limited
to 100% motor rated torque). The following figure shows the relationship between the torque limits.
6-44
Machine Protection
Output torque
Positive
Positive/negative torque limits
Forward torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
No. of motor rotations
Forward operation
Reverse operation
Regenerative torque limit
Negative torque limit
Positive/negative torque limits
Negative
Fig 6.38 Torque Limits using the Analog Input
Setting Torque Limits Using Constants and an Analog Input Together
The following block diagram shows the relationship between torque limit using constants (L7-01 to L7-04)
and torque limit using the analog input A2.
Multi-function analog input
Terminal
A2
Constants
Forward torque limit
(set value = 10)
Negative torque limit
(set value = 11)
Regenerative torque limit
(set value = 12)
Positive/negative torque limit
(set value = 15)
Positive forward drive
torque
Reverse positive regenerative torque
Forward negative regenerative torque
Min: Minimum value priority circuit
Reverse
drive
reverse
torque
Forward torque limit
(L7-01)
Forward torque limit
Reverse torque limit
(L7-02)
Forward regenerative torque
limit (L7-03)
Reverse torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque
limit (L7-04)
Reverse regenerative
torque limit
Forward regenerative
torque limit
175% of Inverter rated current
Fig 6.39 Torque Limit Using Constants and an Analog Input Together
Multifunction Output Settings: H2-01 to H2-03 (M1 to M6 Function Selection)
During Torque Limit: “30”
If a multifunction output is set for this function the output is switched ON when the motor output torque reaches one of the torque limits.
6-45
Setting Precautions
• When the output torque reaches the torque limit, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled
to prevent the output torque from exceeding the torque limit. The torque limit has the priority.
• When using the torque limit for hoist applications, do not carelessly lower the torque limit value, as this
may result in motor stalling.
• When using an analog input for torque limit setting, an analog input value of 10 V/20 mA is equal to a
torque limit of 100% of the motor rated torque. To raise the torque limit value at an analog input of 10
V/20 mA for instance to 150% of the rated torque, set the input terminal gain to 150.0 (%). Adjust the gain
for multi-function analog input terminal A2 using H3-10.
• The torque limit accuracy is &plusmn;5% at the output frequency of 10 Hz or above. When output frequency is
lower than 10 Hz, the accuracy is lowered.
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation
Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter's
output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
Stall prevention during operation is enabled only in V/f control. If the Inverter output current continues to
exceed the setting in constant L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Set whether to enable or
disable the stall prevention using constant L3-05. Set the according deceleration times using C1-02 (Deceleration time 1) or C1-04 (Deceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 – 2%, the motor will accelerate again to the set frequency.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
L3-05
Stall prevention selection
during running function
selection
0: Disabled (Operates according to the setting.
Motor may stall when the load is too large.)
1: Enabled--Deceleration time 1 (Deceleration
time set in C1-02 is used.)
2: Enabled--Deceleration time 2 (Deceleration
time set in C1-04 is used.)
0 to 2
1
No
A
A
No
L3-06
Stall prevention level during running
Enabled when L3-05 is set to 1 or 2. Set as a percentage, taking Inverter rated current to be 100%.
Normally, there is no need to change this setting.
Lower the set value if the motor stalls at the factory setting.
30 to 200
120%
No
A
A
No
* The initial value when C6-01 is set to 1 is given. If C6-01 is set to 0, the initial value will be 150%.
6-46
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
*
Machine Protection
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 8 (stall prevention during
operation level), you can change the stall level during operation using the analog input A2.
If the analog input A2 is used to set the stall prevention level, the function uses either the value from the
multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level or the set value in constant L3-06. The lower value of
both will be used as stall prevention level.
Stall prevention level during operation
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.40 Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory settings, lower the stall prevention level during operation.
Detecting Motor Torque
If an excessive load is applied to the machinery (overtorque) or the load suddenly drops (undertorque), you
can output an alarm signal to one of the multi-function output terminal M1-M2, M3-M4, or M5-M6.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (overtorque/undertorque detection
NO/NC) in one of the constant H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and
M5-M6 function selection).
The overtorque/undertorque detection level is the current level (taking the inverter rated output current as
100%) in V/f control, and the motor torque (taking the motor rated torque as 100%) in vector control.
6-47
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after overtorque
(warning is output).
2: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues (warning is output).
3: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; output is stopped upon detection.
4: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon detection.
5: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues (warning is output).
6: Undertorque detected continuously during
operation; operation continues (warning is
output).
7: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; output is stopped upon detection.
8: Undertorque detected continuously during
operation; output is stopped upon detection.
0 to 8
0
No
A
A
A
0 to 300
150%
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
0 to 4
0
No
A
A
A
0 to
300
150%
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
L6-01
Torque detection
selection 1
L6-02
Torque detection level 1
Open-loop vector control: Motor rated torque is
set as 100%.
V/f control: Inverter rated current is set as 100%.
L6-03
Torque detection time 1
Set the overtorque/undertorque detection time.
L6-04
Torque detection selection
2
See L6-01 to L3-03 for a description.
L6-05
Torque detection level 2
L6-06
Torque detection time 2
Output of torque detection 1 is enabled by setting
B or 17 for H2- and output of torque detection
2 is enabled by setting 18 or 19 for H2-.
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
6-48
Function
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
B
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
17
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
18
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
19
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Machine Protection
L6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and Operator
The relationship between alarms displayed on the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is
detected, and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.
Set
Value
Operator
Overtorque/
Overtorque/
Undertorque Undertorque
Detection 1
Detection 2
Function
0
Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
–
–
1
Overtorque detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning is
output).
OL3 flashes
OL4 flashes
2
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
OL3 flashes
OL4 flashes
3
Overtorque detection only with speed agree; output is stopped upon detection.
OL3 lights up
OL4 lights up
4
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon
detection.
OL3 lights up
OL4 lights up
5
Undertorque detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning
is output).
UL3 flashes
UL4 flashes
6
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
UL3 flashes
UL4 flashes
7
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output is stopped upon
detection.
UL3 lights up
UL4 lights up
8
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon
detection.
UL3 lights up
UL4 lights up
Setting Example
The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection.
• Overtorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
L6-02 or L6-05
Overtorque detection 1 NO
or overtorque detection 2 NO
L6-03 or
L6-06
L6-03 or
L6-06
*Overtorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated
output current (or motor rated torque).
6-49
• Undertorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
L6-02 or L6-05
L6-03 or
Undertorque detection 1 NO
L6-06
or ondertorque detection 2 NO
L6-03 or
L6-06
*Undertorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated
output current (or motor rated torque).
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input
If constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) is set to 7 (overtorque/undertorque detection level), the overtorque/undertorque detection level can be changed using the analog input A2 (refer to Fig 6.41.
Changing the overtorque/undertorque detection level using the analog input only affects the detection level 1.
The overtorque/undertorque detection level 2 cannot be changed by an analog input.
Detection level
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 input level
(4 mA)
Fig 6.41 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level Using an Analog Input
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)
Set
Value
7
6-50
Function
Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level
Content at 100%
Motor rated torque (vector control), Inverter rated current (V/f control)
Control Methods
Open
V/f
loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Yes
Yes
Yes
Machine Protection
Motor Overload Protection
The motor can be protected from overload using the Inverter's built-in electronic thermal overload relay function.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
E2-01
Motor rated current
Sets the motor rated current of motor 1.
This set value becomes the base value for motor
protection and torque limit. It is an input data for
autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*1
1.90 A
*2
No
Q
Q
Q
E4-01
Motor 2 rated current
Sets the motor rated current of motor 2.
This set value becomes the base value for motor
protection and torque limit. It is an input data for
autotuning.
0.32
to 6.40
*1
1.90 A
*2
No
A
A
A
L1-01
Motor protection selection
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General motor protection (fan cooled motor)
2: Inverter special motor protection (externally
cooled motor)
3: Vector motor protection
With applications where the power supply is often
turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit
cannot be protected even if this constant has been
set to 1, because the thermal value will be reset. If
multiple motors are connected to one Inverter, set
this constant to 0, and install a thermal relay in
each motor.
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
L1-02
Set the electronic thermal detection time in minutes.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Motor protection time conThe factory setting is 150% overload for 1 min.
stant
If the motor overload capability is known, set the
overload resistance protection time during hot
start to L1-02.
0.1 to
5.0
1.0 min
No
A
A
A
* 1. The settings range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter with 0.4 kW.)
* 2. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter with 0.4 kW.)
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
1F
Function
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Yes
Yes
Yes
Setting Motor Rated Current (E2-01 and E4-01)
Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in constants E2-01 (for motor 1) and E4-01 (for motor 2).
This set value is the base current for the internal thermal overload calculation.
6-51
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics (L1-01)
Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the applicable motor.
The induction motor's cooling abilities differ according to the motor type. Consequently, you must select the
electronic thermal protection characteristics.
Set L1-01 to:
0: to disable the thermal motor protection function.
1: to enable the thermal motor protection for a fan cooled general purpose motor (self-cooled).
2: to enable the thermal motor protection for an inverter motor (externally cooled).
3: to enable the thermal motor protection for a special vector motor (exernally cooled).
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time (L1-02)
Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.
The motor protection operation time is the time for that the motor can handle a 150% overload when it was
running with the rated load before (i.e. operating temperature was reached before applying the 150% overload). This time should be set is constant L1-02. The factory setting is 60 sec.
The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation
time (L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at 50 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)
E2-01 is set to 100%
Fig 6.42 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting Precautions
• If multiple motors are connected to one inverter, set constant L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect each of the
motors, use a control circuit that switches off the inverter output when one of the motors overheats.
• With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the motor cannot
be protected even if this constant has been set to 1 (enabled), because the thermal value will be reset after
inverter power supply switch off.
• For save overload tripping, set the value in constant L1-02 to a low setting.
• When using a general-purpose motor (standard motor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f1/4 (fre-
quency). Consequently, a low output frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even
when the output current is far below the rated current. If operating using the rated current at a low frequency, use a special motor externally cooled.
Setting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm
If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to other than 0) and you set H2-01 to
H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to 1F (motor overload OL1 pre-alarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be enabled. If the electronic thermal value reaches
minimum 90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
6-52
Machine Protection
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs
This function provides a motor overheating protection using a thermistor (PTC characteristic – Positive Temperature Coefficient) that is built into the windings of each motor phase.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Alarm operation selection
during motor overheating
Selects the operation when the input motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the alarm
detection level (1.17 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.
3: Continue operation (oH3 on the Digital Operator flashes).
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
L1-04
Motor overheating operation selection
Selects the operation when the motor temperature
(thermistor) input exceeds the operation detection
level (2.34 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.
0 to 2
1
No
A
A
A
L1-05
Motor temperature input
filter time constant
Sets the delay time constant for the motor temperature (thermistor) input in seconds.
0.00 to
10.00
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
Constant
Number
L1-03
PTC Thermistor Characteristics
The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.
Resistance (Ohms)
Class F Class H
Tr: Temperature threshold value
Temperatue
Fig 6.43 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics*
* The shown resistance value is for one motor phase. Normally the resistors are connected in series.
6-53
Operation during Motor Overheating
The operation when the motor overheats can be selected using the constants L1-03 and L1-04. Set the motor
temperature input filter time constant in L1-05. If the motor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be
displayed on the Digital Operator.
Error Codes If the Motor Overheats
Error Code
Details
OH3
Inverter stops or continues to operate, according to the setting in L1-03.
OH4
Inverter stops according to the setting in L1-04. The fault contact is activated
By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to E (Motor temperature
input) the motor temperature can be detected and OH3 respectively OH4 can be output if the motor overheats.
The terminal connections that are to be used are shown in Fig 6.44.
Inverter
Multi-function
contact input
Branch resistance
18 kΩ *1
Fault contact
output
Multi-function
contact output
Multi-function
contact output
PTC thermistor
*1
Multi-function
contact output
The resistance value of 18 kΩ is only valid when a 3-phase PTC with the characteristic
shown on the previous page is used.
Fig 6.44 Terminal Connections for Motor Overheating Protection
Setting Precautions
6-54
•
Because this function uses a voltage signal to terminal A2, pin 2 of the DIP-switch S1 on the control terminal board has to be turned to OFF for A2 voltage input. The factory setting is ON (A2 current input).
•
For the same reason the parameter H3-08 (analog input terminal A2 signal level) has to be set to 0 (0-10V
input).
Machine Protection
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction and Output Phase Rotation
If the motor reverse rotation is prohibited, a reverse run command will not be accepted, even if it is input. Use
this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)
In V/F mode it is also possible to change the output phase order by changing a parameter. This much easier
and faster than changing the wiring if the motor rotational direction is wrong. If this function is used a prohibition of reverse direction is not possible.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
b1-04
Name
Prohibition of reverse
operation
Description
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
2: Output Phase Rotation
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 2
0
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
A
No
No
6-55
Automatically Restart
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation after a
momentary power loss.
Restarting Automatically After Momentary Power Loss
After a momentary power loss, the Inverter can be restarted automatically to continue motor operation.
To restart the Inverter after power is recovered, set L2-01 to 1 or 2.
If L2-01 is set to 1, the inverter will restart, when power is recovered within the time set in L2-02. If the power
loss time exceeds the time set in L2-02, an UV1 alarm (DC bus undervoltage) will be detected.
If L2-01 is set to 2, the inverter will restart, when the main power supply is recovered as long as the control
power supply (i.e., power supply to the control circuit) is maintained. Consequently, alarm UV1 (DC bus undervoltage) will not be detected.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (DC bus undervoltage (UV)
detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the power returns
within the time for L2-02. When L2-02 is
exceeded, DC bus undervoltage detection.)
2: Enabled while CPU is operating. (Restarts
when power returns during control operations.
Does not detect DC bus undervoltage.)
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
0 to 2.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
L2-01
Momentary power loss
detection
L2-02
Momentary power loss
ridethru time
Ridethrough time, when momentary power loss
selection (L2-01) is set to 1.
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB) time
Sets the Inverter’s minimum baseblock time; when
the Inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7 times of the
motor time constant.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when
starting a speed search or DC injection braking,
increase the set values.
0.1 to 5.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
Sets the time required to return the Inverter output
voltage from 0 V to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s*1
No
A
A
A
L2-05
Undervoltage (UV) detection level
Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection
level (main circuit DC voltage).
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
150 to
210
190 V
No
A
A
A
*2
*1
*2
* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter. For a 400 V Class Inverter, double the values.
Setting Precautions
• Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
• To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, make settings so that RUN commands from
the control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.
• If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), an alarm UV1 (main circuit under-
voltage) will be detected when the momentary power loss exceeds 15 ms during operation.
6-56
Automatically Restart
Speed Search
The speed search function finds the actual speed of a motor that is coasting without control, and then starts
smoothly from that speed. It is also activated after momentary power loss detection when L2-01 is set to
enabled.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Control Methods
V/f
Open
with
V/f
Loop
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
2*1
No
A
A
A
0 to
200
120%
No
A
No
A
b3-01
Enables/disables the speed search function for the RUN command and sets the speed search method.
0: Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
Speed search
3: Enabled, current detection
selection (cur- Speed Calculation
rent detection
When the search is started, the motor speed is calculated and
or speed calacceleration/deceleration is performed from the calculated
culation)
speed to the specified frequency (motor direction is also
searched).
Current Detection
The speed search is started from the frequency when power
was momentarily lost or the maximum frequency, and the
speed is detected when the set search current level is reached.
b3-02
Speed search
operating current (current
detection)
Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage, taking
the Inverter rated current as 100%.
Usually not necessary to set. When restarting is not possible
with the factory settings, reduce the value.
b3-03
Speed search
deceleration
time (current
detection)
Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed
search.
Sets the time for deceleration from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output frequency.
0.1 to
10.0
2.0 s
No
A
No
A
b3-05
Speed search
wait time
(current
detection or
speed calculation)
When a speed search is performed after recovering from a
momentary power loss, the search operation is delayed for the
time set here.
If e.g. a contactor is used at the output side of the inverter set
this constant to the contactor delay time or more.
0.0 to
20.0
0.2 s
No
A
A
A
L2-03
Min. baseblock time
Sets the Inverter’s minimum baseblock time, when the inverter
is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Set the time to approximately 0.7 times the motor time constant.
If an overcurrent or undercurrent occurs when starting a speed
search or DC injection braking, increase the set values.
0.1 to 5.0
0.1 s *1
No
A
A
A
L2-04
Voltage
recovery time
Sets the time required to return the Inverter output voltage to
normal voltage at the completion of a speed search.
Sets the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum
voltage.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s*2
No
A
A
A
* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open loop vector control factory settings are given.)
* 2. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
6-57
Multi-function Contact Inputs
Set
Value
Function
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
61
External search command 1
OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed calculation (Calculates the motor speed, and starts search from calculated speed)
Current detection (Starts speed search from maximum output frequency)
Yes
No
Yes
62
External search command 2
OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed calculation (Calculates the motor speed, and starts search from calculated speed) (Same operation as
external search command 1)
Current detection: Starts speed search from set frequency (reference frequency when search command was
input).
Yes
No
Yes
64
External seach command 3
OFF: Inverter is base blocked
ON: Inverter starts operation using speed search (same operation as speed search 2)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Setting Precautions
• When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03
(invalid multi-function input selection) operation error will occur. Set either external search command 1 or
external search command 2.
• If speed search during startup is selected when using V/f control with PG, the unit will start from the fre-
quency detected by PG.
• If performing speed search using external search commands, design the control circuit so that the run com-
mand and external search command are both ON. These two commands must be kept on, at least for the
time set in parameter L2-03.
• If the Inverter output is equipped with a contactor, set the contactor operation delay time in the Speed
Search Wait Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 s. When not using a contactor, you can reduce the
search time to 0.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the Inverter starts the speed search.
• Constant b3-02 (current detection level for search completion) is effective only when current detection
speed search is selected. When the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is supposed to
be as completed, and the motor accelerates or decelerates to the set frequency.
• If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search after power recovery, lengthen the Minimum
Baseblock Time (L2-03).
Application Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed
• When using V/f control with or without a PG, always perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resis-
tance before using speed searches based on calculated speeds.
• When using open loop vector control, always perform rotational autotuning before using speed searches
based on calculated speeds.
• If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed, per-
form stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance again.
6-58
Automatically Restart
Speed Search Selection
The speed search method can be selected using b3-01. If b3-01 is set to 0 the search method is speed calculation. It has to be activated by a multi-function input (H1- set to 61 or 62).
If b3-01 is set to 1, the search method is speed calculation too, but speed search is performed at every RUN
command and has not to be activated by a multifunction input.
The same is valid for setting b3-01 to 2 or 3, only the search method is current detection and not speed calculation.
Table 6.1 Search Methods
Search Name
Speed Calculation
Calculates the motor speed when the search
starts, and accelerates or decelerates from the
calculated speed to the set frequency. The
direction of motor rotation is also detected.
Search Method
Current Detection
Starts speed search from the frequency when
the temporary power loss was detected, or from
the highest frequency, and performs speed
detection by watching the current level during
the search.
External search command 1 and external
External Speed Search search command 2 become the same operation
Command
calculation of the motor speed and starting the
search from the calculated speed.
External speed search command 1:
Starts speed search from the maximum output
frequency.
External speed search command 2:
Starts speed search from the frequency reference set before the search command.
Cannot be used with multi-motor drives, with
motors two or more sizes smaller than the
Inverter capacity, and high-speed motors (130
Hz min.)
In control method without PG, the motor may
accelerate suddenly with light loads.
Application Precautions
Speed Calculation
Search at Startup
The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi-function input terminals is shown
below.
OFF
ON
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Run command
Set frequency
reference
Starts using
calculated speed
Output frequency
b3-02
Output current
0.7 to 1.0 s
*Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.7*
Note:
If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the run command turns ON in a
short time, the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.
Fig 6.45 Speed Search at Startup (Calculated Speed)
6-59
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time shorter than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
OFF
ON
Start using
speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75 *1
*1. After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the
minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.46 Speed Search after Baseblock (Calculated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)
• Loss Time longer than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Start using speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Speed Search Wait Time
(b3-05)
Note: If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply break time is long,
operation may be the same as the search in case 1.
Fig 6.47 Speed Search after Baseblock (Calculated Speed: Loss Time &gt; L2-03)
6-60
Automatically Restart
Current Detection
Speed Search at Startup
The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below.
Run command
OFF
ON
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set frequency
reference
Maximum output
frequency or
set frequency
Output frequency
b3-02
Output current
Minimum baseblock time*
(L2-03)
* Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.48 Speed Search at Startup (Current Detection)
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss time shorter than minimum baseblock time
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Deceleration time
set in b3-03
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
b3-02
speed search operating current
Output current
*1
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)*1
*2
*2
Baseblock time may be reduced by the output
frequency immediately before baseblock.
After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for
the minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
Fig 6.49 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time &lt; L2-03)
• Loss time longer than minimum baseblock time
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Set frequency
Deceleration speed set in b3-03 reference
Output frequency
b3-02
Speed search operating time
Output current
Speed search wait time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time*
(L2-03)
Fig 6.50 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time &gt; L2-03)
6-61
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is
Lost
The frequency reference loss detection function can be used to continue operation at reduced speed using the
set value in parameter L4-06 as frequency reference value. When using an analog input as frequency reference
source, a frequency reference loss is detected, when the reference value drops over 90 % in 400 ms or less.
When an error signal during frequency reference loss shall be output externally, set H2-01 to H2-03
(multi-function contact output terminal M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to C (frequency reference lost).
Related Constants
6-62
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
L4-05
Operation when frequency
reference is missing
0: Stop
1: Operation (L4-06*fref@loss) inverter runs
with reduced speed.
Frequency reference loss means that the frequency
reference drops over 90% in 400 ms.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
L4-06
Output frequency adjustment after freq. reference
loss
If L4-05 is set to 1 and the reference is lost,
inverter will run at:
fout = L4-06*fref
before lossing.
0 – 100%
80%
No
A
A
A
Constant
Number
Name
Automatically Restart
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function)
If an Inverter error occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no error is detected, the
Inverter will automatically restart. This is called the auto restart function.
Set the number of auto restarts in constant L5-01.
The auto restart function can be applied to the following errors.
• OC (Overcurrent)
• RH (Braking resistor overheated)
• GF (Ground fault)
• RR (Braking transistor error)
• PUF (DC bus fuse blown)
• OL1 (Motor overload)
• OV (Main circuit overvoltage)
• OL2 (Inverter overload)
• UV1 (Main Circuit Undervoltage, Main Circuit MC Operation Failure)*
• OH1 (Motor overheat)
• PF (Main circuit voltage fault)
• OL3 (Overtorque)
• LF (Output phase failure)
• OL4 (Overtorque)
* When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)
If an error that is not listed above occurs, the protection function will operate and the auto restart function will
not work.
Auto Restart External Outputs
To output auto restart signals externally, set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2,
M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to 1E (auto restart).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
L5-01
Number of auto restart
attempts
Sets the number of auto restart attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a
speed search from the run frequency.
0 to 10
0
No
A
A
A
L5-02
Auto restart operation
selection
Sets whether a fault contact output is activated
during fault restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
Application Precautions
The number of auto restarts counter is reset under the following conditions:
• After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
• After the protection operation has been performed and an error reset has been input.
• After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.
Do not use the auto restart function for hoisting applications.
6-63
Inverter Protection
Overheating Protection for an Inverter-Mounted Braking Resistor
This function provides overheat protection for inverter-mounted braking resistors (Model: ERF-150WJ ).
When overheating of a mounted braking resistor is detected, an fault RH (mounted braking resistor overheating) is displayed on the Digital Operator, and the motor coasts to stop.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
L8-01
Protection selection for
internal DB resistor (Type
ERF)
Description
0: Disabled (no overheating protection)
1: Enabled (overheating protection)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
Multi-function Contact Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set Value
D
Details
Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheats or brake transistor fault)
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note: This function is not applicable for protecting external DB resistors. When external braking resistors are used together with the internal braking chopper,
L8-01 should be set to 0 to disable the internal DB resistor protection.
The most likely causes of RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) faults are that the deceleration time is
too short or that the motor regeneration energy is too large. In these cases, lengthen the deceleration time or
replace the Braking Resistor with one with a higher braking capacity.
INFO
6-64
Inverter Protection
Inverter Overheat Protection
The Inverter is protected against overheating using a thermistor that detects the heatsink temperature.
When the overheat temperature level is reached the inverter output is switched off.
To prevent a suddenly and unexpected stop of the inverter due to an overtemperature, an overheating
pre-alarm can be output. The temperature level for that pre-alarm can be set in constant L8-02. Using constant L8-03 the inverter operation when an overtemperature occurs can be selected.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
L8-02
L8-03
Name
Description
Overheat pre-alarm level
Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter
overheat detection pre-alarm in &deg;C.
The pre-alarm is detected when the cooling fin
temperature reaches the set value.
Inverter overheat (OH)
pre-alarm operation selection
Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat
pre-alarm goes ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time C1-09.
3: Continue operation (Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor
fault will be given in setting 3.
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
50 to 130
95&deg;C
No
A
A
A
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
Multifunction Output Settings: H2-01 to H2-03 (M1 – M6 Function Selection)
Inverter Overheat Pre-Alarm: “20”
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the heatsink temperature exceeds the overheat pre-alarm level set in L8-02.
Input Open Phase Protection
This function detects an open input phase by observing the DC bus ripple level.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
L8-05
Name
Input open-phase protection selection
Description
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Detects input current open-phase,
power supply voltage imbalance or DC bus
electrostatic capacitor deterioration.)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
1
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
A
A
A
Generally it is not recommended to disable this function.
6-65
Output Open Phase Protection
This function detects an open output phase by comparing the output current value of each phase with an internal set output open phase detection level (5% of inverter rated current). The detection will not work when the
output frequency is below 2% of the base frequency (E1-13).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
L8-07
Output open-phase protection selection
Description
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Output open-phase detected at less
than 5% of Inverter rated current.)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
with
V/f
Loop
PG
A
A
A
Normally there is no need to change the setting.
Anyway the function should be disabled if the motor capacity is very low compared to the inverter capacity.
Otherwise wrong output open phase errors could be detected.
Ground Fault Protection
This function detects the earth leakage current by calculating the sum of the three output currents. Normally it
should be 0. If the earth leakage current gets too high, the inverter output will be switched off and a GF fault
is shown on the display. The fault contact is activated.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
L8-09
Name
Ground protection selection
Description
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
It is not recommended to disable this function.
6-66
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
1
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
A
A
A
Inverter Protection
Cooling Fan Control
This function controls the fan that is mounted to the inverters heatsink.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
L8-10
Cooling fan control selection
Sets the ON/OFF control for the cooling fan.
0: ON only when inverter output is active.
1:ON whenever power is ON.
L8-11
Cooling fan control delay
time
Sets the time in seconds to delay turning OFF the
cooling fan after the inverter STOP command is
given.
Description
Control Methods
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
0 to 300
60 s
No
A
A
A
Selecting the Cooling Fan Control
Using constant L8-10 two modes can be selected:
0:
The fan is ON only when the inverter output is ON, i.e. a voltage is output. This is the factory setting.
1:
The fan is ON whenever the inverter power supply is switched ON.
If L8-10 is set to 0, the turn OFF delay time for the fan can be set in constant L8-11. After a stop command the
inverter waits for this time before switching OFF the cooling fan. The factory setting is 60 sec.
Setting the Ambient Temperature
The overload capability of the inverter depends on the ambient temperature. At ambient temperatures higher
than 45&deg;C (40&deg;C for IP20/NEMA1 types) the output current capacity is reduced, i.e. the OL2 alarm level will
be lowered.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
L8-12
Name
Ambient temperature
Description
Sets the ambient temperature.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
45 to 60
45 &deg;C
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
A
A
A
The ambient temperature must be set in constant L8-12.
6-67
OL2 Characteristics at Low Speed
At output frequencies below 6 Hz the overload capability of the inverter is lower than at higher speeds, i.e. an
OL2 fault (inverter overload) may occure even if the current is below the normal OL2 current level (see Fig.
6.51).
OL2 Alarm-Level*
* Note that the OL2 level depends on the setting of C6-01.
Fig. 6.51 OL2 Alarm Level at Low Frequencies
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
L8-15
OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds
Description
0: OL2 characteristics at low speeds disabled.
1: OL2 characteristics at low speeds enabled.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
1
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
A
A
A
Generally it is not recommended to disable this function. Otherwise the inverter life time might be shortened.
Soft CLA Selection
Soft CLA is a current detection level for the output IGBT protection. Using constant L8-19 Soft CLA can be
enabled or disabled.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
L8-18
Name
Soft CLA selection
Description
0: Disable (gain = 0)
1: Enable
It is absolutely not recommended to disable this function.
6-68
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
1
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
A
A
A
Input Terminal Functions
Input Terminal Functions
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control
Circuit Terminals
You can switch the Inverter run command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local (i.e., Digital
Operator) and remote (input method set in b1-01 and b1-02).
If any input from H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) has been
set to 1 (local/remote selection), this input can be used to switch over between local and remote.
To set the frequency reference source and RUN command source to control circuit terminals, set b1-01 and
b1-02 to 1.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
b1-01
b1-02
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Reference selection
Sets the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse input
0 to 4
1
No
Q
Q
Q
RUN command source
selection
Sets the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (digital multifunction
inputs)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Name
Description
You can also perform local/remote switching using the LOCAL/REMOTE key on the Digital Operator. When
the local/remote function has been set for one external terminal, the LOCAL/REMOTE key function on the
Digital Operator will be disabled.
INFO
6-69
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)
Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input
terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to perform baseblock commands using the terminal's ON/OFF operation,
and thereby to block the inverter output.
Clear the baseblock command to restart the operating using the speed search method set in b3-01 (speed
search selection).
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Function
8
External baseblock NO (Normally Open contact: Baseblock when ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
9
External baseblock NC (Normally Closed contact: Baseblock when OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Time Chart
The time chart when using a baseblock command is shown below.
Forward operation/Stop
Baseblock command
Input
Cleared
Frequency reference
Speed search
Output frequency
Coast to a stop
Fig 6.52 Baseblock Commands
If using baseblock commands with a variable load, do not frequently input baseblock commands during
operation, as this may cause the motor to suddenly start coasting, and may result in motor stalling.
• When a contactor between inverter and motor is used, always perform a base block command before
opening the contactor.
IMPORTANT
6-70
Input Terminal Functions
OH2 (Overheat) Alarm Signal Input
If a digital input is programmed for this function (H1- = B) an OH2 alarm message can be displayed on
the display by turning this input to ON. The fault contact will not be operated.
Multifunction Analog Input A2 Disable/Enable
If a digital input is programmed for this function (H1- = C) the analog input A2 can be enabled or disabled
by switching the digital input ON/OFF (ON – Analog Input A2 enabled).
Drive Enable/Disable
If a digital input is programmed for this function (H1- = 6A) the drive can be enabled or disabled by
switching the digital input ON/OFF (ON – Drive enabled).
If the input is switched OFF while a RUN command is active the inverter will stop using the stopping method
set in b1-03.
6-71
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold)
• With this setting, the multi-function input pauses acceleration or deceleration and maintains (holds) the
output frequency.
• Acceleration/deceleration is restarted when the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input is turned OFF.
• The motor will be stopped if a stop command is input while the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input
is ON.
• When constant d4-01 (the frequency reference hold function selecton) is set to 1, the held frequency will
be stored in memory. This stored frequency will be retained as frequency reference even after a power loss
and the motor will be restarted at this frequency when a run command is input again.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
d4-01
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets whether or not frequencies will be recorded
on hold command.
0: Disabled (when operation is stopped or the
power is turned ON again the frequency reference is set to 0.)
1: Enabled (when operation is stopped or the
power is turned ON again the inverter starts at
the previous hold frequency.)
This function is available when the multi-function
inputs “Accel/Decel Ramp Hold” or “Up/Down”
commands are set.
0 or 1
0
No
Name
Frequency reference hold
function selection
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Time Chart
The time chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below.
Power supply
Forward/Stop
Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Hold
Hold
Fig 6.53 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold
6-72
A
A
A
Input Terminal Functions
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals
(UP/DOWN)
The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Inverter frequency references by turning ON and OFF a
multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7.
To use this function, set two of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7
function selection) to 10 (UP command) and 11 (DOWN command). Be sure to allocate two terminals so that
the UP and DOWN commands are used as a pair. Otherwise an OPE03 alarm will be displayed.
The table below shows the possible combinations of the UP and DOWN command and the corresponding
operation.
Operation
Acceleration Deceleration
Hold
Hold
Up command
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Down command
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
The change of the output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration times. Be sure to set b1-02
(Run command selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal).
Related Constants
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
d2-01
Frequency reference upper
limit
Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a percent, taking the maximum output frequency to be
100%.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
No
A
A
A
d2-02
Frequency reference lower
limit
Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
A
A
d2-03
Master speed reference
lower limit
Sets the master speed frequency reference lower
limit as a percent, taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
A
A
Precautions
Setting Precautions
If multi-function input terminals S3 to S7 are set as follows, operation error OPE03 (Invalid multi-function
input selection) will occur:
• Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set.
• UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time.
6-73
Application Precautions
• Frequency outputs using UP/DOWN commands are limited by the frequency reference upper and lower
limits set in constants d2-01 to d2-03. Here, the frequency value from analog frequency reference input A1
becomes the frequency reference lower limit. If using a combination of the frequency reference from terminal A1 and the frequency reference lower limit set in either constant d2-02 or d2-03, the larger limit
value will become the frequency reference lower limit.
• If inputting the run command when using UP/DOWN commands, the output frequency accelerates to the
frequency reference lower limits set in d2-02.
• When using UP/DOWN commands, multi-step operations are disabled.
• When d4-01 (Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection) is set to 1, the frequency reference value
using the UP/DOWN functions is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is turned ON and the run command is input, the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has
been stored. To reset (i.e., to 0 Hz) the stored frequency reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command
while the run command is ON.
Connection Example and Time Chart
The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi-function contact input
terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4, are shown below.
Constant
Name
Set Value
H1-01
Multi-function input (terminal S3)
10
H1-02
Multi-function input (terminal S4)
11
Inverter
Forward
S1 operation/Stop
S2
Reverse
operation/Stop
S3 Up command
S4 Down command
Digital input
SN neutral
0 to 10 V analog
signal
A1 Frequency
reference lower limit
AC
Fig 6.54 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated
6-74
Input Terminal Functions
Output frequency
Upper limit
Accelerates to
lower limit
Same
frequency
Lower limit
Forward operation/stop
UP command
Reference
frequency reset
DOWN command
Speed agree*
Power supply
* The speed agree signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating/decelerating while the run command is ON.
Fig 6.55 UP/DOWN Commands Time Chart
6-75
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References (+/– Speed)
The +/– speed function increments or decrements the frequency reference from analog input by the value set
in constant d4-02 (+/– Speed Limit) using two digital inputs.
To use this function, set two of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact terminal inputs S3 to S7
function selection) to 1C (Trim Control Increase command) and 1D (Trim Control Decrease command). Be
sure to allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease command are used as a pair. Otherwise an OPE03 alarm will be displayed.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
d4-02
Name
Description
Setting
Range
+/- speed limits
Set the frequency to be add to or subtracted
from the analog frequency reference as a percent, taking the maximum output frequency to
be 100%.
Enabled when the increase (+) speed command
or decrease (-) speed command is set for a
multi-function input.
0 to 100
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
10%
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
Constant
Number
299H
Trim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Frequency Reference
The frequency references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown
below.
Set Frequency
Reference
+ d4-02
Set Frequency
Reference
- d4-02
Trim Control Increase
Command Terminal
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Trim Control Decrease
Command Terminal
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Frequency Reference
HOLD
Application Precautions
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference &gt; 0 and the speed reference
source is an analog input (A1 or A2).
• When the analog frequency reference value - d4-02 &lt; 0, the frequency reference is set to 0.
• If only one of the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a
multi-function contact input terminal, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selected) will
occur.
6-76
Input Terminal Functions
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing
When one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection)
is set to 1E (sample/hold analog frequency command), the analog frequency reference will be held from 100
ms after the terminal is turned ON, and operation will continue at that frequency.
The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.
Sample/hold
command
Analog input
Frequency reference
Fig 6.56 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency
Precautions
When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
When using sample/hold of analog frequency reference, you cannot use the following commands at the same
time. Otherwise operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selection) will occur.
• Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command
• UP/DOWN command
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command
Application Precautions
• When performing sample/hold of analog frequency reference, be sure to close the digital input for 100 ms
or more. If the sample/hold time is less than 100 ms, the frequency reference will not be held.
• The frequency reference value that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.
6-77
Switching Operation Source to Communication Option Card
The source of frequency reference and RUN command can be switched between a Communication option
card and the sources selected in b1-01 and b1-02. Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function
contact inputs S3 to S7 function selection) to 2 to enable operation source switchover.
If a RUN command is active, the switchover will not be accepted.
Setting Precautions
To use the operation source switching function make the following settings:
• Set b1-01 (frequency reference source) to a value different from 3 (option card).
• Set b1-02 (RUN command source) to a value different from 3 (option card).
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-02 to 2.
Terminal Status
Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection
OFF
Inverter
(Frequency reference and RUN command source are set in b1-01 and b1-02.)
ON
Communications Option Card
(Frequency reference and run command are enabled from communications Option Card.)
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands
(FJOG/RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG function operates the inverter at the jog frequency. It can be activated by using the terminal
ON/OFF operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need to input the RUN command.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7
function selection) to 12 (FJOG command) or 13 (RJOG command).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
d1-17
Name
Jog frequency reference
Description
Sets the frequency reference when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or
RJOG command is ON.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
400.00
6.00 Hz
Yes
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Q
Q
Q
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
6-78
Function
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
12
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
13
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Input Terminal Functions
Application Precautions
• Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands have the priority over other frequency references.
• When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).
Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors (External Error Function)
The external error function activates the error contact output and stops the Inverter operation. Using this function the inverter operation can be stopped on peripheral devices break down or other errors. The digital operator will display EFx (External error [input terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the number of the terminal at
which the external error signal is input. For example, if an external error signal is input to terminal S3, EF3
will be displayed.
To use the external error function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05
(multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal input level from peripheral devices
• External error detection method
• Operation during external error detection
The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in
H1-.
Input Level
(See Note 1.)
Set
Value
20
NO Contact
Yes
21
22
Yes
Yes
Yes
28
29
2A
Yes
Yes
2F
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Coast to
Stop
(Error)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Emergency
Stop
(Error)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2D
2E
Yes
Yes
2B
2C
Yes
Yes
Yes
Decelerate to Stop
(Error)
Yes
Yes
27
Detection
During
Operation
Operation During Error Detection
Yes
Yes
25
26
Constant
Detection
Yes
23
24
NC Contact
Error Detection Method
(See Note 2.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Continue
Operation
(Warning)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note: 1. Sets the input level at which errors are detected. (NO contact: External error when ON; NC contact: External error when OFF).
2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.
6-79
Output Terminal Functions
The digital multifunction outputs can be set for several functions using the H2-01 to H2-03 constants (terminal
M1 to M6 function selection). These functions are described in the following section.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
H2-01
Terminal M1-M2 function
selection
Multi-function contact output 1
0 to 37
0
No
A
A
A
H2-02
Terminal M3-M4 function
selection
Multi-function contact output 2
0 to 37
1
No
A
A
A
H2-03
Terminal M5-M6 function
selection
Multi-function contact output 3
0 to 37
2
No
A
A
A
During Run (Setting: 0) and During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
During Run (Setting: 0)
OFF The Run command is OFF and there is not output voltage.
ON
The Run command is ON or a voltage is being output.
During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
OFF The inverter is not outputting a frequency. (Baseblock, DC injection braking or stopped)
ON
The inverter is outputting a frequency.
These outputs can be used to indicate the inverter’s operating status.
Run command
OFF
Baseblock command
OFF
ON
ON
Output frequency
During run 1 output
OFF
During run 2 output
OFF
ON
ON
Fig. 6.57 Timing Chart for “During RUN” Output
6-80
Control Methods
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
Output Terminal Functions
Zero Speed (Setting: 1)
OFF The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level (b2-01).
ON
The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level (b2-01).
Output frequency
Zero-speed output
Zero speed level (b2-01)
OFF
ON
Fig 6.58 Timing Chart for Zero-speed
Inverter Operation Ready (Setting: 6)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output will be switched ON when the initialisation of the inverter at startup has finished without any faults.
During DC Bus Undervoltage (Setting: 7)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON as long as a DC bus
undervoltage is detected.
During Baseblock (Setting: 8)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON as long as the inverter output is base blocked.
Frequency Reference Source Selection (Setting: 9)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is ON when the digital operator is selected
as frequency reference source. If any other frequency reference is selected the output is switched OFF.
Run Command Selection Status (Setting: A)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the digital operator
is selected as RUN command source. If any other RUN command source is selected output is switched OFF.
Fault Output (Setting: E)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when any fault different
from CPF00 and CPF01 occurs. The output is also not switched at minor faults. (Refer to Chapter 7 for a
fault list.)
Minor Fault Output (Setting: 10)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when a minor fault occurs
(refer to Page 7-8 pp.).
6-81
Fault Reset Command Active (Setting: 11)
If a multifunction output is set for this function the output is switched ON as long as a fault reset command is
input at one of the digital inputs.
During Reverse Run (Setting: 1A)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON whenever a RUN command in reverse direction is active. The contact will also be ON during DC injection, Braking and Base
Block. It will not work when a forward RUN command is input.
During Base Block 2 (Setting: 1B)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched OFF as long as a Baseblock
command is input at a multifunction input.
Motor 2 Selection (Setting: 1C)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when motor 2 is selected.
During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
When a multifunction output is set to this function the output is switched ON when a frequency is output. It
will be switched OFF during Baseblock, DC injection braking or Stop.
Drive Enabled (Setting: 38)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the drive is enabled.
The drive can be enabled or disabled using a digital multifunction input.
6-82
Monitor Constants
Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor constants.
Using the Analog Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor constants.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1 to 38
2
No
A
A
A
Monitor selection (terminal FM)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output
(U1-) at terminal FM.
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set.
Gain (terminal FM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 (FM) voltage level gain.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is
equal to 10V/20mA output at terminal FM. Note
that the maximum output voltage/current is
10V/20mA.
0~
1000.0%
100%
Yes
Q
Q
Q
H4-03
Bias (terminal FM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage
level bias.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is
equal to 0V/4mA output at terminal FM.
The maximum output from the terminal is
10V/20mA.
-110.0 ~
+110.0%
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
H4-04
Monitor selection (terminal AM)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output
(U1-) at terminal AM.
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set.
1 to 38
3
No
A
A
A
Gain (terminal AM)
Sets the voltage level gain for multi-function analog output 2.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is
equal to 10V/20mA output at terminal AM. Note
that the maximum output voltage/current is
10V/20mA.
0~
1000.0%
50%
Yes
Q
Q
Q
H4-06
Bias (terminal AM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 2 voltage
level bias.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is
equal to 0V/4mA output at terminal AM.
The maximum output from the terminal is
10V/20mA.
-110.0 ~
+110.0%
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
H4-07
Analog output 1 signal
level selection (FM)
Sets the signal output level for multi-function
output 1 (terminal FM)
0: 0 to 10 V output
1: –10 V to +10 V output
2: 4 to 20 mA
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
H4-08
Analog output signal 2
level selection (AM)
Sets the signal output level for multi-function
output 2 (terminal AM)
0: 0 to 10 V output
1: –10 to +10 V output
2: 4 to 20 mA
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
H4-01
H4-02
H4-05
Selecting Analog Monitor Items
Some of the digital operator monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) can be output at the multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants, and set the constant number of
U1 group ( part of U1-) for the constants H4-01 respectively H4-04.
6-83
Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items
Adjust the output/current voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the
gain and bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06.
The gain sets the analog output voltage/current value which is equal to 100% of the monitor item.
The bias sets the analog output voltage/current value which is equal to 0% of the monitor item.
Note that the maximum output voltage/current is 10V/20mA. A voltage/current higher than these values can
not be output.
Adjusting the Meter
The influence of the settings of gain and bias on the analog output channel is shown on three examples in Fig
6.59.
Ausgangs-Spannung/
Output voltage/
-Strom
current
Gain: 170%
Bias: 30%
10V/20mA
Gain: 100%
Bias:
0%
3V/8.8mA
3V/8,8mA
Gain: 0%
Bias: 100%
Monitor item
(e.g. Output Frequency)
0V/4mA
100%
Angezeigtes Signal
(z.B. Ausgangsfrequenz)
Fig 6.59 Monitor Output Adjustment
Switching Analog Monitor Signal Levels
The values of some monitor items can be both, positive or negative. If these items shall be output at an analog
output, the signal level should be set to –10V to +10V (H4-07/08 = 1). Negative values will be output as negative voltage (–10V to 0) and positive values will be output as positive voltage (0 to +10V).
For monitor items that can have positive or negative values please refer to Chapter 5 User Constants.
6-84
Monitor Constants
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents
Related Constants
H6-06
H6-07
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Pulse train monitor selection
Select the pulse train monitor output items (value
of the part of U1-).
There are two types of monitor items that can be
set: Speed-related items and PID-related items.
1, 2, 5,
20, 24, 36
2
Yes
A
A
A
Pulse train monitor scaling
Set the number of pulses output in hertz when the
monitor item is 100%.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to make the pulse
train monitor output synchronously to the output
frequency.
0 to
32000
1440 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
Constant
Number
Name
Selecting Pulse Monitor Items
Some of the digital operator monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) can be output at pulse monitor terminal
MP-AC. Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants, and set the part of U1- (Status monitor) for H6-06. The
possible monitor selections are limited as follows: U1-01, 02, 05, 20, 24, 36.
Adjusting the Pulse Monitor Items
To adjust the pulse frequency output scaling, set the pulse output frequency which is equal to 100% of the
monitor item in constant H6-07.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to output the frequency synchronous with the Inverter's U-phase output frequency.
Application Precautions
When using the pulse monitor output, connect a peripheral device according to the following load conditions.
If the load conditions are different, there is a risk of characteristic insufficiency or damage to the inverter.
Using a passive load (power supply from output
terminals)
Output Voltage
(Isolated)
VRL (V)
Load Impedance (kΩ)
+5 V min.
1.5 kΩ min.
+8 V min.
3.5 kΩ min.
+10 V min.
10 kΩ min.
Load Impedance
External power supply
Using an external power supply
External Power
Supply (V)
12 VDC&plusmn;10%,
15 VDC&plusmn;10%
Max. Current
16 mA
Load impedance
Sinking current
6-85
Individual Functions
Using MEMOBUS Communications
You can perform serial communications with Programmable Logic Controls (PLCs) or similar devices using
the MEMOBUS protocol.
MEMOBUS Communications Configuration
MEMOBUS communications are configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial communications between master and slave are normally started by the master and the slaves respond.
The master performs serial communications with only one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the
address of each slave before, so that the master can perform serial communications using that address. A slave
that receives a command from the master performs the specified function and sends a response to the master.
PLC
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Fig 6.60 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter
Communications Specifications
The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item
RS-422, RS-485
Communications Cycle
Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Communications Parameters
6-86
Specifications
Interface
Baud rate:
Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600 and 19,200 bps.
Data length:
8 bits fixed
Parity:
Select from even, odd, or none.
Stop bits:
1 bit selected
Communications Protocol
MEMOBUS
Number of Connectable Units
31 units max.
Individual Functions
Communications Connection Terminal
The MEMOBUS communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Enable the terminating
resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter (seen from the PLC) only.
S1
RS-422A
or RS-485
Switch
O
F
F
1
2
Terminating
resistance
Terminating resistance (1/2W, 110 Ohms)
Fig 6.61 Communications Connection Terminal
1. Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
2. Use shielded cables for the communications cables, and use proper shield clamps
3. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior. See picture below.
IMPORTANT
Procedure for Communicating with the PLC
Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the Inverter.
2. Turn ON the power supply.
3. Set the required communications constants (H5-01 to H5-07) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the power supply, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the power supply once again.
6. Perform communications with the PLC.
6-87
Related Constants
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Reference source selection
Sets the frequency reference input source
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
1
No
Q
Q
Q
b1-02
RUN command Source
Selection
Sets the run command input source
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (digital multifunction
inputs)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
H5-01
Station address
Sets the Inverter station address [hex].
0 to 20
1F
No
A
A
A
H5-02
Baud rate selection
Sets the baud rate for MEMOBUS communications.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
0 to 4
3
No
A
A
A
H5-03
Communications parity
selection
Sets the parity for MEMOBUS communications.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
H5-04
Communications error
detection selection
Sets the stopping method for communications
errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using the deceleration
time in C1-02
1: Coast to a stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
H5-05
Communications error
detection selection
Sets whether or not a communications timeout is
to be detected as a communications error.
0: Do not detect
1: Detect
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
H5-06
Send wait time
Sets the time from the Inverter receiving data to
when the Inverter starts to send.
5 to 65
ms
5 ms
No
A
A
A
H5-07
RTS control ON/OFF
Enables or disables RTS control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only when sending)
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
Constant
Number
b1-01
Name
Description
*
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and
b1-02.
• Monitoring operation status of the inverter
• Setting and reading constants
• Resetting errors
• Inputting multi-function commands. (An OR operation is performed between the multi-function com-
mands input from the PLC and commands input from multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7.)
6-88
Individual Functions
Message Format
In MEMOBUS communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets
depends on the command (function) content.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
The space between messages must meet the following conditions:
PLC to Inverter
Command message
24 bits long
PLC to Inverter
Inverter to PLC
Command message
Response message
H5-06
setting
Time (Seconds)
5 ms min.
24 bits long
Fig 6.62 Message Spacing
Slave Address
Set the Inverter address from 0 to 32. If you set 0, commands from the master will be received by all slaves.
(Refer to “Broadcast Data” on the following pages.)
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. The three function codes shown in the table below are available.
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
Function
Command Message
Response Message
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
03H
Read memory register contents
8
8
7
37
08H
Loopback test
8
8
8
8
10H
Write multiple memory registers
11
41
8
8
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the memory register address (test code for a loopback address) and
the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
6-89
Error Check
Errors during communications are detected using CRC-16 (cyclic redundancy check, checksum method).
The result of the checksum calculation is stored in a data-word (16 bit), which starting value is FFFH. The
value of this word is manipulated using Exclusive OR- and SHIFT operations together with the data package
that should be sent (slave address, function code, data) and the fixed value A001H. At the end of the calculation the data-word contains the checksum value.
The checksum is calculated in the following way:
1. The starting value of the 16 Bit data-word, that is used for the calculation, has to be set to FFFFH.
2. An Exclusive OR operation has to be performed with the starting value and the slave address.
3. The result has to be shifted to the right until the overflow bit becomes 1.
4. When this bit becomes 1, an Esclusive OR operation with the result of step 3 and the fix value A001H has
to be performed.
5. After 8 shift operations (every time when the overflow bit becomes 1, an Exclusive OR like in step 4 has to
be done), perform an Exclusive OR operation with the result of the former operations and the next data
package (8 bit function code). Again the result of this operation has to be shifted 8 times and if needed it
has to be interconnected with the fix value A001H using an Exclusive OR operation.
6. The same steps have to be performed with the data, first with the higher byte and then with the lower byte
until all data are proceeded.
7. The result of these operations is the checksum. It consists of a high and a low byte.
6-90
Individual Functions
The following example clarifies the calculation method. It shows the calculation of a CRC-16 code with the
slave address 02H (0000 0010) and the function code 03H (0000 0011). The resulting CRC-16 code is D1H
for the lower and 40H for the higher byte. The example calculation in this example is not done completely
(normally data would follow the function code).
Calculations
1111 1111 1111 1111
0000 0010
1111 1111 1111 1101
0111 1111 1111 1110
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 1111 1111 1111
0110 1111 1111 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1100 1111 1111 1110
0110 0111 1111 1111
0011 0011 1111 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1001 0011 1111 1110
0100 1001 1111 1111
0010 0100 1111 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0100 1111 1110
0100 0010 0111 1111
0010 0001 0011 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0001 0011 1110
0000 0011
1000 0001 0011 1101
0100 0000 1001 1110
1010 0000 0000 0001
1110 0000 1001 1111
0111 0000 0100 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 0000 0100 1110
0110 1000 0010 0111
0011 0100 0001 0011
1010 0000 0000 0001
1001 0100 0001 0010
0100 1010 0000 1001
0010 0101 0000 0100
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0101 0000 0101
0100 0010 1000 0010
1010 0000 0000 0001
1110 0010 1000 0011
0111 0001 0100 0001
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 0001 0100 0000
D1H
40H
Higher Lower
Byte
Byte
Overflow
1
Description
Initial value
Address
ExOr Result
Shift 1
1
ExOr Result
Shift 2
0
1
ExOr Result
Shift 3
Shift 4
0
1
ExOr Result
Shift 5
Shift 6
0
1
ExOr Result
Shift 7
Shift 8
1
ExOr Result
Function Code
ExOr Result
Shift 1
1
ExOr Result
Shift 2
0
1
ExOr Result
Shift 3
Shift 4
0
1
ExOr Result
Shift 5
Shift 6
1
ExOr Result
Shift 7
1
ExOr Result
Shift 8
ExOr Result
CRC-16 Result
6-91
MEMOBUS Message Example
An example of MEMOBUS command/response messages is given below.
Reading Inverter Memory Register Contents
The content of maximum 16 inverter memory registers can be readout at a time.
Among other things the command message must contain the start address of the first register that is to be read
out and the quantity of registers that should be read out. The response message will contain the content of the
first and the consecutive number of registers that has been set for the quantity.
The contents of the memory register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits.
The following tables show message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and
frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Command Message
Slave Address
02H
Slave Address
02H
Slave Address
02H
Function Code
03H
Function Code
03H
Function Code
83H
Start
Address
Quantity
CRC-16
Higher
00H
Lower
20H
Higher
00H
Lower
04H
Higher
45H
Lower
F0H
Data quantity
08H
1st storage
register
Higher
00H
Lower
65H
Next storage register
Higher
00H
Lower
00H
Next storage register
Higher
00H
Lower
00H
Next storage register
Higher
01H
Lower
F4H
Higher
AFH
Lower
82H
CRC-16
6-92
Response Message
(During Error)
Error code
CRC-16
03H
Higher
F1H
Lower
31H
Individual Functions
Loopback Test
The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to
check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave no. 1.
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Command Message
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address
01H
Slave address
01H
Slave address
01H
Function code
08H
Function code
08H
Function code
89H
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
00H
Lower
00H
Higher
A5H
Lower
37H
Higher
DAH
Lower
8DH
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
00H
Lower
00H
Higher
A5H
Lower
37H
Higher
DAH
Lower
8DH
Error Code
CRC-16
01H
Higher
86H
Lower
50H
Writing to Multiple Inverter Memory Registers
The writing of inverter memory registers works similar to the reading process, i.e. the address of the first register that is to be written and the quantity of to be written registers must be set in the command message.
The to be written data must be consecutive, starting from the specified address in the command message. The
data order must be higher 8 bits, then lower 8 bits. The data must be in memory register address order.
The following table shows an example of a message where a forward operation has been set with a frequency
reference of 60.0 Hz for the inverter with the slave address 01H.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Higher
Lower
Higher
Quantity
Lower
No. of data
Higher
Lead data
Lower
Higher
Next data
Lower
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
Start
Address
01H
10H
00H
01H
00H
02H
04H
00H
01H
02H
58H
63H
39H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address
01H
Function Code
10H
Higher
00H
Start
Address
Lower
01H
Higher
00H
Quantity
Lower
02H
Higher
10H
CRC-16
Lower
08H
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
01H
Function Code
90H
Error code
02H
Higher
CDH
CRC-16
Lower
C1H
* No. of data = 2 x (quantity)
For the number of data value in the command message the double value of the data quantity must be
taken.
IMPORTANT
6-93
Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast
data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. These data can be read and written. They cannot be used for monitoring functions.
Register No.
0000H
Contents
Reserved
Run operation and input commands
0001H
Bit 0
Run/stop command
1: Run 0: Stop
Bit 1
Forward/reverse operation
1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bit 2
External error
1: Error (EFO)
Bit 3
Error reset
1: Reset command
Bit 4
ComNet
Bit 5
ComCtrl
Bit 6
Multi-function input command 3
Bit 7
Multi-function input command 4
Bit 8
Multi-function input command 5
Bit 9
Multi-function input command 6
Bit A
Multi-function input command 7
Bits B to F
0002H
Not used
Frequency reference (Set units using constant o1-03)
0003H to 0005H Not used
0006H
PID target value
0007H
Analog output 1 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726) → 10V = 660
0008H
Analog output 2 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726) → 10V = 660
Multi-function contact output setting
0009H
Bit 0
Contact output 1 (Terminal M1-M2)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Contact output 2 (Terminal M3-M4)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
Contact output 3 (Terminal M5-M6)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 3 to 5
Bit 6
Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7
Error contact (terminal MA-MC)
Bits 8 to F
000AH to 000EH Not used
6-94
Not used
Not used
1: ON 0: OFF
Individual Functions
Register No.
Contents
Reference selection settings
000FH
Bit 0
Not used
Bit 1
Input PID target value 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Bits 3 to B
Not used
C
Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
D
Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
E
Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
F
Not used
Note Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Register No.
Contents
Inverter status
0020H
Bit 0
Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1
Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Bit 2
Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Bit 3
Error 1: Error
Bit 4
Data setting error 1: Error
Bit 5
Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7
Multi-function contact output 3 (terminal M5 - M6) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to F
Not used
Error details
0021H
Bit 0
Overcurrent (OC), Ground fault (GF)
Bit 1
Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Bit 2
Inverter overload (OL2)
Bit 3
Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Bit 4
Braking transistor/resistance overheat (rr, rH)
Bit 5
Fuse blown (PUF)
Bit 6
PID feedback lost (FbL)
Bit 7
External error (EF, EFO)
Bit 8
Control board error (CPF)
Bit 9
Motor overload (OL1) or overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
Bit A
PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV)
Bit B
Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Bit C
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3), power loss
Bit D
Missing output phase (LF)
Bit E
MEMOBUS communications error (CE)
Bit F
Operator disconnected (OPR)
6-95
Register No.
Contents
Data link status
0022H
Bit 0
Writing data
Bit 1
Not used
Bit 2
Not used
Bit 3
Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4
Data integrity error
Bits 5 to F
Not used
0023H
Frequency reference
Monitors U1-01
0024H
Output frequency
Monitors U1-02
0025H
Output voltage (U1-06)
0026H
Output current
U1-03
0027H
Output power
U1-08
0028H
Torque reference
U1-09
0029H
Not used
002AH
Not used
Control terminals input status
002BH
Bit 0
Input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Input terminal S2 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
Multi-function input terminal S3 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 3
Multi-function input terminal S4 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 4
Multi-function input terminal S5 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 5
Multi-function input terminal S6 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6
Multi-function input terminal S7 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 7 to F
6-96
Not used
Individual Functions
Register No.
Contents
Inverter status
002CH
Bit 0
Operation
1: Operating
Bit 1
Zero speed
1: Zero speed
Bit 2
Frequency agree
1: Agreement
Bit 3
User-defined speed agree
1: Agreement
Bit 4
Frequency detection 1
1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
Bit 5
Frequency detection 2
1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01
Bit 6
Inverter startup completed
1: Startup completed
Bit 7
Undervoltage detection
1: Detected
Bit 8
Baseblock
1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9
Frequency reference mode
1: Not communication 0: Communication option
Bit A
Run command mode
1: Not communication 0: Communication option
Bit B
Overtorque detection
1: Detected
Bit C
Frequency reference lost
1: Lost
Bit D
Restart enabled
1: Restarting
Bit E
Error (including MEMOBUS communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
Bit F
MEMOBUS communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function contact output status
002DH
Bit 0
Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
Multi-function contact output 3 (terminal M5-M6) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 3 to F
002EH - 0030H
0031H
0032H - 0037H
Not used
Not used
Main circuit DC voltage
Not used
0038H
^ 100%; resolution 0.1%; without sign)
PID feedback (max. output frequency =
0039H
^ 100%; resolution 0.1%; with sign)
PID input (max. output frequency =
003AH
^ 100%; resolution 0.1%; with sign)
PID output (max. output frequency =
003BH
CPU software number
003CH
Flash software number
Communications error details
003DH
003EH
Bit 0
CRC error
Bit 1
Invalid data length
Bit 2
Not used
Bit 3
Parity error
Bit 4
Overrun error
Bit 5
Framing error
Bit 6
Time-out
Bits 7 to F
Not used
kVA setting
6-97
Register No.
003FH
Contents
Control method
Note Communications error details are stored until an error reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating).
Broadcast Data
Using broadcast data a command can be given to all slaves at the same time. The slave address in the command message must be set to 00H. All slaves will receive the message. They will not respond.
The following table shows the broadcast data. You can also write this data.
Register
Address
Contents
Operation signal
Bit 0
Run command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1
Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bits 2 and 3
0001H
Bit 4
External error 1: Error
Bit 5
Error reset 1: Reset command
Bits 6 to B
0002H
Not used
Not used
Bit C
Multi-function contact input terminal S5 input
Bit D
Multi-function contact input terminal S6 input
Bit E
Multi-function contact input terminal S7 input
Bit F
Not used.
Frequency reference
Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
ENTER Command
When writing constants to the Inverter from the PLC using MEMOBUS communications, the constants are
temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Inverter. To enable these constants in the constant the
ENTER command must be used.
There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable constant data in RAM, and
ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Inverter at the same time as
enabling the data in RAM.
The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written.
The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0910H.
Register No.
0900H
Write constant data to EEPROM, RAM is refreshed
0910H
Constant data are not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
INFO
6-98
Contents
The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM is 100,000. Do not frequently execute ENTER
commands (0900H) that write into EEPROM.
The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if these registers should be read out, the register address will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
Individual Functions
Error Codes
The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes.
Error Code
Contents
01H
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
02H
Invalid register number error
• The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
03H
Invalid quantity error
• The number of data packets (register content) being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data bytes in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
21H
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing constants.
• When writing constants, the constant setting is invalid.
22H
Write mode error
• Attempting to write constants to the inverter during operation.
• Attempting to write via ENTER commands during operation.
• Attempting to write constants other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when warning alarm
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
23H
Writing during DC bus undervoltage (UV) error
• Writing constants to the inverter during UV (DC bus undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via ENTER commands during UV (DC bus undervoltage) alarm.
24H
Writing error during constants processing
Attempting to write constants while processing constants in the Inverter.
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function.
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree.
• When the gap between two blocks (8 bit) of a message exceeds 24 bits.
• When the command message data length is invalid.
Application Precautions
If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not
return response messages to the master.
INFO
6-99
Self-Diagnosis
The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the functioning of the serial communication interface
circuits. This function is called the self-diagnosis function. It uses the connected communications parts of the
send and receive terminals to receive data sent by the Inverter and thereby to check if communication is performed normally.
To perform the self-diagnosis function use the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the inverter power supply, and set 67 (communications test mode) in constant H1-05 (Terminal
S7 Function Selection).
2. Turn OFF the inverter power supply.
3. Perform the wiring according to Fig 6.63.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the inverter power supply.
Fig 6.63 Communication Terminals Wiring for Self-Diagnosis
During normal operation, the Digital Operator displays “PASS” on the display.
If an error occurs, a “CE” (MEMOBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the error contact output will be turned ON, and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
6-100
Individual Functions
Using the Timer Function
The multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S7 can be used as timer function input terminals, and
multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 can be used as timer function output terminals.
By setting the delay time, you can prevent chattering of the sensors and switches.
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7) to 18 (timer func-
tion input).
• Set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to
12 (timer function output).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
b4-01
Timer function ON-delay
time
Set the timer function output ON delay time (dead
time) for the timer function input in 1-second
units. Enabled when a timer function is set in
H1- and H2-.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
b4-02
Timer function OFF-delay
time
Set the timer function output OFF delay time
(dead time) for the timer function input in 1-second units. Enabled when the timer function is set
in H1- and H2-.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
Setting Example
When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is
turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output
function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.
Timer function input
Timer function output
Fig 6.64 Timer Function Operation Example
6-101
Using PID Control
PID control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value. By combining proportional control (P), integral control (I), and differential control (D), you can even control system with
load fluctuation.
The characteristics of the PID control operations are given below.
P element
The output of a P-element is proportional to the input (deviation). With using a P-element
alone it is not possible to eliminate the deviation completely.
I element
The output of an I-element is the time-integral of the input (deviation). With using a P-element and an I-element together the deviation can be eliminated completely.
D element
The output of a D-element is the derivative of the input (deviation). By adding a D-element
the response can be improved rapidly.
PID Control Operation
To understand the differences between the PID control operations P, I, and D, the output share of each operation is shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference between the target value and
feedback value) is fixed.
Deviation
Time
PID control
I control
Output of P-, Iand D-element
D control
P control
Time
Fig 6.65 PID Control Operation
PID Control Applications
The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the Inverter.
Application
Control Details
Example of Sensor Used
• Machinery speed is fed back and adjusted to meet the target value.
Speed ConTachometer genera• Speed informations from other machinery can be input as the target value and syntrol
tor
chronous control using the actual speed feedback can be performed.
6-102
Pressure
Control
Pressure information is fed back and constant pressure control is performed.
Pressure sensor
Flow Rate
Control
Flow rate information is fed back and the flow rate is controled with high accuracy.
Flow rate sensor
Temperature Control
Temperature information is fed back and a temperature adjustment control using a
fan can be performed.
• Thermocouple
• Thermistor
Individual Functions
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Name
Description
Setting
Range
b5-01
PID control mode selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is D-controlled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value is D-controlled.)
3: PID control enabled (frequency reference +
PID output, D control of deviation)
4: PID control enabled (frequency reference +
PID output, D control of feedback value).
0 to 4
0
No
A
A
A
b5-02
Proportional gain (P)
Sets P-control proportional gain.
P-control is not performed when the setting is
0.00.
0.00
to
25.00
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
b5-03
Integral (I) time
Sets I-control integral time.
I-control is not performed when the setting is 0.0.
0.0 to
360.0
1.0 s
Yes
A
A
A
b5-04
Integral (I) limit
Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
b5-05
Differential (D) time
Sets D-control derivative time.
D-control is not performed when the setting is
0.00.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
b5-06
PID limit
Sets the limit after PID-control as a percentage of
the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
b5-07
PID offset adjustment
Sets the offset after PID-control as a percentage
of the maximum outut frequency.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
b5-08
PID delay time constant
Sets the time constant for low pass filter for
PID-control outputs.
Not usually necessary to set.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
b5-09
PID output characteristics
selection
Select forward/reverse for PID output.
0: PID output is forward.
1: PID output is reverse
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
b5-10
PID output gain
Sets output gain.
0.0 to
25.0
1.0
No
A
A
A
b5-11
PID reverse output selection
0: Limit to 0 when PID output is negative.
1: Reverse when PID output is negative.
Limit to 0 is also active when reverse prohibit is
selected using b1-04.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
0 to 100
0%
No
A
A
A
b5-12
Selection of PID feedback
loss detection
0: No detection of PID feedback loss
1: Detection of PID feedback loss. Operation
continues during detection, the fault contact
is not operated.
2: Detection of PID feedback los. The motor
coasts to stop at detection, and the fault contact operates.
b5-13
PID feedback loss detection level
Set the PID feedback loss detection level as a percentage using the maximum output frequency as
100%.
b5-14
PID feedback loss detection time
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level in s
units.
0.0 to
25.5
1.0 s
No
A
A
A
b5-15
PID sleep function operation level
Set the PID sleep function start level as a frequency.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
b5-16
PID sleep operation delay
time
Set the delay time until the PID sleep function
starts.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
b5-17
Accel/decel time for PID
reference
Set the accel/decel time for PID reference.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
b5-18
PID Setpoint Selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 to 1
0
No
A
A
A
b5-19
PID setpoint
PID-target value
0 to
100.0%
0
No
A
A
A
H6-01
Pulse train input function
selection
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
6-103
Monitor Items (U1-
)

Constant
Number
U1-24
Name
PID feedback value
Description
Monitors the feedback value when
PID control is used.
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
10 V: 100% feedback
Min.
Unit
0.01%
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
U1-36
PID input volume
PID input volume
10 V: 100% PID input
0.01%
A
A
A
U1-37
PID output volume
PID control output
10 V: 100% PID output
0.01%
A
A
A
U1-38
PID setpoint
PID setpoint
10 V: 100% PID target
0.01%
A
A
A
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
Control Methods
Open
V/f
loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Function
19
PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)
Yes
Yes
Yes
30
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PID control)
Yes
Yes
Yes
31
PID control integral hold (ON: Integral hold)
Yes
Yes
Yes
34
PID soft starter
Yes
Yes
Yes
35
PID input characteristics switch
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)
Set
Value
Control Methods
Open
V/f
loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Function
B
PID feedback
Max. output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
C
PID target value
Max. output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
PID Control Methods
There are four PID control methods. Select the method by setting constant b5-01.
Set Value
6-104
Control Method
1
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the deviation (difference
between PID target value and feedback value.)
2
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the PID feedback value.
3
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
deviation (difference between PID target value and feedback value).
4
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
PID feedback value.
Individual Functions
PID Input Methods
PID Target Value Input Methods
Select the PID control target value input method according to the setting in b1-01 (Reference Selection).
Normally, the frequency reference selected in b1-01 is the PID target value, but you can also set the PID target
value as shown in the following table.
PID Target Input Method
Setting Conditions
Multi-Function Analog Terminal A2 Input
Set H3-09 to C (PID target value). Also, be sure to set H6-01 (pulse train input function
selection) to 1 (PID feedback value).
MEMOBUS register 0006H
Set MEMOBUS bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 (enable/disable PID target value
from communications) to be able to use register number 0006H as the PID target value.
Pulse train input
Set H6-01 to 2 (PID target value).
Constant setting
If b5-18 is set to 1 the value in b5-19 becomes the PID target value.
If the PID function is used, the frequency reference value becomes the target value, which is set and shown
in Hz on the operator. Nevertheless, internally the PID target value is used in percent. I.e. the following
formula is used:
NOTE
PID target value [%] =
frequency reference [Hz]
max. output frequency [Hz]
• 100 %
PID Feedback Input Methods
Select one of the following PID control feedback input methods
Input Method
Setting Conditions
Multi-function analog input
Set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) to B (PID feedback).
Pulse train input
Set H6-01 to 1 (PID feedback).
Adjust PID target value and PID feedback value using the following items.
• Analog input: Adjust using the analog input terminal gain and bias.
INFO
• Pulse train input: Adjust using pulse train scaling, pulse train input gain, and pulse train input bias.
6-105
PID Adjustment Examples
Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce Proportional gain (P), and increase integral time (I).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition
To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I), and lengthen differential
time (D).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, lengthen the integral time (I) to suppress the vibration.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
6-106
Individual Functions
Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs when the vibration cycle duration is short, and the cycle duration is almost identical to the
differential time (D) set value, the differential operation is too strong. Shorten the differental time (D) to suppress the vibration.
If vibration continues even when the differential time (D) is set to 0.00 (D control disabled), reduce the proportional gain (P), or increase the PID primary delay time constant.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Setting Precautions
• In PID control, the b5-04 constant is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a
specified amount. When the load varies rapidly, Inverter response is delayed, and the machine might get be
damaged or the motor may stall. In this case, reduce the set value to speed up Inverter response.
• The b5-06 constant is used to prevent the output value of the the PID control calculation from exceeding a
specified amount. The value is set taking the maximum output frequency as 100%.
• The b5-07 constant is used to adjust PID control offset. The value is set in increments of 0.1%, taking the
maximum output frequency to be 100%.
• Set the filter time constant for the PID control output in b5-08. Enable this constant to prevent machinery
resonance when machinery friction is great, or rigidity is poor. In this case, set the constant to be greater
than the resonance frequency cycle duration. Increase this time constant to reduce Inverter responsiveness.
• Using b5-09, the PID output polarity can be inverted. If now the PID target value increases the output fre-
quency will be lowered. This function is usable e.g. for vacuum pumps.
• Using b5-10, you can apply a gain to the PID control output. Enable this constant to adjust the amount of
compensation if adding PID control output to the frequency reference as compensation (b5-01 = 3/4).
• When PID control output is negative, you can use constant b5-11 to determine what happens to the inverter
output. When b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (enabled), however, the PID output limited to 0.
• Using the b5-17 constant the PID target value can be raised or lowered with an accel./decel. ramp function
(PID soft starter).
The normally used accel./decel. function (C1- constants) is allocated after PID control so that, depending on the settings, resonance with the PID control and hunting in the machinery may occur. Using b5-17
this behaviour can be prevented.
The PID soft starter function can also be disabled or enabled using a multifunction digital input (H1-
has to be set to 34).
6-107
6-108
Fig 6.66 PID Control Block Diagram
-
Z
b5-05
+
+
B5-01
1 or 3
2 or 4
H6-01=1
-
H1- =C
Puls Train Input
PID Feedback
-1
H6-01=2
b5-18=1
+
Z-1
+
+
1/t
I-time
b5-03
+
+
Z-1
b5-01
PID ON
2 or 4
+
+
+
+
-
+
1/t
+
+
Z-1
1
1
-1
0
PID Output
Characteristic
b5-09
Output frequency
lower limit
Output frequency
lower limit 0
Output frequency
upper limit
PID delay time
constant
b5-08
PID Limit
b5-06
1
0
Output frequency
upper limit
Enable / Disable reverse operation
when PID output is negative
b5-11
Integral Reset
H1- =30
1 or 3
I- limit
b5-04
b5-05
Integral Hold
H1- =31
PID Set Point
(U1-38)
PID Input Volume
(U1-36)
0
b5-01=1 or 2
b5-01=3 or 4
b5-01=0
Multi-function input &quot;PID control
disable&quot; signal (H1- =19)
is OFF, PID is ON.
PID control is OFF under the
following conditions:
- b5-01=0
- during JOG command is input
Frequency reference
(U1-01)
1
P
Proportional
-1
gain
0
Input
b5-02
characterisic
switch
H1- =35
Set PID target value to multi
function analog input 2
H3-09=B
+
0
PID SFS
Cancel
H1- =34
b5-17
1
Frequency Reference
using multi-step
command
Set bit 1 of MEMOBUS
register 0FH to 1
0
1
2
3
4
Analog input 2
PID Feedback
Analog input 2
PID target value
MEMOBUS Reg. 06H
PID target value
Puls Train Input
PID target value
Constant b5-19
D1-16
D1-02
D1-01
Terminal A1
Serial Com
Option Card
Puls Train Inp.
b1-01
+
PID offset
b5-07
+
PID Gain
(b5-10)
PID output monitor
(U1-37)
Output
frequency
PID Control Block
The following diagram shows the PID control block in the Inverter.
Individual Functions
PID Feedback Loss Detection
When performing PID control, be sure to use the PID feedback loss detection function. Otherwise if the PID
feedback gets lost, the Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency.
When b5-12 is set to 1 and the PID feedback value falls below the PID feedback loss detection level (b5-13)
for a time longer than the PID feedback loss detection time (b5-14), a Fbl alarm (Feedback loss) will be displayed at the operator and inverter operation is continued.
When the same happens and b5-12 is set to 2 a Fbl fault will be displayed on the digital operator and the
inverter operation will be stopped. The motor coasts to stop and the fault contact is operated.
The time chart for PID feedback loss detection is shown below.
PID feedback value
Loss detection
level
(b5-13)
No Fbl
detection
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
Time
Fbl detection
Loss detection time’
(b5-14)
Fig 6.67 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart
PID Sleep
The PID sleep function stops the Inverter when the PID output value falls below the sleep operation level
(b5-15) for the sleep operation time set in parameter b5-16 or longer. The inverter operation will resume, if the
PID output value exceeds the sleep operation level for the time set in parameter b5-16 or longer.
When PID control is disabled, the PID sleep function is also disabled. When using the PID sleep function,
select decelerate to stop or coast to stop as the stopping method.
The PID sleep time chart is shown below.
PID output value
Sleep operation
level b5-15
Sleep operation
delay time
Internal run command
External run command
Operating
Operation
Sleep operation
delay time
Stopped
Run command has been input
Operation status output
Fig 6.68 PID Sleep Time Chart
6-109
Multifunction Digital Input Settings: H1-01 to H1-05 (Terminal S3 bis S7)
PID Control Disable: “19”
• When a multifunction input is set for this function it can be used to disable the PID function by switching
the input to ON.
• The PID target value becomes the frequency reference value.
PID Control Integral Reset: “30”
• Using this function the integral share value of the PID control can be reset by setting a multifunction input
to ON.
PID Control Integral Hold: “31”
• Using this function the integral share value of the PID control can be hold by setting a multifunction input
to ON. The value will be hold as long as the input is ON.
PID Softstarter: “34”
• Using this function the PID target value can be raised or lowered slowly using an accel./decel. ramp
function. The accel./decel. time can be set in constant b5-17. The function is active when the multifunction input with this function is ON.
• Note: The softstarter function works only if the frequency reference input becomes the PID target value
(refer to Fig 6.66).
PID Input Characteristic Switch: “35”
• Using this function the PID input characteristic can be inverted by setting a multifunction input to ON.
6-110
Individual Functions
Energy-saving
To perform energy saving, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1. Energy-saving control can be performed using both V/f control and open loop vector control. The constants to be adjusted are different for
each. In V/f control, adjust b8-04 to b8-05, and in open loop vector, adjust b8-02 and b8-03.
Related Constants
Factory
Setting
Change
During
Operation
Select whether to enable or disable energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
Energy-saving
gain
Sets the energy-saving gain in open loop vector control.
0.0 to
10.0
0.7
*1
Yes
No
No
A
b8-03
Energy-saving
filter time constant
Sets the energy-saving filter time constant in open loop
vector control.
0.00 to
10.0
0.50 s
*2
Yes
No
No
A
b8-04
Energy-saving
coefficient
Sets the Energy-saving coefficient depending on the setting in E2-11 (motor rated current).
Adjusts the value in 5% steps until the output power
becomes minimal.
0.0 to
655.00*3
*4
No
A
A
No
b8-05
Power detection filter time
constant
Sets the time constant for output power detection.
0 to 2000
20 ms
No
A
A
No
b8-06
Search operation voltage
limiter
Sets the limit value of the voltage control range during
search operation.
Set to 0 to disable the search operation. 100% is the
motor rated voltage.
0 to 100
0%
No
A
A
No
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
During
Operation
0.00 to
20.00
2.90 Hz
*
No
A
A
A
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
*
No
Q
Q
Q
Name
b8-01
Energy-saving
mode selection
b8-02
*
*
*
*
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Constant
Number
1.
2.
3.
4.
Details
The factory setting is 1.0 when using V/f control with PG.
The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min.
The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the constants.
The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
No.
Constant
No.
Name
Details
E2-02
Sets the motor rated slip. This set value will become the
Motor rated slip reference value for the slip compensation. It is automatically set during autotuning.
E2-11
Motor rated
output power
Set the rated output power of the motor in units of 0.01
kW.
This constant is an input data for autotuning.
Control Methods
Open
V/f
loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
* Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
6-111
Adjusting Energy-saving Control
The method of adjusting the energy-saving control function depends on the control method. Refer to the following when making adjustments.
V/f Control Method
In V/f control the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage reference.
• b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is preset assuming that motor and inverter capacity are the same. If the
inverter capacity differs from the motor capacity, set the motor capacity in E2-11 (Motor Rated Output
Power). Also, adjust b8-04 in steps of 5 % until the output power reaches its minimum. The higher the
energy-saving coefficient, the higher is the output voltage.
• To improve the responsiveness when the load fluctuates, reduce the power detection filter time constant
b8-05. If b8-05 is set too small, however, the motor rotations may become unstable under light load conditions.
• Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Conse-
quently the motor efficiency has to be controlled. To have optimized efficiency, the search operation varies the output voltage. Constant b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) limits the range for the voltage
search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, a range of 100% is equal to 200 V and for 400 V Class Inverters a range of 100% is equal to 400 V. Set to 0 to disable the search operation voltage limiter.
Open loop vector control
In open loop vector control, the slip frequency is controlled so that motor efficiency is maximized.
• Taking the motor rated slip for the base frequency as optimum slip, the inverter calculates the slip for the
optimum motor efficiency depending on the output frequency. In vector control, be sure to perform autotuning, and set the motor rated slip.
• If hunting occurs when energy-saving control is used in vector control, reduce the set value in b8-02
(Energy-saving Gain), or increase the set value in b8-03 (Energy-saving Filter Time Constant).
6-112
Individual Functions
Field Weakening
The field weakening function is used to lower the output voltage when the motor load changes to a low level
(no load). Thereby energy can be saved and motor audible noise is reduced.
Note that this function is designed for usage with only one low load condition that not changes. If the low
load condition changes, the field weakening function can not be optimized. In this case the energy saving
function should be preferred.
The function can be activated using a multifunction input. Therefore set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05
to 63.
Field weakening can only be used in V/f control.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
d6-01
d6-02
Name
Description
Field weakening level
Sets the Inverter output voltage when the field
weakening command is input at a multi-function
input.
Sets the voltage level as a percentage taking the
voltage set in the V/f pattern as 100%.
Field weakening frequency
limit
Sets the lower limit of the frequency range where
field control is valid.
The field weakening command is valid only at frequencies above this setting and only when the
speed is in agreement with the current speed reference.
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 100
80 %
No
A
A
No
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
No
Setting the Field Weakening Level (d6-01)
To set the field weakening level run the motor under low load condition and activate the field weakening
function using a multifunction input. Monitor the output current and raise or lower the field weakening level
until the output current reaches it’s minimum value.
Observe the following:
• Constant d6-01 can not be changed during operation (i.e. a RUN command is input).
• If the field weakening level is set too low, the motor may stall.
Multifunction Input Settings: H1-01 to H1-05 (Terminal S3 to S7)
Field Weakening Command: “63”
• If one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 is set to “63”, the field weakening function can be activated switch-
ing the terminal input to ON.
6-113
Setting Motor 1 Constants
In vector control method, the motor constants are set automatically during autotuning. If autotuning does not
complete normally, set them manually.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
E2-01
Motor rated current
Sets the motor rated current.
This set value will become the reference value for
motor protection and torque limits.
It is an input data for autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*1
1.90 A
*2
No
Q
Q
Q
E2-02
Motor rated slip
Sets the motor rated slip.
This set value will become the reference value for
slip compensation.
0.00 to
20.00
2.90 Hz
*2
No
A
A
A
E2-03
Motor no-load current
Sets the motor no-load current.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.00 to
1.89
*3
1.20 A
*2
No
A
A
A
E2-04
Number of motor poles
(Number of poles)
Sets the number of motor poles.
This constant is an input data for autotuning.
2 to 48
4 poles
No
No
Q
No
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842 Ω
*2
No
A
A
A
E2-06
Motor leak inductance
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.0 to
40.0
18.2%
No
No
No
A
E2-07
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50%
Motor iron saturation coef- of magnetic flux.
ficient 1
This constant is automatically set during rotating
autotuning.
0.00 to
0.50
0.50
No
No
No
A
E2-08
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75%
Motor iron saturation coef- of magnetic flux.
ficient 2
This constant is automatically set during rotating
autotuning.
0.00 to
0.75
0.75
No
No
No
A
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
Sets motor iron loss in W units.
0 to
65535
14 W
*2
No
A
A
No
E2-11
Motor rated output power
Sets the rated output of the motor in units of
0.01 kW. This constant is an input data for autotuning.
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
*2
No
Q
Q
Q
Note
* 1.
* 2.
* 3.
6-114
Name
Change
during
Operation
All factory-set constants are for a Yaskawa standard 4-pole motor.
The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
The setting range depends on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
Individual Functions
Manual Setting of the Motor Constant
Motor Rated Current Setting
Set E2-01 to the rated current value on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip Setting
Set E2-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate.
Motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency (Hz) – Rated speed (rpm) x No. of motor poles
120
Motor No-Load Current Setting
Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current at the rated voltage and rated frequency. Normally, the motor no-load
current is not written on the motor nameplate. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Factory setting is the no-load current value for a standard Yaskawa 4-pole motor.
Number of Motor Poles Setting
E2-04 is displayed only when V/f control method with PG is selected. Set the number of motor poles as written on the motor nameplate.
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting
E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot perform tuning, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from
the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting
accordingly.
• E-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75&deg;C of test report] &times; 0.92 (Ω)
• B-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75&deg;C of test repor]t &times; 0.92 (Ω)
• F-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 115&deg;C of test report] &times; 0.87 (Ω)
Motor Leak Inductance Setting
Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance in E2-06 as percentage of the motor rated
voltage. Make this setting when using high-speed motors because the standard value will be too high. (Normally, high speed motors have a low inductance compared to standard motors.) If the inductance is not written
on the motor nameplate, consult the motor manufacturer.
Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 and 2 Settings
E2-07 and E2-08 are set automatically during rotating autotuning.
Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting
E2-10 is displayed only in V/f control method and can be set to increase the torque compensation accuracy.
The motor iron loss has to be set in kW.
6-115
Setting the V/f Pattern 1
Using the E1- constants the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern can be set as needed. It is not recommended to change the settings when the motor is used in open loop vector control mode.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
*
*
*
*
*
6-116
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
E1-01
Input voltage setting
Sets the Inverter input voltage. This setting is used
as a reference value for protection functions.
155 to
255
*1
200 V
*1
No
Q
Q
Q
E1-03
V/f pattern selection
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset V/f patterns.
F:
Custom user-set patterns (Applicable for
setting of E1-04 to E1-10.)
0 to F
F
No
Q
Q
No
E1-04
Max. output frequency
(FMAX)
40.0 to
400.0 *2
50.0 Hz
No
Q
Q
Q
Output voltage (V)
E1-05
Max. voltage (VMAX)
0.0 to
255.0
*1
200.0 V
*1
No
Q
Q
Q
E1-06
Base frequency (FA)
0.0 to
400.0
50.0 Hz
No
Q
Q
Q
E1-07
Mid. output frequency
(FB)
0.0 to
255.0
*1
2.5 Hz
*3
No
A
A
A
E1-08
Mid. output frequency
voltage (VB)
0.0 to
400.0
15.0 V
*1
*3
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
400.0
1.2 Hz
*3
No
Q
Q
Q
0.0 to
255.0
*1
9.0 V
*1
*3
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
*4
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 V
*3
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 V
*5
No
A
A
Q
E1-09
Min. output frequency
(FMIN)
E1-10
Min. output frequency
voltage (VMIN)
E1-11
Mid. output frequency 2
E1-12
Mid. output frequency
voltage 2
E1-13
Base voltage (VBASE)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the
same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the
setting for E1-08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in
the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA)
&gt;E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output range.
Normally, this setting is not required.
Sets the output vltage at the base frequency
(E1-06)
These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
When C6-01 is set to 0, the upper limit of the setting range is 150.0 Hz.
The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
The contents of constants E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored when set to 0.00.
E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
Individual Functions
Setting Inverter Input Voltage
Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 so that it matches the power supply voltage. This set value
will be the reference value for the protection functions and similar functions (overvoltage level, stall level).
Setting V/f Pattern
The V/f pattern can be selected using constant E1-03. There are two methods of setting the V/f pattern: Select
one of the 15 preset pattern types (set value: 0 to E), or set a user-defined V/f pattern (set value: F).
The factory setting for E1-03 is F.
To select one of the existing patterns, refer to the following table.
Characteristic
Constant Torque
Characteristic
Variable torque
characteristic
High Startup
Torque (See
Note)*
Fixed Output
Operation
Application
These patterns are used in general applications where the load torque is fixed, regardless of rotation speed, e.g. for linear
transport systems.
These patterns are used for loads with
torque proportional to the square or cube of
the rotation speed, such as fans and pumps.
Select a high startup torque V/f pattern only
in the following cases.
• The wiring distance between Inverter and
motor is large (approx. 150 m min.)
• A large torque is required at startup
• An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter
input or output.
This pattern is used for frequencies of 60
Hz or higher. A fixed voltage is applied.
Set
Value
Specifications
0 (F)
50 Hz specifications
1
60 Hz specifications
2
60 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
50 Hz
3
72 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
4
50 Hz specifications, cubical torque characteristic
5
50 Hz specifications, quadratic torque characteristic
6
60 Hz specifications, cubical torque characteristic
7
60 Hz specifications, quadratic torque characteristic
8
50 Hz specifications, medium startup
torque
9
50 Hz specifications, large startup torque
A
60 Hz specifications, medium startup
torque
B
60 Hz specifications, large startup torque
C
90 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
D
120 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
E
180 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
* The high start up torque is provided by the fully automatic torque boost function, so normally there is no need to use this pattern.
When you select these patterns, the values of constants E1-04 to E1-10 are changed automatically. There are
three types of values for E1-04 to E1-10, depending on the Inverter capacity.
• 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
• 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
• 55 to 300 kW V/f pattern
The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages.
6-117
0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages
by 2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
1.3 2.5
60 Hz
Set Value 2
60 Hz
72 Hz
1.5 3
1.5 3
1.5
Set Value 3
• Variable Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
50 Hz
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
Set Value 6
• High startup torque (Set value 8: to b)
Set Value 8
50 Hz
Set Value 9
1.3 2.5
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
1.5
1.3 2.5
1.5
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
1.5
6-118
90 Hz
Set Value D
1.5
120 Hz
Set Value E
1.5
Set Value B
180 Hz
60 Hz
Individual Functions
2.2 to 45 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages
by 2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
60 Hz
Set Value 2
60 Hz
Set Value 3
72 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value 6
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
Set Value B
60 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
• Variable Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)
Set Value 8
50 Hz
Set Value 9
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
90 Hz
Set Value D
120 Hz
6-119
55 to 300 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages
by 2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
60 Hz
Set Value 2
60 Hz
Set Value 3
72 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value 6
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
Set Value B
60 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
• Variable Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)
Set Value 8
50 Hz
Set Value 9
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
6-120
90 Hz
Set Value D
120 Hz
Individual Functions
When E1-03 is set to F (User-defined V/f pattern), you can set constants E1-04 to E1-10. If E1-03 is set to
anything other than F, you can only read constants E1-04 to E1-10. If the V/f characteristics are linear, set
E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
INFO
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Fig 6.69 User-Set V/f Pattern
Setting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points:
• When changing control method, constants E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that
control method.
• Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) &gt; E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
6-121
Setting Motor 2 Constants
The E4- constants are for setting the motor constants for motor 2. In vector control mode the motor constants are set automatically during autotuning. If the autotuning does not complete normally, set them manually (refer to Page 6-115, Manual Settings of the Motor Constants).
Note: Autotuning for motor 2 can only be performed if one multifunction input H1- is set to 16 (Motor 2
selection). Otherwise motor 2 cannot be selected during autotuning (T1-00 will not be shown).
Related constants
Constant
Number
Control Methods
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Motor 2 rated current
Sets the motor rated current. This set value will
become a reference value for motor protection and
torque limits.
This constant is an input data for autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*1
1.90 A
*2
No
A
A
A
E4-02
Motor 2 rated slip
Sets the motor rated slip in Hz units.
This set value will become a reference value for
slip compensation.
This constant is automatically set during
autotuning.
0.00 bis
20.00
2.90 Hz
*2
No
A
A
A
E4-03
Motor 2 no-load current
Sets the motor no-load current.
This constant is automatically set during
autotuning.
0.00 bis
1.89
*3
1.20 A
*2
No
A
A
A
E4-04
Motor 2 number of poles
(number of poles)
Sets the number of motor poles.
This value is an input data for autotuning.
2 to 48
4 poles
No
No
A
No
E4-05
Motor 2 line-to-line
resistance
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance in Ω
units. This constant is automatically set during
autotuning.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842 Ω
*2
No
A
A
A
E4-06
Motor 2 leak inductance
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage
inductance as a percentage of the motor rated
voltage.
This constant is automatically set during
autotuning.
0.0 to
40.0
18.2%
*2
No
No
No
A
E4-07
Motor 2 rated capacity
Sets the rated output of the motor in units of 0.01
kW.
This constant is an input data for autotuning.
0.40 to
650.00
0.40
*2
No
A
A
A
E4-01
Name
* 1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the inverter’s rated output current. The values for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The factory setting depends upon the inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. The setting range will depend upon the inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0,4 kW is given.
Multifunction Input Settings: H1-01 to H1-05 (Terminal S3 to S7)
Motor Switch Command (Motor 2 Selection): “16”
• Using this setting a multifunction input can be used to switch over between motor 1 and motor 2 settings.
• If motor 2 is selected the inverter uses the V/f pattern 2 (E3- constants) and not V/f pattern 1.
6-122
Individual Functions
Setting the V/f Pattern 2
Using the E3- constants the V/f pattern for motor 2 can be set as needed.
It is not recommended to change the settings when the motor is used in open loop vector mode.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control
Control Modes
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
40.0 to
400.0
*1
50.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
255.0 *2
200.0 V
*3
No
A
A
A
E3-01
Motor 2 control method
selection
E3-02
Motor 2 max. output
frequency (FMAX)
E3-03
Motor 2 max. output
voltage (VMAX)
E3-04
Motor 2 max. voltage
frequency (FA)
0.0 to
400.0
50.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
E3-05
Motor 2 mid. output
frequency 1 (FB)
0.0 to
400.0
2.5 Hz
*3
No
A
A
A
E3-06
Motor 2 mid. output
frequency voltage 1 (VB)
0.0 to
255.0 *2
15.0 V
*2
No
A
A
A
0.0 bis
400.0
1.2 Hz
*3
No
A
A
A
0.0 to
255.0
*2
9.0 V
*2
No
A
A
A
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
E3-07
E3-08
Motor 2 min. output
frequency (FMIN)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the
same values for E3-05 and E3-07.
In this case, the setting for E3-06 will be
disregarded.
Motor 2 min. output
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in
frequency voltage (VMIN) the following manner:
E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) &gt;
E3-05 (FB) &gt; E3-07 (FMIN)
* 1. When C6-01 is set to 0, the upper limit of the setting range is 150.0 Hz.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class inverter. Values for a 400 V class inverter are double.
* 3. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
Selecting the Motor 2 Control Method (E3-01)
Using constant E3-01 the control method for motor 2 can be selected.
• The setting of this constant affects the autotuning function. If V/f or V/f with PG is selected the only pos-
sible autotuning method will be stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance.
Setting the V/f Pattern Characteristic
The principle of setting the V/f pattern 2 is the same as for V/f pattern 1. Please refer to Pages 6-117pp. for
details.
Note: The V/f pattern 2 settings are only used for motor 2, i.e. motor 2 has to be selected using a multifunction input (setting 16).
6-123
Kinetic Energy Buffering (KEB)
The kinetic energy buffering (KEB) function can be used to decelerate to stop after a sudden power loss using
the kinetic energy of the rotating machine to maintain the DC bus voltage. Thereby an uncontrolled coasting
of a machine can be prevented. The function can only be activated using a multifunction input that normally
is operated by a voltage drop relay. A wiring example is shown in Fig. 6.70.
L1
Varispeed F7
L2
L3
Terminal S3 to S7
to
Motor
H1-=66
SN
Voltage drop relay
Fig. 6.70 Wiring Example for KEB function usage
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Control Methods
V/f
Open
with
V/f
Loop
PG
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
L2-01
Momentary power loss
detection
0: Disabled (DC bus undervoltage (UV1)
detection
1: Enabled (Restarted when the power returns
within the time set in L2-02. When L2-02 is
exceeded, DC bus undervoltage is detected.
2: Enabled while CPU is operating. (Restarts when
power returns during control operations. Does
not detect DC bus undervoltage.)
L2-05
Undervoltage detection
level
Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection
level (main circuit DC voltage).
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
150 to
210*1
190 V*1
No
A
A
A
L2-06
KEB deceleration time
Sets the time required to decelerate from the speed
where the deceleration at momentary power loss
command (KEB) is input to zero speed.
0.0 to
200.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
L2-07
Momentary recovery time
Sets the time to accelerate to the set speed after
recovery from a momentary power loss.
0.0 to
25.5
0 s*2
No
A
A
A
L2-08
Frequency reduction gain
at KEB start.
Sets the reduction gain of the output frequency at
the beginning of deceleration at momentary power
loss (KEB).
Reduction = slip frequency before KEB operation
&times; L2-08 &times; 2.
0 to
300
100
No
A
A
A
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. If the setting is 0, the axis will accelerate to the specified speed over the specified acceleration time (C1-01 to C1-08).
Setting the Momentary Power Loss Detection (L2-01)
• L2-01 = 0
The inverter trips with undervoltage fault (UV1).
• L2-01 ≠ 0
The inverter decelerates the motor to stop using the KEB deceleration time (L2-06).
Setting the Undervoltage Level (L2-05)
This constant sets the voltage level for the DC bus at which a DC bus undervoltage (UV, UV1) is detected.
Normally there is no need to change this setting.
6-124
Individual Functions
Adjusting the KEB Deceleration Time (L2-06)
Sets the time that is used to decelerate to stop when a KEB command is input.
To set up this constant do the following:
• Increase L2-06 until a UV1 fault is detected during deceleration. (If L2-01 is set to 2, no UV1 will be
detected, but the motor will start to coast when the DC bus voltage drops too much.) The highest setting
value of L2-06, at which no UV1 is detected will be the maximum KEB deceleration time.
• Decrease L2-06 until a DC bus overvoltage (OV) is detected. The lowest setting value of L2-06, at which
no OV is detected, will be the minimal KEB deceleration time.
• Set a value for L2-06 that is somewhere in the middle between the maximum and the minimum KEB dece-
leration time.
Setting the Momentary Recovery Time (L2-07)
This constant can be used to set the time to recover to the set frequency reference if the power supply returns
while the KEB function is active. Note the following:
• The set time in L2-07 is the time that is taken to accelerate from the momentary frequency when the power
supply returns to the frequency reference value. (It works not like the normal accel. function.).
• If L2-07 is set to 0 sec. (factory setting) the normal acceleration times set in the C1- constants are
used.
Adjusting the Frequency Reduction Gain at KEB Start (L2-08)
Normally there is no need to change this setting.
• Increase the setting if an undervoltage fault occurs right after KEB start.
• Decrease the setting if an overvoltage fault occurs right after KEB start.
Multifunction Input Settings: H1-01 to H1-05 (Terminal S3-S7)
KEB Command NC: “65”
• Storing this setting for one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05, the KEB function can be activated using a NC
contact.
KEB command NO: “66”
• Using this setting for one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05, the KEB function can be activated using a NO
contact.
6-125
High Slip Braking
If the load inertia is large the high slip braking function can be used to shorten the deceleration time compared
to the normal deceleration time without using a braking option (braking resistor, braking resistor unit).
The function must be activated by a multifunction input.
Note:
•
The HSB function is not comparable with the normal deceleration function. It does not use a ramp
function.
•
HSB should not be used at normal operation instead of a deceleration ramp.
Related Constants
Constan
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
V/f
with
Loop
PG
N3-01
High-slip braking
deceleration frequency
width
Sets the frequency width for deceleration during
high-slip braking in percent, taking the maximum
frequency (E1-04) as 100%.
1 to 20
5%
No
A
A
A
N3-02
High-slip braking current
limit
Sets the current limit for deceleration during
high-slip braking in percent, taking the motor
rated current as 100%. The resulting limit must be
150% of the inverter rated current or less.
100 to
200
150%
No
A
A
A
N3-03
High-slip braking stop
dwell time
Sets the dwell time for the output frequency for
FMIN (1.5 Hz) during V/f control.
Effective only during deceleration with high-slip
braking.
0.0 to
10.0
1.0 s
No
A
A
A
N3-04
High-slip braking OL time
Sets the OL7 time when the output frequency does
not change for some reason during deceleration
with high-slip braking.
30 to
1200
40 s
No
A
A
A
Adjusting the HSB Deceleration Frequency Width (N3-01)
This constant sets the step width that is used for lowering the output frequency to achieve a large negative slip
and thereby to brake the motor.
Normally no adjustments should be necessary. Increase the value if DC bus overvoltage faults occur.
Adjusting the HSB Current Limit (N3-02)
The setting of constant N3-02 limits the output current while high slip braking is active. The current limit
affects the achievable deceleration time.
The lower the current limit the longer is the deceleration time.
Setting the HSB Dwell Time at Stop (N3-03)
At the end of a high slip braking the output frequency is held at the minimum output frequency for the time set
in N3-03. Increase the time when the motor coasts further on after HSB.
Setting the HSB Overload Time (N3-04)
N3-04 sets the HSB overload time. If the output frequency does not change for any reason although a HSB
command is given, an OL7 fault will be displayed and the fault contact will operate.
Multifunction Input Settings: H1-01 to H1-05 (Terminal S3 to S7)
High Slip Braking: “68”
If one of the multifunction inputs is set to “68” it can be used to activate the HSB function. The inverter will
brake the motor immediately after the HSB command was given. HSB cannot be stopped, i.e. the operation
cannot be resumed while HSB.
6-126
Digital Operator Functions
Digital Operator Functions
Setting Digital Operator Functions
Related Constants
Constant
Number
o1-01
o1-02
o1-03
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Monitor selection
Set the number of the 3rd. monitor item to be displayed in the Drive Mode. (U1-)
(Not on LCD operator.)
4 to 33
6
Yes
A
A
A
Monitor selection after
power up
Set the monitor item to be displayed when the
power supply is turned ON.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
1 to 4
1
Yes
A
A
A
0 to
39999
0
No
A
A
A
Set the run method selection key
(LOCAL/REMOTE key) function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between the Digital Operator and the constant settings.)
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
Name
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the
frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0:
0.01 Hz units
1:
0.01% (Maximum output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
rotation per minute (rpm) (Sets
the motor poles)
40 to 39999: User desired display
Set the desired values for setting
and display for the max. output
frequency.
Set digit number excluding
the decimal point.
Set the number of digits
below the decimal point to
display.
Example: When the max. output frequency value
is 200.0, set 12000.
o2-01
LOCAL/REMOTE key
enable/disable
o2-02
STOP key during control
circuit terminal operation
Set the STOP key in the run mode.
0: Disabled (When the run command is issued
from an external terminal, the Stop key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
User constant initial value
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the set constants as
user initial values.)
2: All clear (Clears all recorded user initial
values)
When the set constants are recorded as user initial
values, 1110 will be set in A1-03.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
Frequency reference setting method selection
When the frequency reference is set on the Digital
Operator frequency reference monitor, sets
whether the Enter key is necessary or not.
0: Enter key needed
1: Enter key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the frequency
reference without Enter key operation.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
o2-03
o2-05
6-127
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
o2-06
Operation selection when
digital operator is disconnected
Sets the operation when the Digital Operator is
disconnected.
0: Disabled (Operation continues even if the
Digital Operator is disconnected.)
1: Enabled (OPR is detected at Digital Operator
disconnection. Inverter output is switched off,
and fault contact is operated.)
o2-07
Cumulative operation time
setting
Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated from the set values.
0 to
65535
0
No
A
A
A
o2-08
Cumulative operation time
selection
0: Cumulative time when the Inverter power is on.
(All time while the Inverter power is on is
accumulated.)
1: Cumulative Inverter run time. (Only Inverter
output time is accumulated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
o2-09
Initialize Mode
1: US
2: Europe
1 or 2
2
No
A
A
A
o2-10
Fan operation time setting
Set the initial value of the fan operation time using
hour units.
The operation time accumulates from the set
value.
0 to
65535
0
No
A
A
A
o2-12
Fault trace initialize
0: Disable
1: Initialize (= zero clear) after setting ”1“ o2-12
will be returned to ”0“
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
Monitor Selection (o1-01)
Using constant o1-01 the third monitor item that is displayed in drive mode can be selected. This function has
no effect on the optional LCD-operator (JVOP-160).
Monitor Display when the Power Supply is Turned ON (o1-02)
Using constant o1-02 the monitor item (U1-) that is to be displayed on the Digital Operator when the
power supply is turned ON can be selected.
Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units o1-03)
Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using constant o1-03. The setting in o1-03 will
affect the display units of the following monitor items:
• U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
• U1-02 (Output Frequency)
• U1-05 (Motor Speed)
• U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start)
• d1-01 to d1-17 (Frequency references)
Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key (o2-01)
Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator.
If the key is disabled, it cannot be used anymore to switch over the frequency reference source or the RUN
command source between LOCAL and REMOTE.
6-128
Digital Operator Functions
Disabling the STOP Key (o2-02)
This constant is used to set whether the STOP key on the operator is active during remote control (b1-02 ≠ 0)
or not.
If o2-02 is set to 1, a STOP command from the operators STOP key will be accepted. If o2-02 is set to 0 it will
be disregarded.
Initializing Changed Constant Values (o2-03)
You can save the current Inverter constant setting values as user-set constant initial values. Therefore constant
o2-03 has to be set to 1.
To initialize the Inverter constants using the user-set initial values in memory set constant A1-03 to 1110. To
clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key (o2-05)
This function is active when frequency references are input from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1,
you can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN keys without using the
Enter key.
Operation Selection when the Digital Operator is Disconnected (o2-06)
This function selects the operation when the digital operator gets disconnected when a RUN command is
active.
If o2-06 is set to 0 the operation is continued.
If o2-06 is set to 1 the output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop. The fault contact is operated. When
the operator is reconnected an OPR (Operator disconnected) is shown.
Cumulative Operation Time (o2-07 and o2-08)
The inverter has a function that counts the operation time of the inverter cumulatively.
Using constant o2-07 the cumulative operation time can be changed, e.g. after a replacement of the control
board. If constant o2-08 is set to 0 the inverter counts the time whenever the power supply is switched ON. If
o2-08 is set to 1 the time when a RUN command is active is counted only. The factory setting is 0.
Initialize Mode (o2-09)
This function is used to change the factory settings of several constants. If o2-09 is set to 1 the constants will
be set to US standards. If o2-09 is set to 2 the constants will be set to European standards. After changing this
setting the inverter has to be reinitialized using constant A1-03.
Cooling Fan Operation Time (o2-10)
This function counts the operating time of the inverter mounted fan cumulatively.
Using constant o2-10 the counter can be reset, e.g. when the fan was replaced.
Fault Trace Initialize (o2-12)
This function can be used to initialize the fault trace by setting constant o2-12 to 1.
6-129
Copying Constants
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using a built-in EEPROM (non-volatile memory).
• Store Inverter constant set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
• Write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
• Compare constant set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter constants settings (VERIFY)
Related Constants
Constant
Number
6-130
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
o3-01
Copy function selection
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0 to 3
0
No
A
A
A
o3-02
Read permitted selection
0: READ prohibited
1: READ permitted
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
Digital Operator Functions
Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator use the following method.
Table 6.2 READ Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
1
Press the MENU key, and select advanced programming mode.
2
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter programming mode.
3
Select constant o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment key and Decrement
key.
4
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the constants setting display.
5
Change the set value to 1 using the Increment
key.
6
Press the DATA/ENTER key. The READ function will start.
7
If the READ function ends normally, “End” is
displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant
o3-01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the
display returns to o3-01.
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays
and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display
Meaning
You are attempting to set o3-01 to 1 while o3-02 is set to 0.
Read data length mismatch or read data error.
Tried to write constants to EEPROM on the Digital Operator, but unable to perform write operation.
Select READ Prohibited
This function prevents overwriting of the data that are stored in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator. When
o3-02 is set to 0 and o3-01 is set to 1 to perform a write operation, PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator and the write operation will be stopped.
6-131
Writing Constant Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, ue the following method.
Table 6.3 COPY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
1
Press the MENU key, and select advanced programming mode.
2
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the programming mode.
3
Select constant o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment key and Decrement
key.
4
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the constants setting display.
5
Change the set value to 2 using the Increment
key.
6
Press the DATA/ENTER key. The COPY function will start.
7
If the COPY function ends normally, “End” is
displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant
o3-01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the
display returns to o3-01.
If an error is displayed, set the constants again. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to
Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display
Meaning
Inverter product code or Inverter software number are different.
Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter capacity stored in the Digital
Operator are different.
The Inverter control method in which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter control method stored
in the Digital Operator are different.
Comparison between the constant written to the Inverter and the constant in the Digital Operator are
different.
After copying has ended, comparison between the checksum value of the Inverter constant area and
the checksum value of the Digital Operator constant area are different.
6-132
Digital Operator Functions
Comparing Inverter Constants and Digital Operator Constant Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter constants and Digital Operator constant set values, use the following method.
Table 6.4 VERIFY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
1
Press the MENU key. and select advanced programming mode.
2
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the constants monitor display.
3
Select constant o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment key and Decrement
key.
4
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the function setting display.
5
Change the set value to 3 using the Increment
key.
6
Press the DATA/ENTER key. The VERIFY
function will start.
7
If the VERIFY function ends normally, “End”
is displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant
o3-01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the
display returns to o3-01.
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays
and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display
Meaning
Verify error (Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match).
Application Precautions
INFO
When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the
Digital Operator.
• Inverter product and type
• Software number
• Inverter capacity and voltage
• Control method
6-133
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator
If you set A1-01 to 0, all constants except A1-01 and A1-04 are write protected, U1-, U2-, and
U3- will be displayed. If A1-01 is set to 1, only the constants A1-01, A1-04 and A2- can be read or
written, U1-, U2-, and U3- will be displayed. All other constants will not be displayed.
If you set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 1B (write constants permitted), you can write parameters from the digital operator when the terminal
that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing constants other than the frequency reference is
prohibited. You can, however, read the constants.
Constant
Number
A1-01
Name
Constant access level
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and
setting A1-01 and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be
read and set.)
2: ADVANCED
(Constants can be read and set in both quick
programming mode and advanced programming mode.)
0 to 2
2
Yes
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05, and if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, you cannot modify
the settings of constants A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32.
You can prohibit the setting of all constants except A1-00 by using the password function in combination with
setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
Related Constants
A1-01
A1-04
A1-05
6-134
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Constant access level
Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and
setting A1-01 and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be
read and set.)
2: ADVANCED
(Constants can be read and set in both quick
programming mode and advanced programming mode.)
0 to 2
2
Yes
A
A
A
Password
Password input when a password has been set in
A1-05.
This function write-protects constants of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed, A1-01 to A1-03 and
A2-01 to A2-32 constants can only be changed
after inputting the right password.
0 to
9999
0
No
A
A
A
Password setting
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
This constant is not usually displayed. When the
password (A1-04) is displayed, hold down the
RESET key and press the Menu key and A1-05
will be displayed.
0 to
9999
0
No
A
A
A
Constant
Number
Name
Digital Operator Functions
Displaying User-set Constants Only
The A2 constants (user-set constants) and A1-01 (constant access level) can be used to establish a parameter
set that contains only the most important parameters.
Set the number of the constant to which you want to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. Using
the advanced programming mode you can read and modify A1-01 to A1-03 and the constants set in A2-01 to
A2-32 only.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
A2-01
to
A2-32
Name
User setting constants
Description
Used to set the constant numbers that can be
set/read. Maximum 32.
Effective when the access level (A1-01) is set to
User Program (1). Constants set in A2-01 to
A2-32 can be set/read in programming mode.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
b1-01
to
o2-08
-
No
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
A
A
A
6-135
Options
This section explains the Inverter option functions.
Performing Speed Control with PG
This section explains functions with V/f control with PG.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
V/f
with
VecPG
tor
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
PG constant
Set the number of PG (pulse generator or encoder)
pulses.
0 to
60000
600
No
No
Q
No
Operation selection at PG
open circuit (PGO)
Sets the PG disconnection stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration to stop using the
deceleration time 1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or
machinery, do not make this setting.)
0 to 3
1
No
No
A
No
Operation selection at
overspeed (OS)
Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS)
fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration stop using the
deceleration time 1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or
machinery, avoid to use this setting.)
0 to 3
1
No
No
A
No
F1-04
Operation selection at
deviation (DEV)
Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation
(DEV) fault occurs.
0: Decelerate to stop (Deceleration to stop using
the deceleration time 1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop (Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV is displayed and
operation continued.)
0 to 3
3
No
No
A
No
F1-05
PG rotation
0: Phase A leads with forward run command.
(Phase B leads with reverse run command.)
1: Phase B leads with forward run command.
(Phase A leads with reverse run command.)
0 or 1
0
No
No
A
No
1 to 132
1
No
No
A
No
0 or 1
0
No
No
A
No
Constant
Number
F1-01
F1-02
F1-03
Name
Sets the division ratio for the PG speed control
card pulse output.
Division ratio = (1 + n)/m
(n = 0 or 1, m = 1 to 32)
F1-06
PG division rate (PG pulse
monitor)
F1-06 =
n m
This constant is effective only when a PG-B2 is
used.
The possible division ratio settings are 1/32 ≤
F1-06 ≤ 1
F1-07
6-136
Integral value during
accel/decel enable/disable
Sets integral control during acceleration/deceleration to either enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled (The integral function isn't used
while accelerating or decelerating; it is used at
constant speeds.)
1: Enabled (The integral function is used at all
times.)
Options
Constant
Number
Name
Description
F1-08
Overspeed (OS) detection
level
F1-09
Overspeed detection delay
time (OS)
Sets the overspeed detection method.
Motor speeds that continue to exceed the frequency value set in F1-08 (set as percentage of the
maximum output frequency) for the time set in
F1-09 are detected as overspeed faults.
F1-10
Excessive speed deviation
(DEV) detection level
F1-11
Excessive speed deviation
detection delay time
(DEV)
F1-12
Number of PG gear teeth 1 Sets the number of teeth on the gears if there are
gears between the PG and the motor.
F1-13
Number of PG gear teeth 2
Sets the speed deviation detection method.
Any speed deviation above the F1-10 set level
(set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency) that continues for the time set in F1-11 is
detected as a speed deviation.
Speed deviation is the difference between actual
motor speed and the speed reference command.
Input pulses from PG x 60
F1-01
x F1-13
F1-12
Control Methods
Open
V/f
Loop
with
V/f
VecPG
tor
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 120
115%
No
No
A
No
0.0 to 2.0
1.0 s
No
No
A
No
0 to 50
10%
No
No
A
No
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 s
No
No
A
No
0
No
No
A
No
0
No
No
A
No
2.0 s
No
No
A
No
0 to 1000
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if one of these constants is set to 0.
F1-14
PG open-circuit detection
delay time
Used to set the PG disconnection detection time.
PGO will be detected if the detection time continues beyond the set time.
0.0 to
10.0
Using PG Speed Control Card
There are four types of PG Speed Control Card that can be used in V/f control with PG.
• PG-A2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with open collector.
• PG-B2: A/B-phase pulse input, compatible with complimentary outputs.
• PG-D2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with line drivers (RS-422).
• PG-X2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers (RS-422).
For the mounting instructions, specifications and connection diagrams refer to page 2-32.
Setting Number of PG Pulses (F1-01)
Set the number of PG (Pulse Generator/Encoder) pulses in pulses/rotation.
Suit the PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction (F1-05)
Constant F1-05 suits the PG rotation direction to the motor rotation direction. If the motor is rotating forwards,
set whether it is A-phase leads or B-phase leads. Make this setting when using PG-B2 or PG-X2.
Inverter
Motor
PG (encoder)
Forward
command
Pulse output
A-phase leads when set value = 0
B-phase leads when set value = 1
A-phase
A-phase
B-phase
B-phase
6-137
Example: Forward rotation of standard motor (PG)
Forward
command
Motor output axis rotates
counter-clockwise during Inverter forward command.
Rotation
(CCW)
A-phase
B-phase
With the used PG the A-phase leads (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.
Generally, the A-phase leads when the rotation direction is counter-clockwise (CCW) seen from the shaft side
(FWD command is input).
Setting Number of Gear Teeth Between PG and Motor (F1-12 and F1-13)
If there are gears between the motor and PG, the gear ratio can be set using F1-12 and F1-13.
When the number of gear teeth has been set, the number of motor rotations within the Inverter is calculated
using the following formula.
No. of motor rotations (r/min.) = No. of input pulses from PG &times; 60 / F1-01 &times; F1-13 (No. of gear teeth on PG
side) / F1-12 (No. of gear teeth on motor side)
Integral Operation During Acceleration and Deceleration (F1-07)
You can select whether to enable or disable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration.
To make the motor speed matching the frequency reference as closely as possible even during acceleration and
deceleration, set F1-07 to 1. Refer also to Page 6-40
If F1-01 is set to 1, overshoot or undershoot may occur easily immediately after acceleration and deceleration. To minimize the possibility of overshoot or undershoot occurring, set F1-01 to 0.
IMPORTANT
Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Dividing Ratio (F1-06)
This function is enabled only when using PG speed control card PG-B2. Set the dividing ratio for the PG pulse
monitor output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the two lower place digits.
The dividing ratio is calculated as follows:
Dividing ratio = (1 + n)/m (Setting range) n: 0 or 1, m: 1 to 32
F1-06 =

n
m
The dividing ratio can be set within the following range: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1. For example, if the dividing ratio is
1/2 (set value 2), half of the number of pulses from the PG are output at the pulse monitor.
6-138
Options
Detecting PG Open Circuit (F1-02 and F1-14)
Constant F1-02 select the stopping method when a PG disconnection is detected.
PG open (PGO) is only detected when the inverter is running at least with a frequency reference higher than
1% of the maximum output frequency or above the minimum frequency (E1-09) and the PG feedback signal is
missing for the time set in F1-14 or longer.
Detecting Motor Overspeed (F1-03, F1-08 and F1-09)
An error is detected when the number of motor rotations exceeds the set limit. An overspeed (OS) is detected
when the motor speed continues to exceed the set frequency value in F1-08 for a time longer than set in F1-09.
After detecting an overspeed (OS), the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-03.
Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference (F1-04, F1-10
and F1-11)
An error is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the speed reference and the actual
motor speed) is too great. Speed deviation (DEV) is only detected after a speed agreement (speed reference
and actual motor speed are within the setting range of L4-02) and if a speed deviation higher than the set value
in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the Inverter stops
according to the setting in F1-04.
6-139
6-140
7
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for Inverter and motor problems.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................7-2
Troubleshooting .........................................................7-15
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter. The alarm functions include fault detection,
alarm detection, operation error detection, and autotuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates, and the Inverter output is switched OFF
causing the motor to coast to stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify the fault and to correct the causes.
Use one of the following methods to reset the fault before restarting the Inverter:
• Set a multi-function contact input (H1-01 to H1-05) to 14 (Fault Reset) and turn ON the error reset signal.
• Press the RESET key on the Digital Operator.
• Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Display
Meaning
Corrective Actions
Overcurrent
The Inverter output current exceeded
the overcurrent detection level.
• A short-circuit or ground fault
occurred at the Inverter output. (A
short or ground fault can be caused
by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
• The load is too large or the accelera- Reset the fault after correcting its
tion time is too short.
cause.
• A special-purpose motor or motor
with a capacity that is too large for
the Inverter is used.
• A magnetic switch was switched at
the Inverter output while running.
Ground Fault
The ground fault current at the
Inverter output exceeded approximately 50% of the Inverter rated output current.
A ground fault occurred at the Inverter
output. (A ground fault can be caused Reset the fault after correcting its
by motor burn damage, worn insula- cause.
tion, or a damaged cable.)
Fuse Blown
The fuse in the main circuit is blown.
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
the overvoltage detection level.
200 V class: Approx. 410 V
400 V class: Approx. 820 V
7-2
Probable Causes
The output transistor has failed
because of a short-circuit or ground
fault at the Inverter output.
• Check the motor and cables for
short circuits or insulation failures.
• Replace the Inverter after correcting the cause.
The deceleration time is too short and
Increase the deceleration time or
the regenerative energy from the
connect a braking option.
motor is too large.
The power supply voltage is too high.
Decrease the voltage so that it is
within the inverters specifications.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The main circuit DC voltage is below
the Undervoltage Detection Level
(L2-05).
200 V class: Approx. 190 V
400 V class: Approx. 380 V
Main Circuit MC Operation Failure
The MC stopped responding during
Inverter operation. (Applicable
Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW)
Control Power Fault
The control power supply voltage
dropped.
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
• An open-phase error occurred at the
input power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
• The wiring terminals for the input
Reset the fault after correcting its
power supply are loose.
cause.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
power supply are too large.
• A fault occurred in the inrush current prevention circuit.
---
Inrush Current Prevention Circuit
Fault
Overheating occurred in the inrush
resistor.
• The MC in the main circuit failed.
The MC did not respond for 10 s after • The MC excitation coil is burned
the MC ON signal has been output.
out.
(Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW)
• Try turning the power supply
off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
continues to occur.
• Try turning the power supply
off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
continues to occur.
• An open-phase occurred in the input
power supply.
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
• A momentary power loss occurred.
The main circuit DC bus voltage oscil• The wiring terminals for the input
lates unusually (not when regeneratReset the fault after correcting its
power supply are loose.
ing).
cause.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
This fault is detected when L8-05 is
power supply are too high.
set to &quot;Enabled.&quot;
• The voltage balance between the
phases is bad.
Output Open-phase
An open-phase occurred at the
Inverter output.
This fault is detected when L8-07 is
set to &quot;Enabled.&quot;
(
)
• There is a broken wire in the output
cable.
Reset the fault after correcting its
• There is a broken wire in the motorcause.
winding.
• The output terminals are loose.
The motor being used has a capacity
less than 5% of the Inverter's maximum motor capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the setting in L8-02 There is a heat source nearby.
or 105&deg;C.
OH: The temperature exceeded the
setting in L8-02 (Stopping method can
be changed by L8-03.).
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
OH1: The temperature exceeded
105&deg;C (Stopping method: Coast to
stop).
Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped
Check the motor and Inverter
capacity.
Install a cooling unit.
Remove the heat source.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact
your sales representative.)
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
7-3
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
Motor Overheating Alarm
The Inverter will stop or will continue
The motor has overheated.
to operate according to the setting of
L1-03.
Motor Overheating Fault
The Inverter will stop according to the The motor has overheated.
setting of L1-04.
Corrective Actions
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature
input at terminal A2.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature
input at terminal A2.
• Reduce the load, increase the
Inverter Mounted Braking Resistor
The deceleration time is too short and
deceleration time, or reduce the
Overheating (ERF-type)
The braking resistor is overheated and the regenerative energy from the
motor speed.
the protection function has operated if motor is too large.
• Change to a Braking Resistor
it has been enabled in L8-01.
Unit.
Internal Braking Transistor Fault
The braking transistor is not operating
properly.
-
• Try turning the power supply
off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
continues to occur.
The load is too heavy. The acceleraCheck the size of the load and the
tion time, deceleration time, and cycle length of the acceleration, decelertime are too short.
ation, and cycle times.
Motor Overload
The motor overload protection funcThe V/f characteristics voltage is too
tion has operated based on the internal
high or too low.
electronic thermal value.
The Motor Rated Current (E2-01) is
incorrect.
Check the Motor Rated Current
Setting (E2-01).
The load is too heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time and cycle
time are too short.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Inverter Overload
The Inverter overload protection funcThe V/f characteristics voltage is too
tion has operated based on the internal
high or too low.
electronic thermal value.
The Inverter capacity is too low.
Overtorque Detected 1
There has been a torque higher than
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the
time in L6-03.
Overtorque Detected 2
There has been a torque higher than
the setting in L6-05 for longer than the
time in L6-06.
7-4
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Replace the Inverter with one that
has a larger capacity.
–
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
overtorque.
-
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
overtorque.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
High-slip Braking OL
The output frequency did not change
for longer than the time set in N3-04.
The inertia of the connected machine
is too large.
Make sure the load is an inertial
load.
–
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
undertorque.
–
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
undertorque.
Undertorque Detected 1
There has been a torque lower than the
setting in L6-02 for longer than the
time in L6-03.
Undertorque Detected 2
There has been a torque lower than the
setting in L6-05 for longer than the
time in L6-06.
Overspeed
The speed has been higher than the
setting in F1-08 for longer than the
time in F1-09.
PG Disconnection Detected
No PG pulses were input when the
Inverter was outputting a frequency
(soft start output ≥ E1-09).
Corrective Actions
Overshooting/Undershooting are
occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
Check the reference circuit and
reference gain.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't Check the settings in F1-08 and
appropriate.
F1-09.
There is a break in the PG wiring.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Fix the wiring.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
Supply power to the PG properly.
Wrong brake control sequence when a Check wheather the brake is
brake is used.
opened at a RUN command.
The load is too heavy.
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been higher
than the setting in F1-10 for longer
than the time in F1-11.
Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and deceleration Lengthen the acceleration time
time are too short.
and deceleration time.
The load is locked.
Check the mechanical system.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't Check the settings in F1-10 and
appropriate.
F1-11.
Wrong brake control sequence when a Check wheather the brake is
brake is used.
opened at a RUN command.
Control Fault
The torque limit was reached continuously for 3 seconds or longer during a
deceleration stop during open-loop
vector control.
–
Check the motor constants.
PID Feedback Lost
A PID feedback loss detection is
enabled (b5-12 ≠ 0) and the PID feedback input was less than b5-13 (PID
feedback loss detection level) for
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID
feedback loss detection time).
–
• Check the PID feedback signal
source for correct operation.
• Check the wiring.
7-5
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
External fault input from Communications Option Card
–
Check the Communications
Option Card and communications
signals.
External fault (Input terminal 3)
External fault (Input terminal 4)
External fault (Input terminal 5)
An &quot;external fault&quot; was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
Remove the cause of the external
fault.
External fault (Input terminal 6)
External fault (Input terminal 7)
Digital Operator Connection Fault
The connection to the Digital Operator
was broken during operation using the
operator as RUN command source.
MEMOBUS Communications Error
A normal receive was not possible for
2 s or longer after control data were
received once.
Option Communications Error
A communications error was detected
during a run command or while setting
a frequency reference from a Communications Option Card.
Digital Operator Communications
Error 1
Communications with the Digital
Operator were not established within 5
seconds after the power was turned
on.
CPU External RAM Fault
Digital Operator Communications
Error 2
After communications were established, there was a communications
error with the Digital Operator for
more than 2 seconds.
Baseblock circuit error
–
–
–
The Inverter's control circuits are
faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
–
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuits were destroyed.
Replace the Inverter.
The Digital Operator isn't connected
properly.
Disconnect the Digital Operator
and then connect it again.
The Inverter's control circuits are
faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
–
–
–
The control circuit is damaged.
7-6
Check the communications
devices and communications signals.
Disconnect the Digital Operator
and then connect it again.
The control circuit is damaged.
CPU internal A/D converter error
Check the communications
devices and communications signals.
The Digital Operator's connector isn't
connected properly.
The control circuit is damaged.
EEPROM error
Check the connection to the Digital Operator.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
CPU internal A/D converter error
Option Card connection error
ASIC internal RAM fault
Probable Causes
-
Replace the Inverter.
The Option Card is not connected
properly.
Turn off the power and insert the
Card again.
The Inverter or Option Card is faulty.
Replace the Option Card or the
Inverter.
-
The control circuit is damaged.
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault
ASIC version fault
Communications Option Card A/D
converter error
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
The control circuit is damaged.
Watchdog timer fault
Corrective Actions
-
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
The Inverter control circuit is faulty
Replace the Inverter.
The Option Card is not connected
properly.
Turn off the power and insert the
Card again.
The Option Card's A/D converter is
faulty.
Replace the Communications
Option Card.
Communications Option Card fault.
Replace the Option Card.
Communications Option Card self
diagnostic error
Communications Option Card
model code error
Communications Option Card
DPRAM error
7-7
Alarm Detection
Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The
system will automatically returned to its original status when the cause of the alarm has been removed.
The Digital Operator display flashes and the alarm can be output at the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H203).
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing
Display
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
Meaning
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
Input Together
Both the forward and reverse run commands have been ON for more than
0.5 s.
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The following conditions occurred
when there was no Run signal.
• The main circuit DC voltage was
below the Undervoltage Detection
Level Setting (L2-05).
• The inrush current limiting resistor
bypass contactor opened.
• The control power supply voltage
when below the CUV level.
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
–
Check the sequence of the forward and
reverse run commands.
Since the rotational direction is
unknown, the motor will be decelerated to a stop when this minor fault
occurs.
See causes for UV1, UV2, and UV3
faults in the previous table.
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
Decrease the voltage so it's within
the overvoltage detection level.
The power supply voltage is too high.
specifications.
200 V class: Approx. 400 V
400 V class: Approx. 800 V
The ambient temperature is too high.
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
7-8
See corrective actions for UV1, UV2,
and UV3 faults in the previous table.
Install a cooling unit.
Cooling Fin Overheating
There is a heat source nearby.
Remove the heat source
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the setting in L8-02.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact your
The Inverter cooling fan has stopped.
Yaskawa representative.)
Inverter Overheating Pre-alarm
An OH2 alarm signal (Inverter overheating alarm signal) was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
–
Motor overheating
H3-09 is set to “E” and the motor temThe motor has overheated.
perature thermistor input exceeded the
alarm detection level.
Overtorque 1
There has been a torque higher than
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the
time in L6-03.
–
Clear the multi-function input terminal's overheating alarm input.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature input on
terminal A2.
• Make sure that the settings in L6-02
and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the overtorque.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
(blinking)
Overtorque 2
There has been a torque higher than
the setting in L6-05 for longer than the
time in L6-06.
(blinking)
Undertorque 1
There has been a torque lower than the
setting in L6-02 for longer than the
time in L6-03.
(blinking)
Undertorque 2
There has been a torque lower than the
setting in L6-05 for longer than the
time in L6-06.
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
Overspeed
The speed has been higher than the
setting in F1-08 for longer than the
time in F1-09.
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
–
• Make sure that the setting in L6-05
and time setting in L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the overtorque.
–
• Make sure that the settings in L6-02
and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the undertorque.
–
• Make sure that the setting in L6-05
and time setting in L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the undertorque.
Overshooting/undershooting are
occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't
Check the settings in F1-08 and F1-09.
appropriate.
There is a break in the PG wiring.
The PG is disconnected
The Inverter is outputting a frequency, The PG is wired incorrectly.
but PG pulses aren't being input.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been higher
than the setting in F1-10 for longer
than the time in F1-11.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Fix the wiring.
Supply power to the PG properly.
The load is too large.
Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
Lengthen the acceleration time and
deceleration time.
The load is locked.
Check the mechanical system.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't
Check the settings in F1-10 and F1-11.
appropriate.
External error detected for Communications Card other than SI-K2
Continuing operation was specified
for EF0 (F6-03 = 3)and an external
fault was input from the Option Card.
–
Remove the cause of the external fault.
7-9
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S3)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S4)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S5)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S6)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S7)
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
7-10
Meaning
Probable causes
An external fault was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
Corrective Actions
Remove the cause of the external fault.
PID Feedback Lost
A PID feedback loss detection is
enabled (b5-12 ≠ 0) and the PID feedback input was less than b5-13 (PID
feedback loss detection level) for
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID
feedback loss detection time).
–
MEMOBUS Communications Error
Normal receive was not possible for 2
s or longer after received control data.
–
Check the communications devices
and signals.
Option Card Communications
Error
A communications error occurred in a
mode where the run command or a
frequency reference is set from an
Communications Option Card.
–
Check the communications devices
and signals.
Communications on Standby
Control data was not normally
received when power was turned ON.
–
Check the communications devices
and signals.
–
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Operation Errors
An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two constant settings. It
won't be possible to start the Inverter until the constants have been set correctly. (The alarm output and fault
contact outputs will not operate.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the
errors.
Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings
Display
Meaning
Incorrect settings
Incorrect Inverter
capacity setting
The Inverter capacity setting doesn't match the Unit. Check constant o2-04 for the
correct setting.
Constant setting range
error
The constant setting is outside of the valid setting range.
Multi-function input
selection error
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to H105) settings:
• The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs.
• An up or down command was selected separately. (They must be used together.)
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) and Accel/Decel Ramp Hold (A) were
selected at the same time.
• Speed Search 1 (61) and Speed Search 2 (62) were selected at the same time for a
digital input.
• External Baseblock NO (8) and External Baseblock NC (9) were selected at the
same time.
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) were selected while PID Control (b5-01)
was enabled.
• The emergency stop command NO and NC have been set at the same time.
Option Card selection
error
The Option Card was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1-01 to
3, but an Option Card isn't connected (C option).
Control method selection error
V/f control with PG feedback was selected by setting A1-02 to 1, but a PG Speed
Control Card isn't connected.
Multi-function analog
input/pulse train input
selection error
The same setting has been selected for the analog input selection and the pulse train
input.
• H3-09 = B and H6-01 = 1
• H3-09 = C and H6-01 = 2
b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (pulse input) and H6-01 (Pulse Train Input
Function Selection) is set to a value other than 0 (frequency reference).
Constant selection error
A setting has been made that is not usable with the current control method. Example:
A function used only with open loop vector control was selected for V/f control.
PID control selection
error
The following settings have been made at the same time.
• b5-01 (PID Control Mode Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b5-15 (PID Sleep Function Operation Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) has been set to 2 or 3.
V/f data setting error
Constants E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 do not satisfy the following conditions:
• E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) &gt; E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
• E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) &gt; E3-05 (FB) ≥ E3-07 (FMIN)
Constant setting error
One of the following constant setting errors exists.
• C6-05 (Carrier frequency Gain) &gt; 6 and C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit) &lt;
C6-04 (Carrier Frequency Lower Limit)
• Upper/lower limit error in C6-03 to 04.
• C6-01 is 0 and C6-02 is 2 to E.
• C6-01 is 1 and C6-02 is 7 to E.
7-11
Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings (Continued)
Display
Meaning
EEPROM write error
7-12
Incorrect settings
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.
• Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Try setting the constants again.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Errors During Autotuning
The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table. If an error is detected, the motor
will coast to a stop and an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. The error contact output and
alarm output will not function.
Table 7.4 Errors During Autotuning
Display
Meaning
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
Motor data error
There is an error in the data input for
autotuning.
There is an error in the relationship
• Check the input data.
between the motor output and the motor
• Check the capacity of the Inverter and
rated current.
motor.
The is an error between the no-load cur• Check the motor rated current and norent setting and the input motor rated
load current.
current (when autotuning for only lineto-line resistance is performed for vector
control).
Alarm
A minor fault occurred during autotuning.
STOP key input
The STOP key was pressed to cancel
autotuning.
Line-to-line resistance error
Autotuning was not completed in the
specified time.
No-load current error
The results of autotuning has exceeded
the setting range for a user constant.
Rated slip error
Acceleration error
(detected only for
rotating autotuning)
Motor speed error
(detected only for
rotating autotuning)
• Check the input data.
• Check wiring and the machine.
• Check the load.
• Check the input data.
• Check motor wiring.
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
• If the setting of T1-03 is higher than
the Inverter input power supply voltage (E1-01), change the input data.
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
• Increase L7-01 and L7-02 (Drive
The motor did not accelerate in the specTorque Limits) if they are low.
ified time.
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
The torque reference exceded 100% dur• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
ing acceleration (for open loop vector
• Check the input data (particularly the
control only).
number of PG pulses and the number
of motor poles).
The current flow exceeded the motor
rated current.
Current detection
error
The detected current sign was the opposite of what it should be.
Check the motor wiring and installation
methods.
There is a phase fault for U, V, or W.
Leakage inductance
error
Autotuning was not completed in the
specified time.
Check motor wiring.
V/f settings excessive*
The torque reference exceeded 100%
and the no-load torque exceeded 70%
during autotuning.
• Check and correct the settings.
• Disconnect the load from the motor.
7-13
Table 7.4 Errors During Autotuning (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
Autotuning for the motor core saturation
value could not be completed in the
• Check the input data.
specified time.
• Check motor wiring.
The results of autotuning has exceeded
• If the motor is connected to the
the setting range for a user constant so a
machine, disconnect it.
temporary setting was made for the
motor core saturation coefficient.
Motor core saturation error (detected
only for rotational
autotuning)
Rated current setting
alarm*
The rated current is set too high.
Check the input data (particularly the
motor rated current).
* Displayed after autotuning has been completed.
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function
The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following
table. An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an
error code is being displayed, the display will be cleared and o3-01 will be displayed. The error contact output
and alarm output will not be operated.
Table 7.5 Errors during Copy Function
Function
Display
Meaning
Digital Operator
write-protected
Read
Copy
Verify
7-14
Illegal read data
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
o3-01 was set to 1 to read constants
when the Digital Operator was writeprotected (o3-02 = 0).
Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing constants into the Digital Operators memory.
The read data length does not agree.
Repeat the read.
Check the Digital Operator cable.
Replace the Digital Operator.
The read data are incorrect.
Illegal write status
A low Inverter voltage has been
An attempted write of a constant to the
detected.
EEPROM of the Digital Operator
Repeat the read.
failed.
Replace the Digital Operator.
ID does not match
Use the copy function for the same
The Inverter product code or software
product code and software number
number is different.
only.
Inverter capacity
does not match
The capacity of the Inverter being
copied and the capacity stored in the
Digital Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same
Inverter capacity only.
Control method
matched
The control method of the Inverter
being copied and the control method
in the Digital Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same
control method only.
Verify error
The constant written to the Inverter
was compared with the constant in the
Retry the copy.
Digital Operator and they were different.
Checksum error
The checksum in the Inverter constant
area was compared with the checksum
Retry the copy.
in the Digital Operator constant area
and they were different.
Verify error
The settings in the operator and the
inverter do not match.
–
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Due to constant setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as
expected when the system is started up. If that occurs, use this section as a reference and perform the
appropriate counter measures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to Protective and Diagnostic Functions.
If Constants Cannot Be Set
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
There are some constants that cannot be set during operation. Turn off the RUN command and then make the
settings.
Constant write enable is input.
This occurs when &quot;constant write enable&quot; (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to
H1-05). If the constant write enable input is OFF, the constants cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the
constants.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the constant A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the constants for the
initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Reset key and the
Menu key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password in
constant A1-04.)
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the constant is wrong. Refer to Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the
Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-connect it.
7-15
If the Motor Does Not Operate
The motor does not operate when the RUN key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The operation method setting is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1 (control circuit terminal), the motor will not operate
when the RUN key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE key* to switch to Digital Operator operation or set b1-02 to 0 (Digital Operator).
The LOCAL/REMOTE key can be enabled or disabled by setting o2-01. It is enabled when the drive mode is
entered and o2-01 is set to 1.
INFO
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the
frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is not in drive mode.
If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU key make
the DRIVE indicator flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER key. The DRIVE indicator will light up when drive mode is entered.
The operation method selection is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (reference selection) is set to 0 (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an external operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to 1 (control circuit terminal) and try again.
The motor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE key has been pressed to switch to Digital Operator
operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE key* again to return to the original setting.
The LOCAL/REMOTE key can be enabled or disabled by setting o2-01. It is enabled when the drive mode is
entered and o2-01 is set to 1.
INFO
7-16
Troubleshooting
A 3-wire control in effect.
The input method for a 3-wire control is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/stop (2wire control). If a 3 wire control is selected, the motor will not operate when a wiring that is suitable for 2-wire
control is used. When using a 3-wire control, refer to the wiring example and timing chart on Page 6-11 and
input the proper signals.
When using a 2-wire control, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through H1-05, terminals S3 to S7)
to a value other than 0.
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If H3-09 (Analog Input A2 Function Selection) is set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input,
then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The load may be too heavy. The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost function, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy.
Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The motor only rotates in one direction.
&quot;Reverse run prohibited&quot; is selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the Inverter will not accept reverse run commands. To use both forward and reverse operation, set b104 to 0.
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor operates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is faulty. When the Inverter T1(U),
T2(V), and T3(W) are properly connected to the motor T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W), the motor operates in a forward direction when a forward run command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer
and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W, or use constant b1-04 to
reverse output direction (in V/f mode only).
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit. This
can cause the torque to be insufficient, or the acceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value
set for the torque limit is suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input (H3-09 = 10 to 12 or 15), check to be sure
that the analog input value is suitable.
7-17
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be
very long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the speed may drop already at
low output torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
Autotuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not work properly if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning, or set the
motor constants through calculations.
If the Motor Operates at Higher Speed than the Frequency Reference
The analog frequency reference bias or gain setting is wrong.
The frequency reference bias or gain set in constant H3-03 or H3-02 influence the frequency reference. Check
to be sure that these set values are suitable.
A signal is being input to the multifunction analog input terminal A2.
When “0” (frequency bias) is set for constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function
Selection), a frequency corresponding to the terminal A2 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.
If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision
If speed control accuracy is low using the slip compensation function, maybe the slip compensation limit has
been reached. The slip compensation function does not work beyond the slip compensation limit set in constant C3-03. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
If There is Low Speed Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Open-loop
Vector Control Mode
The Inverter's maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage. (For example, if 200 VAC is input,
then the maximum output voltage will be 200 VAC.) If, as a result of vector control, the output voltage reference value exceeds the Inverter output voltage maximum value, the speed control accuracy will decrease. Use
a motor with a low rated voltage (i.e., a special motor for use with vector control).
7-18
Troubleshooting
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
The deceleration time is long even when braking resistor is connected.
The following causes are possible.
&quot;Stall prevention during deceleration enabled&quot; is set.
When braking resistor is connected, set constant L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration) to 0
(disabled) or 3 (with braking resistor). When this constant is set to 1 (enabled), braking resistor does not fully
functions.
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting (constants C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, maybe then the motor's power limit is reached.
Consider increasing the motor capacity.
The torque limit has been reached.
When torque limits have been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque output beyond that limits will be output. This can cause the deceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the values set for the torque limits are suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input terminal A2 Function H3-09 (set value: 10 to
12 or 15), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
If a Vertical-Axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied
(Brake ON/OFF Controlled by Digital Output)
The control sequence baybe incorrect. The Inverter goes into DC injection braking status for 0.5 seconds after
deceleration is completed. (This is the factory-set default.)
To ensure that the brake (controlled by digital output M1-M2) holds, set frequency detection 2 (H2-01 = 5) for
the multi-function contact output terminals (M1 and M2) so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output
frequency is higher than L4-01 (3.0 to 5.0 Hz). (The contacts will turn ON below L4-01.)
There is hysteresis in frequency detection 2 (i.e., a frequency detection width, L4-02 = 2.0 Hz) . Change the
setting to approximately 0.5 Hz if there are load drops during stop. Do not use the multi-function contact output run signal (H2-01 = 0) for the brake ON/OFF signal.
If the Motor Overheats
The load is too big.
If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used continuously with a torque that exceeds the motor's rated
torque, the motor will overheat. Reduce the load amount by lowering the load. Also consider increasing the
motor capacity.
7-19
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn
out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating
temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to be within the acceptable ambient operating temperature range.
The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.
When the motor is connected to the Inverter output, a surge is generated between the Inverter output and the
motor coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter's input power supply voltage (i.e.,
1,200 V for 400 V class). Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that is
higher than the maximum surge voltage.
Autotuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not work properly if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning, or set the
motor constants through calculations.
If peripheral devices like PLC’s or other are influenced by the starting or
running inverter
If electrical noise is generated by Inverter perform the following countermeasures:
• Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency.
• Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply input.
• Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's output.
• Ground the Inverter and motor.
• Separate main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring.
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates when a RUN Command is Input
The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the
ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a
high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or higher, with an operating time of 0.1 s or
more), or one that incorporates high frequencies (i.e., one designed for use with Inverters). It will also help to
some extent to lower the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02). In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
7-20
Troubleshooting
If There is Mechanical Oscillation
The machinery is making unusual sounds.
The following causes are possible.
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's characteristic frequency and the
carrier frequency.
If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may
indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with constants
C6-02 to C6-05.
There may be resonance between a machine's characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the Inverter.
To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in constants d3-01 to d3-04 or install
rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with open-loop vector control.
The gain and time constant adjustments for the slip and torque compensation may be insufficient. Lower the
gain settings and raise the delay time settings. Also adjust the AFR settings (N2-).
Vector control will not work properly if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning or set the
motor constants through calculations.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f control.
The gain and time constant adjustments for the slip and torque compensation may be insufficient. Lower the
gain settings and raise the delay time settings. Also adjust the hunting prevention function (N1-).
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f with PG control.
The ASR adjustments may are insufficient. Adjust the speed control loop (ASR) gains and integral times.
If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way, set the hunting prevention selection (constant N1-01) to 0
(disabled) and then try adjusting the gain again.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PID control.
If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P, I,
and D constants. (Refer to Page 6-104pp.)
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped
If the motor rotates even when the Inverter output is stopped, maybe the DC injection braking is insufficient.
If the motor coasts at low speed after a deceleration to stop has been executed, it means that the DC injection
braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking as follows:
• Increase the constant b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
• Increase the constant b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.
7-21
If OV (Overvoltage) is Detected When a Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls
Generation of OV (DC bus overvoltage) and stalling can occur if a fan is turning before it is started (e.g.
through the windmill effect).
This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation using DC injection braking before starting the fan. Alternatively
the speed search function can be used to catch the rotating motor.
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference
The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency
range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (constants d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (constant d3-04) settings are suitable.
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04) &times; Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the constant E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
7-22
8
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter
Maintenance and Inspection........................................8-2
Maintenance and Inspection
Outline of Maintenance
The maintenance period of the Inverter is as follows:
Maintenance Period: Within 18 months from shipping from the factory or within 12 months from being delivered to the final user, whichever comes first.
Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
• The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
• There should be no abnormal heat generation.
• The ambient temperature should not be too high.
• The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal.
• The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally.
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Confirm that the LED indicators on the front
cover have all turned OFF, and then wait until at least five minutes has elapsed before beginning the inspection. Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric
shock.
Fig 8.1 Periodic Inspections
Item
Inspection
External terminals,
Are all screws and bolts tight?
mounting bolts, connecAre connectors tight?
tors, etc.
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
PCBs
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
the PCBs?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Cooling fan
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or
has the total operating time exceeded
Replace the cooling fan.
20,000 hours?
Power elements
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
the elements?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Smoothing capacitor
Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor?
Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
Cooling fins
8-2
Corrective Procedure
Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
The Inverter consists of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order to ensure full functioning of the Inverter.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform
period inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter's installation environment and usage conditions.
The Inverter's maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.
Fig 8.2 Part Replacement Guidelines
Part
Cooling fan
Smoothing capacitor
Soft charge resistor bypass contactor
Standard Replacement Period
2 to 3 years
5 years
–
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
Replace with new part. (Determine need by
inspection.)
Determine need by inspection.
Fuses
10 years
Replace with new part.
Aluminum capacitors on PCBs
5 years
Replace with new board. (Determine need by
inspection.)
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30&deg;C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
8-3
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced
without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and when pull the fan out in
the direction of arrow 2.
2. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the cable.
3. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan.
1
Air flow direction
2
1
Fan cover
Fig 8.3 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less)
Mounting the Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction is correct (see figure above).
2. Connect the cables securely and place the connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on
the Inverter heatsink.
8-4
Maintenance and Inspection
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More
A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter.
The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the Inverter.
2. Remove the controller bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the controler.
3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connector (CN26 and CN27) from the gate driver positioned at the
back of the controller.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, use the above described procedure in reverse order to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow direction faces the top of the
Inverter.
Air flow direction
Fan cover
Controller bracket
Controller
Connector
Gate driver
Fig 8.4 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 22 kW or More)
8-5
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
1. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws (1) on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is
not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.)
4. Pull the terminal card out downwars (in direction 2).
Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Use the removal procedure in reverse order to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal circuit card and the controller card properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing
into its plan.
The connector pins may be bent if the card is forced into place!
1
2
Fig 8.5 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Always confirm that the charge indicator does not light anymore before removing or mounting the control
circuit terminal card.
IMPORTANT
8-6
9
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and
peripheral devices.
Standard Inverter Specifications.................................. 9-2
Standard Inverter Specifications
The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200V Class
Table 9.1 200 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-F7C
Control characteristics
Power supply characteristics
Output ratings
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)*1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
0.55
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
17
22
27
32
1.2
1.6
2.7
3.7
5.7
8.8
12
44
55
69
82
110
130
160
3.2
4.1
7.0
9.6
15
23
31
45
58
71
85
115
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
(Proportional to input voltage.)
145
180
215
283
346
415
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Heavy Duty selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max.*2
Normal Duty selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz max.
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
DC reactor
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-pulse rectification
&plusmn;5%
Optional
Built in
Not possible
Possible*3
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's
rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. Not available for 110kW inverters.
* 3. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse rectification.
9-2
Standard Inverter Specifications
400 V Class
Table 9.2 400 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-F7C
Control characteristics
Power supply characteristics
Output ratings
Max. applicable motor output
(kW) *1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Output ratings
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
0.55
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
1.4
1.6
2.8
4.0
5.8
6.6
9.5
13
18
24
30
1.8
2.1
31
39
3.7
5.3
7.6
8.7
12.5
17
24
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
Heavy Duty selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max.
Normal Duty selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz max.
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage fluctuation
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
&plusmn;5%
DC reactor
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rectification
Model Number CIMR-F7C
Power supply characteristics
40P7
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)*1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Control characteristics
40P4
Optional
Not possile
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
185
220
300
69
85
110
140
160
200
230
280
390
510
91
112
150
180
216
260
304
370
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
506
675
34
46
57
45
60
75
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Heavy Duty selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max.*2
Normal Duty selected (high carrier, variale torque applications): 400 Hz max.
Max. voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage fluctuation
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
&plusmn;5%
DC reactor
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rectification
Built in
Possible*3
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa standard motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the
Inverter's rated current is higher than the motor's rated current.
* 2. Not available for 220kW and 300kW inverters.
* 3. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse-rectification.
9-3
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters.
Table 9.3 Common Specifications
Model Number
CIMR-F7C
Control method
Torque characteristics
Speed control range
Speed control accuracy
Speed control response
Torque limits
Torque accuracy
Control characteristics
Frequency control range
Frequency accuracy (temperature characteristics)
Frequency setting resolution
Output frequency resolution
Overload capacity and
maximum current*2
1:100 (Open loop vector control)
&plusmn;0.2% (25&deg;C &plusmn; 10&deg;C) (Open loop vector control)
5 Hz (Open loop vector control)
Provided (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings.) (Open loop vector control)
&plusmn;5%
0.01 to 150 Hz (Heavy Duty selected.), 0.01 to 400 Hz (Normal Duty selected.)
Digital references: &plusmn; 0.01% (-10&deg;C to +40&deg;C)
Analog references: &plusmn;0.1% (25&deg;C &plusmn;10&deg;C)
Digital references: 0.01 Hz
Analog references: 0.025/50 Hz (11 bits plus sign)
0.01 Hz
Heavy Duty selected (low carrier, fconstant torque applications): 150% of rated output current for 1 minute*1
Normal Duty selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120% of rated output current for 1 minute
0 to +10V, –10 to +10 V, 4 to 20 mA, pulse train
Acceleration/Deceleration time
0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Main control functions
Approximately 20% (Approximately 125% with Braking Resistor option, braking transistor built into 200 V and 400 V Class
Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.)
Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, overtorque detection, torque limits, 16-speed control (maximum), acceleration/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, 3-wire control, autotuning (rotational or stationary), dwell functions, cooling fan ON/OFF control, slip compensation, torque compensation, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for
frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking, PID control (with sleep function), energy-saving
control, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset, and copy function.
Motor protection
Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Instantaneous overcurrent
protection
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
Fuse blown protection
Overload protection
Protective functions
Heavy Duty selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150% /0.5 Hz (Open loop vector control)
Normal Duty selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120%/0.5 Hz (Open loop vector control)
Frequency setting signal
Braking torque
Stops for fuse blown.
Heavy Duty selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150% of rated output current for 1 minute*1
Normal Duty selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120% of rated output current for 1 minute
Overvoltage protection
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
Undervoltage protection
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Momentary power loss
ridethru
By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Cooling fin overheating
Stall prevention
Grounding protection
Charge indicator
Protective structure
Ambient operating temperature
Environment
Specification
Sine wave PWM
Open loop vector control, V/f control, V/f with PG control (switched by constant setting)
Ambient operating humidity
Storage temperature
Application site
Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running.
Protection by electronic circuits.
Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
Enclosed wall-mounted type (NEMA 1): 18.5 kW or less (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Open chassis type (IP00): 22 kW or more (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
-10&deg;C to 40&deg;C (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
–10&deg;C to 45&deg;C (Open chassis type)
95% max. (with no condensation)
- 20&deg;C to + 60&deg;C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
Altitude
1000 m max.
Vibration
10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s2 max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s2 max
Note Rotational autotuning is required to obtain the specifications labeled as &quot;open loop vector control.&quot;
* 1. Not available for 200 V Class Inverters with 110 kW and the 400 V Class Inverters with 220 and 300 kW.
* 2. Increase the Inverter capacity if loads exceeding these current values are expected.
9-4
10
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also provides lists of constants.
Inverter Application Precautions ................................ 10-2
Motor Application Precautions ...................................10-5
User Constants ..........................................................10-7
10
Inverter Application Precautions
Selection
Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity
power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a compensating capacitor. Excessive peak current
can destroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the power
supply power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200 V class Inverters of 22 to 110 kW and 400 V class Inverters of 22 to 300 kW.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
Power supply
capacity (kVA)
DC or AC reactor
Required
DC or AC reactor
Not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)
Fig 10.1
Inverter Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so
that the rated output current of the Inverter is minimum 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.
Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristic generally is different from those when starting a
motor at a normal commercial power supply. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter with a
somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both, the motor and the inverter.
Options
Terminals B1, B2, , 1, 2, 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by Yaskawa.
Never connect any other devices to these terminals.
10-2
Inverter Application Precautions
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Either install the Inverter in a clean location where it is not subjected to oil mist, dust, and other contaminants,
or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so
that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not install the
Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other vertical surface.
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Upper Limits
The Digital Operator can be used to set high-speed operation up to a maximum of 400 Hz (depends on the carrier frequency). Incorrect settings can be dangerous. Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set
upper limits. (The maximum output frequency is factory-set to 50 Hz.)
DC Injection Braking
The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking current or braking time is set to a too large value.
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load
torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD2/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during acceleration or deceleration, it might be necessary to increase the acceleration or deceleration time.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
10
10-3
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and central sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing
so can cause the Inverter to malfunction. Do not turn the Inverter ON and OFF with a magnetic contactor more
than one time every 30 minutes.
Maintenance and Inspections
After turn OFF the main circuit power supply, always confirm that the CHARGE indicator does not light anymore before performing maintenance or inspections. The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause electric shock.
10-4
Motor Application Precautions
Motor Application Precautions
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor.
Low Speed Ranges
Cooling effects diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase of the motor temperature. Therefore,
the motor torque should be reduced in the low-speed range whenever using a fan cooled motor. If 100% torque
is required continuously at low speed, consider using a special inverter or vector motor.
Installation Withstand Voltage
If the input voltage is high (440 V or higher) or the wiring distance is long, the motor insulation voltage must
be considered. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
High-speed Operation
When using the motor at a high speed (50 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing
durability. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
Noise
Noise varies with the carrier frequency. At high carrier frequencies, the noise is almost the same when the
motor is operated with a commercial power supply.
10
10-5
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select an appropriate
Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor.
Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select
an Inverter by checking its rated output current. When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use
a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent voltage drop and thereby motor torque
reduction.
Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor is to be used, it must be subjected to an explosion-proof test in conjunction
with the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the
Inverter. Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in damaging.
If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 50 Hz, consult the manufacturer.
Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts and Chains)
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will
be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will
make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at low speeds
continuously.
10-6
User Constants
User Constants
Factory settings are given in the following table. These are factory settings for a 200 V Class Inverter with
0.4 kW (open loop vector control).
Table 10.1 User Constants
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
A1-00
Language selection for digital operator display (JVOP-160)
0
A1-01
Constant access level
2
A1-02
Control method selection
0
A1-03
Initialize
0
A1-04
Password
0
A1-05
Password setting
0
A2-01 to
User setting constants
A2-32
Setting
–
b1-01
Reference source selection
1
b1-02
RUN command source selection
1
b1-03
Stopping method selection
0
b1-04
Prohibition of reverse operation
0
b1-06
Control input scan
1
b1-07
Operation selection after switching to remote mode
0
b1-08
Run command selection in programming modes
0
b2-01
Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency)
0.5 Hz
b2-02
DC injection braking current
50 %
b2-03
DC injection braking time at start
0.00 s
b2-04
DC injection braking time at stop
0.50 s
b3-01
Speed search selection
b3-02
Speed search operating current
2*1
120 %*1
b3-03
Speed search deceleration time
2.0 s
b3-05
Speed search wait time
0.2 s
b4-01
Timer function ON-delay time
0.0 s
b4-02
Timer function OFF-delay time
0.0 s
b5-01
PID control mode selection
b5-02
Proportional gain (P)
0
1.00
b5-03
Integral (I) time
1.0 s
b5-04
Integral (I) limit
100.0 %
b5-05
Differential (D) time
b5-06
PID limit
0.00 s
b5-07
PID offset adjustment
0.0 %
b5-08
PID delay time constant
0.00 s
b5-09
PID output characteristics selection
b5-10
PID output gain
100.0 %
10
0
1.0
b5-11
PID reverse output selection
0
b5-12
Selection of PID feedback loss detection
0
b5-13
PID feedback loss detection level
0%
b5-14
PID feedback loss detection time
1.0 s
b5-15
PID sleep function operation level
0.0 Hz
b5-16
PID sleep operation delay time
0.0 s
b5-17
Acceleration/deceleration time for PID reference
0.0 s
b5-18
PID Setpoint Selection
0
10-7
Table 10.1 User Constants
No.
10-8
Name
Factory
Setting
0.0 %
b5-19
PID Setpoint
b6-01
Dwell frequency at start
b6-02
Dwell time at start
b6-03
Dwell frequency at stop
b6-04
Dwell time at stop
b8-01
Energy-saving mode selection
b8-02
Energy-saving gain
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time constant
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
b8-05
Power detection filter time constant
b8-06
Search operation voltage limiter
C1-01
Acceleration time 1
10.0 s
C1-02
Deceleration time 1
10.0 s
C1-03
Acceleration time 2
10.0 s
C1-04
Deceleration time 2
10.0 s
C1-05
Acceleration time 3
10.0 s
C1-06
Deceleration time 3
10.0 s
C1-07
Acceleration time 4
10.0 s
C1-08
Deceleration time 4
10.0 s
C1-09
Emergency stop time
10.0 s
C1-10
Accel/decel time setting unit
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
0
0.7*2
0.50 s*3
*4
20 ms
0%
1
C1-11
Accel/decel time switching frequency
0.0 Hz
C2-01
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
0.20 s
C2-02
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
0.20 s
C2-03
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
0.20 s
C2-04
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
0.00 s
C3-01
Slip compensation gain
0.0*1
C3-02
Slip compensation primary delay time
C3-03
Slip compensation limit
C3-04
Slip compensation selection during regeneration
0
C3-05
Output voltage limit operation selection
0
C4-01
Torque compensation gain
C4-02
Torque compensation time constant
C4-03
Starting torque compensation (FWD)
C4-04
Starting torque compensation (REV)
C4-05
Starting torque compensation time constant
C5-01
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
C5-02
ASR integral (I) time 1
2000 ms*1
200 %
1.00
200 ms*1
0.0
0.0
10 ms
0.20
0.200 s
C5-03
ASR proportional (P) gain 2
C5-04
ASR integral (I) time 2
0.050 s
0.02
C5-05
ASR limit
5.0 %
C6-01
Heavy/Normal Duty selection
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
C6-03
Carrier Frequency Upper Limit
15 kHz*4
C6-04
Carrier Frequency Lower Limit
15 kHz*4
C6-05
Carrier Freq. Proportional Gain
00
1
6*4
Setting
User Constants
Table 10.1 User Constants
d1-01
Frequency reference 1
Factory
Setting
0.00 Hz
d1-02
Frequency reference 2
0.00 Hz
d1-03
Frequency reference 3
0.00 Hz
d1-04
Frequency reference 4
0.00 Hz
d1-05
Frequency reference 5
0.00 Hz
d1-06
Frequency reference 6
0.00 Hz
d1-07
Frequency reference 7
0.00 Hz
d1-08
Frequency reference 8
0.00 Hz
No.
Name
d1-09
Frequency reference 9
0.00 Hz
d1-10
Frequency reference 10
0.00 Hz
d1-11
Frequency reference 11
0.00 Hz
d1-12
Frequency reference 12
0.00 Hz
d1-13
Frequency reference 13
0.00 Hz
d1-14
Frequency reference 14
0.00 Hz
d1-15
Frequency reference 15
0.00 Hz
d1-16
Frequency reference 16
0.00 Hz
d1-17
Jog frequency reference
6.00 Hz
d2-01
Frequency reference upper limit
100.0 %
d2-02
Frequency reference lower limit
0.0 %
d2-03
Master speed reference lower limit
0.0 %
d3-01
Jump frequency 1
0.0 Hz
d3-02
Jump frequency 2
0.0 Hz
d3-03
Jump frequency 3
0.0 Hz
d3-04
Jump frequency width
1.0 Hz
d4-01
Frequency reference hold function selection
d4-02
+ - Speed limits
Setting
0
10 %
d6-01
Field weakening level
80 %
d6-02
Field weakening frequency limit
0.0 Hz
E1-01
Input voltage setting
200 V*5
E1-03
V/f pattern selection
E1-04
Max. output frequency
E1-05
Max. voltage
E1-06
Base frequency
50.0 Hz
E1-07
Mid. output frequency
2,4 Hz *1
E1-08
Mid. output frequency voltage
E1-09
Min. output frequency
0.5 Hz*1
E1-10
Min. output frequency voltage
2,4 V*1 *5
E1-11
Mid. output frequency 2
0.0 Hz*6
E1-12
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
0.0 V*6
E1-13
Base voltage
0.0 V*7
E2-01
Motor rated current
1.90 A*4
E2-02
Motor rated slip
2.90 Hz*4
E2-03
Motor no-load current
1.20 A*4
E2-04
Number of motor poles
4
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance
F
50.0 Hz
200.0 V*5
10
13,2 V*1 *5
9.842Ω*6
10-9
Table 10.1 User Constants
No.
10-10
Name
Factory
Setting
18.2 %*4
E2-06
Motor leak inductance
E2-07
Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
0.50
E2-08
Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
0.75
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
E2-11
Motor rated output
E3-01
Motor 2 control method selection
E3-02
Motor 2 max. output frequency
E3-03
Motor 2 max. output voltage
E3-04
Motor 2 max. output voltage frequency
50.0 Hz
E3-05
Motor 2 mid. output frequency 1
2.4 Hz *1
E3-06
Motor 2 mid. output frequency voltage 1
E3-07
Motor 2 min. output frequency
0.5 Hz *1
E3-08
Motor 2 min. output frequency voltage
2.4 V *1*5
E4-01
Motor 2 rated current
1.90 A *4
E4-02
Motor 2 rated slip
2.90 Hz *4
E4-03
Motor 2 no-load current
1.20 A *4
E4-04
Motor 2 number of poles (number of poles)
E4-05
Motor 2 line-to-line resistance
9.842Ω*4
E4-06
Motor 2 leak inductance
18.2 %*4
E4-07
Motor 2 rated capacity
14 W*4
0.40 kW*4
0
50.0 Hz
200.0 V*5
13,2 V *1*5
4
0.40 kW*4
F1-01
PG constant
F1-02
Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)
1024
1
F1-03
Operation selection at overspeed (OS)
1
F1-04
Operation selection at deviation
3
F1-05
PG rotation
0
F1-06
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
1
F1-07
Integral value during accel/decel enable/disable
F1-08
Overspeed detection level
F1-09
Overspeed detection delay time
1.0 s
F1-10
Excessive speed deviation detection level
10 %
F1-11
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
0.5 s
F1-12
Number of PG gear teeth 1
F1-13
Number of PG gear teeth 2
F1-14
PG open-circuit detection delay time
0
115 %
0
0
2.0 s
F6-01
Operation selection after communications error
1
F6-02
Input level of external error from Communications Option Card
0
F6-03
Stopping method for external error from Communications Option
Card
1
F6-04
Trace sampling from Communications Option Card
0
F6-05
I monitor unit selection
1
H1-01
Terminal S3 function selection
24
H1-02
Terminal S4 function selection
14
H1-03
Terminal S5 function selection
3 (0)*8
H1-04
Terminal S6 function selection
4 (3)*8
Setting
User Constants
Table 10.1 User Constants
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
6 (4)*8
H1-05
Terminal S7 function selection
H2-01
Terminal M1-M2 function selection
0
H2-02
Terminal M3-M4 function selection
1
H2-03
Terminal M5-M6 function selection
2
H3-01
Analog input A1 Signal level selection
0
H3-02
Gain (terminal A1)
100.0 %
H3-03
Bias (terminal A1)
0.0 %
H3-08
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection
2
H3-09
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection
0
H3-10
Gain (terminal A2)
100.0 %
H3-11
Bias (terminal A2)
0.0 %
H3-12
Analog input filter time constant
0.00 s
H3-13
Terminal A1/A2 switching
0
H4-01
Monitor selection (terminal FM)
H4-02
Gain (terminal FM)
100 %
2
H4-03
Bias (terminal FM)
0.0 %
H4-04
Monitor selection (terminal AM)
H4-05
Gain (terminal AM)
50 %
H4-06
Bias (terminal AM)
0.0 %
H4-07
Analog output 1 signal level selection
0
H4-08
Analog output 2 signal level selection
0
H5-01
Station address
1F
H5-02
Communications speed selection
3
3
H5-03
Communications parity selection
0
H5-04
Stopping method after communications error
3
H5-05
Communications error detection selection
H5-06
Send wait time
1
5 ms
H5-07
RTS control ON/OFF
1
H6-01
Pulse train input function selection
0
H6-02
Pulse train input scaling
1440 Hz
H6-03
Pulse train input gain
100.0 %
H6-04
Pulse train input bias
0.0 %
H6-05
Pulse train input filter time
0.10 s
H6-06
Pulse train monitor selection
H6-07
Pulse train monitor scaling
2
L1-01
Motor protection selection
L1-02
Motor protection time constant
L1-03
Alarm operation selection during motor overheating
3
L1-04
Motor overheating operation selection
1
1440 Hz
10
1
1.0 min
L1-05
Motor temperature input filter time constant
L2-01
Momentary power loss detection
0.20 s
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
0.1 s*4
L2-03
Min. baseblock time
0.1s *4
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
0.3 s *4
L2-05
Undervoltage detection level
190 V*5
L2-06
KEB deceleration time
0
0.0 s
10-11
Table 10.1 User Constants
No.
10-12
Name
Factory
Setting
L2-07
Momentary recovery time
0 s*9
L2-08
Frequency reduction gain at KEB start
100
L3-01
Stall prevention selection during acceleration
L3-02
Stall prevention level during acceleration
120 %
1
L3-03
Stall prevention limit during accel
50 %
L3-04
Stall prevention selection during decel
L3-05
Stall prevention selection during running
L3-06
Stall prevention level during running
L4-01
Speed agreement detection level
0.0 Hz
L4-02
Speed agreement detection width
2.0 Hz
L4-03
Speed agreement detection level (+/-)
0.0 Hz
L4-04
Speed agreement detection width (+/-)
2.0 Hz
L4-05
Operation when frequency reference is missing
L4-06
Fref @ Fref Loss
L5-01
Number of auto restart attempts
1
1
120 %
0
80 %
0
L5-02
Auto restart operation selection
0
L6-01
Torque detection selection 1
0
L6-02
Torque detection level 1
150 %
L6-03
Torque detection time 1
0.1 s
L6-04
Torque detection selection 2
L6-05
Torque detection level 2
L6-06
Torque detection time 2
L7-01
Forward drive torque limit
200 %
L7-02
Reverse drive torque limit
200 %
L7-03
Forward regenerative torque limit
200 %
L7-04
Reverse regenerative torque limit
200 %
L8-01
Protect selection for internal DB resistor (Type ERF)
0
150 %
0.1 s
0
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
L8-03
Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm
3
L8-05
Input open-phase protection selection
1
L8-07
Output open-phase protection selection
0
L8-09
Ground protection selection
1
L8-10
Cooling fan control selection
0
L8-11
Cooling fan control delay time
L8-12
Ambient temperature
95 &deg;C
60 s
45 &deg;C
L8-15
OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds
1
L8-19
Soft CLA selection
1
N1-01
Hunting-prevention function selection
N1-02
Hunting-prevention gain
1
N2-01
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) gain
N2-02
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant
50 ms
N2-03
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant 2
750 ms
N3-01
High-slip braking deceleration frequency width
N3-02
High-slip braking current limit
N3-03
High-slip braking stop dwell time
1.0 s
N3-04
High-slip braking OL time
40 s
o1-01
Monitor selection
o1-02
Monitor selection after powerup
1
o1-03
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
0
1.00
1.00
5%
150 %
6
Setting
User Constants
Table 10.1 User Constants
No.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Name
o1-05
LCD Focus
o2-01
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable
Factory
Setting
3
Setting
1
o2-02
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
1
o2-03
User constant initial value
0
o2-04
kVA selection
o2-05
Frequency reference setting method selection
0
o2-06
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
0
0*4
o2-07
Cumulative operation time setting
o2-08
Cumulative operation time selection
0 hr
o2-09
Initialize mode
o2-10
Fan operation time setting
o2-12
Fault trace initialisation
0
o3-01
Copy function selection
0
0
2
0 hr
o3-02
Read permition selection
0
T1-00
Motor 1/2 selection
1
T1-01
Autotuning mode selection
0
T1-02
Motor output power
0.40 kW *4
T1-03
Motor rated voltage
200.0 V*5
T1-04
Motor rated current
1.90 A*4
T1-05
Motor base frequency
50 Hz
T1-06
Number of motor poles
4
T1-07
Motor base speed
1450 rpm
Factory setting depends on the control method (A1-02).
For V/f with PG control: 1.0
For Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or more: 2.00
Initial setting depends on Inverter capacity.
Setting for 200 V class Inverters. For 400 V class Inverters, double the value.
The contents is ignored if the setting is 0.0.
E1-13 will have the same value as E1-05 after autotuning.
Factory setting in the parentheses is for 3-wire sequence.
If the set value is 0, acceleration will be to the speeds for the acceleration times (C1-01 to C1-08)
10
10-13
10-14
Sales and Service in Europe and Worldwide
European Headquarter: Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Tel.: +49 (0) 6196 - 569 300, Fax.: +49 (0) 6196 - 569 398
European Subsidiaries
UK, Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, Unit 2, Centurion Court
Brick Close, Kiln Farm, Milton Keynes Bucks MK11 3JA, UK
Tel.: +44 (0) 1908 - 565 874, Fax.: +44 (0) 1908 - 565 891
Italy, Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, Via Emilia Ovest 95/F
41013 Castelfranco E. (MO), Italy
Tel.: +39 059 - 92 21 21, Fax.: +39 059 - 92 21 68
France, Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, Z.A des B&eacute;thunes, 2, rue du Rapporteur
95310 St Quen L’Aum&ocirc;ne, France
Tel:+33 (0)1 39 09 09 00, Fax:+33 (0)1 30 37 29 02
Spain, Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, Errekalde etorbidea, 59.
20009 Donostia - San Sebastian, Spain
Tel:+34 943 360 832, Fax:+34 943 360 193
Headquarters Worldwide
Tokyo Office
Yaskawa Electric Corporation, New Pier Takeshiba South Tower
1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo 105-0022, Japan
Tel.: +81 (0) 3 - 5402 4511, Fax.: +81 (0) 3 - 5402 4580
American Headquarter
Yaskawa Electric America Inc., 2121 Norman Drive South
Waukegan, Il 60085, U.S.A.
Tel.: +1 (847)- 887-7000, Fax.: +1 (847)- 887-7370
Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, November 2001
Printed in Germany
YEG-TOE-S616-55.1
">

Sveiki! Aš esu AI pokalbių robotas, specialiai apmokytas padėti jums su Yaskawa Varispeed F7 CIMR-F7C Inverter Instruction Manual. Aš kruopščiai peržiūrėjau dokumentą ir galiu padėti jums rasti tikslią reikiamą informaciją arba paaiškinti turinį aiškiais ir paprastais terminais. Nesvarbu, ar ieškote patarimų dėl konkrečių funkcijų, trikčių šalinimo veiksmų ar bendro naudojimo, nedvejodami užduokite savo klausimus. Kuo daugiau informacijos pateiksite apie savo rūpesčius ar poreikius, tuo tiksliau ir efektyviau galėsiu jums padėti!

Padėjėjas rašo

Padėjėjas nepasiekiamas. Bandykite dar kartą vėliau.

Panašu, kad pasiekėte dokumentą, kuris parašytas keliomis kalbomis, įskaitant ir tokią, kuri nėra jūsų gimtoji kalba. Galite naudoti šias nuorodas, kad laikinai paslėptumėte puslapius be jums pageidaujamos kalbos.